To all our customers
Regarding the change of names mentioned in the document, such as Mitsubishi
Electric and Mitsubishi XX, to Renesas Technology Corp.
The semiconductor operations of Hitachi and Mitsubishi Electric were transferred to Renesas
Technology Corporation on April 1st 2003. These operations include microcomputer, logic, analog
and discrete devices, and memory chips other than DRAMs (flash memory, SRAMs etc.)
Accordingly, although Mitsubishi Electric, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation, Mitsubishi
Semiconductors, and other Mitsubishi brand names are mentioned in the document, these names
have in fact all been changed to Renesas Technology Corp. Thank you for your understanding.
Except for our corporate trademark, logo and corporate statement, no changes whatsoever have been
made to the contents of the document, and these changes do not constitute any alteration to the
contents of the document itself.
Note : Mitsubishi Electric will continue the business operations of high frequency & optical devices
and power devices.
Renesas Technology Corp.
Customer Support Dept.
April 1, 2003
MITSUBISHI 8-BIT SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER
740 FAMILY / 7470 SERIES
Group
User’s Manual
keep safety first in your circuit designs !
● Mitsubishi Electric Corporation puts the maximum effort into making semiconductor
products better and more reliable, but there is always the possibility that trouble
may occur with them. Trouble with semiconductors may lead to personal injury,
fire or property damage. Remember to give due consideration to safety when
making your circuit designs, with appropriate measures such as (i) placement
of substitutive, auxiliary circuits, (ii) use of non-flammable material or (iii) prevention
against any malfunction or mishap.
Notes regarding these materials
● These materials are intended as a reference to assist our customers in the
selection of the Mitsubishi semiconductor product best suited to the customer’s
application; they do not convey any license under any intellectual property rights,
or any other rights, belonging to Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or a third party.
● Mitsubishi Electric Corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage, or
infringement of any third-party’s rights, originating in the use of any product
data, diagrams, charts or circuit application examples contained in these materials.
● All information contained in these materials, including product data, diagrams
and charts, represent information on products at the time of publication of these
materials, and are subject to change by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation without
notice due to product improvements or other reasons. It is therefore recommended
that customers contact Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or an authorized Mitsubishi
Semiconductor product distributor for the latest product information before
purchasing a product listed herein.
● Mitsubishi Electric Corporation semiconductors are not designed or manufactured
for use in a device or system that is used under circumstances in which human
life is potentially at stake. Please contact Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or an
authorized Mitsubishi Semiconductor product distributor when considering the
use of a product contained herein for any specific purposes, such as apparatus
or systems for transportation, vehicular, medical, aerospace, nuclear, or undersea
repeater use.
● The prior written approval of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation is necessary to
reprint or reproduce in whole or in part these materials.
● If these products or technologies are subject to the Japanese export control
restrictions, they must be exported under a license from the Japanese government
and cannot be imported into a country other than the approved destination.
Any diversion or reexport contrary to the export control laws and regulations of
JAPAN and/or the country of destination is prohibited.
● Please contact Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or an authorized Mitsubishi
Semiconductor product distributor for further details on these materials or the
products contained therein.
Table of contents
Table of contents
CHAPTER 1. HARDWARE
1.1
Description .............................................................................................................................. 1-2
1.2
Group expansion ................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.3
Performance overview .......................................................................................................... 1-6
1.4
Pin configuration ................................................................................................................. 1-10
1.5
Pin description ..................................................................................................................... 1-14
1.6
Functional block diagram .................................................................................................. 1-17
1.7
Central processing unit (CPU) .........................................................................................1-23
1.7.1 Accumulator (A) ........................................................................................................... 1-24
1.7.2 Index register X (X), Index register Y (Y) .............................................................. 1-24
1.7.3 Stack pointer (S) ......................................................................................................... 1-24
1.7.4 Program counter (PC)................................................................................................. 1-26
1.7.5 Processor status register (PS) ..................................................................................1-26
1.8
Access area .......................................................................................................................... 1-28
1.8.1 Zero page (Addresses 0000 16 to 00FF 16) .............................................................. 1-29
1.8.2 Special page (Addresses FF00 16 to FFFF 16) ........................................................ 1-29
1.9
Memory allocation ............................................................................................................... 1-30
1.10 I/O pins .................................................................................................................................. 1-35
1.10.1 I/O port ....................................................................................................................... 1-35
1.10.2 Port block diagram .................................................................................................... 1-40
1.10.3 Notes on use ............................................................................................................. 1-45
1.11 Interrupts ............................................................................................................................... 1-48
1.11.1 Description of interrupt source ............................................................................... 1-48
1.11.2 Operation description ................................................................................................ 1-52
1.11.3 Interrupt control ......................................................................................................... 1-55
1.11.4 Notes on use ............................................................................................................. 1-57
1.11.5 Related registers ....................................................................................................... 1-59
1.12 Timers ..................................................................................................................................... 1-62
1.12.1 Operation description ................................................................................................ 1-64
1.12.2 Description of modes ................................................................................................ 1-65
1.12.3 Input latch function ................................................................................................... 1-79
1.12.4 Updating of contents of Timer and Timer latch ................................................... 1-80
1.12.5 Notes on use ............................................................................................................. 1-82
1.12.6 Related registers ....................................................................................................... 1-83
1.13 Serial I/O ................................................................................................................................ 1-89
1.13A 7470/7471 group part .............................................................................................. 1-90
1.13A.1 Operation description ............................................................................................. 1-90
1.13A.2 Byte specification mode .........................................................................................1-98
1.13A.3 Pins ......................................................................................................................... 1-101
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
i
Table of contents
1.13A.4 Notes on use ......................................................................................................... 1-101
1.13A.5 Related registers ...................................................................................................1-102
1.13B 7477/7478 group part ........................................................................................... 1-105
1.13B.1 Operation description .......................................................................................... 1-105
1.13B.2 Pins ......................................................................................................................... 1-127
1.13B.3 Notes on use ......................................................................................................... 1-128
1.13B.4 Related registers ...................................................................................................1-131
1.14 A-D converter ..................................................................................................................... 1-139
1.14.1 A-D conversion method ......................................................................................... 1-140
1.14.2 Pins ........................................................................................................................... 1-144
1.14.3 Notes on use ........................................................................................................... 1-144
1.14.4 References ............................................................................................................... 1-145
1.14.5 Related registers .....................................................................................................1-147
1.15 Reset ..................................................................................................................................... 1-149
1.15.1 Operation description ............................................................................................. 1-149
1.15.2 Internal status immediately after reset release ................................................. 1-151
1.15.3 Notes on use ........................................................................................................... 1-152
1.16 Oscillation circuit .............................................................................................................. 1-153
1.16.1 Oscillation circuit .....................................................................................................1-153
1.16.2 Sub-clock oscillation circuit ................................................................................... 1-155
1.16.3 Oscillation operation ...............................................................................................1-156
1.16.4 Oscillation stabilizing time ..................................................................................... 1-158
1.16.5 Notes on use ........................................................................................................... 1-159
1.17 Low-power dissipation function .................................................................................... 1-160
1.17.1 Stop mode ................................................................................................................ 1-162
1.17.2 Wait mode ................................................................................................................ 1-166
1.17.3 Notes on use ........................................................................................................... 1-169
1.17.4 Related register .......................................................................................................1-170
1.18 State transitions ................................................................................................................ 1-171
1.19 Built-in PROM version ......................................................................................................1-175
1.19.1 EPROM mode .......................................................................................................... 1-176
1.19.2 Pin description ......................................................................................................... 1-182
1.19.3 Writing, reading, and erasing to built-in PROM ................................................ 1-185
1.19.4 Notes on use ........................................................................................................... 1-186
1.20 Emulator MCU .................................................................................................................... 1-188
1.21 Electrical characteristics .................................................................................................1-189
1.21.1 Electrical characteristics ........................................................................................ 1-189
1.21.2 Timing requirements, switching characteristics .................................................. 1-201
1.21.3 Power source current standard characteristics .................................................. 1-203
1.21.4 Port standard characteristics ................................................................................ 1-208
1.21.5 A-D conversion standard characteristics ............................................................ 1-213
ii
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Table of contents
CHAPTER 2. APPLICATION
2.1
I/O pins .................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.1 I/O port ........................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.2 Notes on use ................................................................................................................. 2-5
2.2
Interrupts ................................................................................................................................. 2-7
2.2.1 Memory allocation ......................................................................................................... 2-7
2.2.2 Processor status register (PS) .................................................................................... 2-8
2.2.3 Application example ...................................................................................................... 2-9
2.2.4 Notes on use ................................................................................................................. 2-9
2.3
Timers ..................................................................................................................................... 2-10
2.3.1 Memory allocation ....................................................................................................... 2-10
2.3.2 Application example .................................................................................................... 2-11
2.3.3 Notes on use ............................................................................................................... 2-22
2.4
Serial I/O ................................................................................................................................ 2-23
2.4.1 7470/7471 group memory allocation ....................................................................... 2-23
2.4.2 Application example .................................................................................................... 2-24
2.4.3 7477/7478 group memory allocation ....................................................................... 2-29
2.4.4 Application examples .................................................................................................. 2-30
2.4.5 Notes on use ............................................................................................................... 2-34
2.5
A-D converter ....................................................................................................................... 2-35
2.5.1 Memory allocation ....................................................................................................... 2-35
2.5.2 Application examples .................................................................................................. 2-36
2.5.3 Notes on use ............................................................................................................... 2-38
2.6
Reset ....................................................................................................................................... 2-39
2.6.1 Reset circuit ................................................................................................................. 2-39
2.6.2 Notes on use ............................................................................................................... 2-39
2.7
Oscillation circuit ................................................................................................................ 2-40
2.8
Low-power dissipation function ....................................................................................... 2-41
2.8.1 CPU mode register ..................................................................................................... 2-41
2.8.2 Application examples .................................................................................................. 2-42
2.8.3 Notes on use ............................................................................................................... 2-47
2.9
Countermeasures against noise ......................................................................................2-48
2.9.1 Shortest wiring length ................................................................................................. 2-48
2.9.2 Connection of a bypass capacitor across the VSS line and the V CC line ......... 2-51
2.9.3 Wiring to analog input pins........................................................................................ 2-51
2.9.4 Consideration for oscillator ........................................................................................ 2-52
2.9.5 Setup for I/O ports ...................................................................................................... 2-53
2.9.6 Providing of watchdog timer function by software ................................................ 2-54
2.10 Notes on programming ...................................................................................................... 2-56
2.10.1 Processor status register .........................................................................................2-56
2.10.2 Decimal calculations ................................................................................................. 2-57
2.11 Differences between 7470/7471 group and 7477/7478 group .................................. 2-58
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
iii
Table of contents
2.12 Example of application circuit .........................................................................................2-59
CHAPTER 3. APPENDIX
iv
3.1
Control registers .................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2
Mask ROM ordering method ............................................................................................. 3-14
3.3
ROM programming ordering method ............................................................................. 3-46
3.4
Mark specification form ..................................................................................................... 3-62
3.5
Package outline ................................................................................................................... 3-67
3.6
SFR memory map ................................................................................................................ 3-69
3.7
Pin configuration ................................................................................................................. 3-70
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
CHAPTER 1
HARDWARE
1.1 Description
1.2 Group expansion
1.3 Performance overview
1.4 Pin configuration
1.5 Pin description
1.6 Functional block diagram
1.7 Central processing unit (CPU)
1.8 Access area
1.9 Memory allocation
1.10 I/O pins
1.11 Interrupts
1.12 Timers
1.13 Serial I/O
1.14 A-D converter
1.15 Reset
1.16 Oscillation circuit
1.17 Low-power
dissipation function
1.18 State transitions
1.19 Built-in PROM version
1.20 Emulator MCU
1.21 Electrical characteristics
HARDWARE
1.1 Description
1.1 Description
The 7470/7471/7477/7478 group is an 8-bit single-chip microcomputer which utilizes a silicon gate CMOS
processing and has a simple instruction system of the 740 family using the same memory space for ROM,
RAM and I/O.
1-2
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.2 Group expansion
1.2 Group expansion
The 7470/7471/7477/7478 group develops with the M37470M2-XXXSP as the base chip in the 7470 series.
The classification of the 7470 series is as follows.
7470 series
7470
7471
7477
7478
7480
7481
group
group
group
group
group**
group**
**:Under development
In this manual, when multiple models are described collectively, their names are arranged by putting
“/” among them for separation.
7470 group, 7471 group → 7470/7471 group
7477 group, 7478 group → 7477/7478 group
7470 group, 7477 group → 7470/7477 group
7471 group, 7478 group → 7471/7478 group
The 7470/7471/7477/7478 group permits group expansion as shown in Figure 1.2.1. This group expansion
is all performed only by differences in memory type and capacity and the number of ports. This allows the
user to select optimum elements according to the user's system.
The 7470/7471/7477/7478 group supports the following in addition to the mask ROM version.
(1) Support of One Time PROM version
The One Time PROM version is a programmable microcomputer and can perform a one-time write
operation to the built-in programmable ROM (PROM).
For the details, refer to “1.19 Built-in PROM version.”
(2) Support of EPROM version (with window)
The built-in EPROM version is a programmable microcomputer with window and can perform write
and erase operations to the built-in EPROM.
For the details, refer to “1.19 Built-in PROM version.”
(3) Support of emulator MCU
The emulator MCU is a microcomputer designed for program development which facilitates program
development and is an optimum element for system evaluation.
For the details, refer to“1.20 Emulator MCU.”
Table 1.2.1 shows the products which the 7470/7471/7477/7478 group supports.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-3
HARDWARE
1.2 Group expansion
• Memory Expansion Plan of 7470/7471 group
ROM size
(bytes)
M37470M8/E8-XXXSP
M37471M8/E8-XXXSP/FP
M37471E8SS
16K
12K
8K
4K
0
M37470M4/E4-XXXSP
M37471M4/E4-XXXSP/FP
M37470M2-XXXSP
M37471M2-XXXSP/FP
128
192
256
384
RAM size
(bytes)
• Memory Expansion Plan of 7477/7478 group
ROM size
(bytes)
M37477M8/E8-XXXSP/FP
M37477M8T/E8TXXXSP/FP
M37478M8/E8-XXXSP/FP
M37478M8T/E8TXXXSP/FP
M37478E8SS
16K
12K
M37477M4-XXXSP/FP
M37477M4TXXXSP/FP
M37478M4-XXXSP/FP
M37478M4TXXXSP/FP
8K
4K
0
M37477M2TXXXSP/FP
M37478M2TXXXSP/FP
128
192
256
384
RAM size
(bytes)
: Mass product
: New product
: Under development
Fig. 1.2.1 Memory expansion plan of 7470/7471/7477/7478 group
1-4
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
(As of July 1996)
HARDWARE
1.2 Group expansion
Table 1.2.1 List of supported products
Product
M37470M2-XXXSP
M37470M4-XXXSP
M37470E4-XXXSP
M37470M8-XXXSP
M37470E8-XXXSP
M37471M2-XXXSP
M37471M2-XXXFP
M37471M4-XXXSP
M37471M4-XXXFP
M37471E4-XXXSP
M37471E4-XXXFP
M37471M8-XXXSP
M37471M8-XXXFP
M37471E8-XXXSP
M37471E8-XXXFP
M37471E8SS
M37471RSS
M37477M2TXXXSP
M37477M2TXXXFP
M37477M4-XXXSP
M37477M4-XXXFP
M37477M4TXXXSP
M37477M4TXXXFP
M37477M8-XXXSP
M37477M8-XXXFP
M37477M8TXXXSP
M37477M8TXXXFP
M37477E8-XXXSP
M37477E8-XXXFP
M37477E8TXXXSP
M37477E8TXXXFP
M37478M2TXXXSP
M37478M2TXXXFP
M37478M4-XXXSP
M37478M4-XXXFP
M37478M4TXXXSP
M37478M4TXXXFP
M37478M8-XXXSP
M37478M8-XXXFP
M37478M8TXXXSP
M37478M8TXXXFP
M37478E8-XXXSP
M37478E8-XXXFP
M37478E8TXXXSP
M37478E8TXXXFP
ROM
RAM
I/O Port
(bytes) (bytes)
4096
128
I/O ports: 22
(Including 4 analog
8192
192
input pins.)
16384
384
Input ports: 4
4096
8192
16384
128
192
384
63.5K
(Note)
384
4096
128
8192
192
16384
384
4096
128
8192
192
16384
384
M37478E8SS
16384
384
M37478RSS
63.5K
(Note)
384
(As of July 1996)
Package
Remarks
Mask ROM version
32P4B
42P4B
56P6N-A
42P4B
56P6N-A
42P4B
I/O ports: 28
(Including 8 analog 56P6N-A
42P4B
input pins.)
56P6N-A
Input ports: 8
42P4B
56P6N-A
42S1B-A
42S1M
32P4B
32P2W-A
32P4B
32P2W-A
32P4B
I/O ports: 18
32P2W-A
Input ports: 8
32P4B
(Including 4 analog 32P2W-A
input pins.)
32P4B
32P2W-A
32P4B
32P2W-A
32P4B
32P2W-A
42P4B
56P6N-A
42P4B
56P6N-A
42P4B
I/O ports: 20
56P6N-A
Input ports: 16
42P4B
(Including 8 analog 56P6N-A
42P4B
input pins.)
56P6N-A
42P4B
56P6N-A
42P4B
56P6N-A
I/O ports: 20
42S1B-A
Input ports: 16
(Including 8 analog
42S1M
input pins.)
One Time PROM version
Mask ROM version
One Time PROM version
Mask ROM version
One Time PROM version
Mask ROM version
One Time PROM version
EPROM version
Emulator MCU
Mask ROM version*
Mask ROM version
Mask ROM version*
Mask ROM version
Mask ROM version*
One Time PROM version
One Time PROM version *
Mask ROM version*
Mask ROM version
Mask ROM version*
Mask ROM version
Mask ROM version*
One Time PROM version
One Time PROM version *
EPROM version
Emulator MCU
Note: Address space usable as a ROM area.
*
: Extended operating temperature version.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-5
HARDWARE
1.3 Performance overview
1.3 Performance overview
Tables 1.3.1 to 1.3.4 show the performance overview of 7470/7471/7477/7478 group.
Table 1.3.1 Performance overview of 7470 group
Functions
Parameter
71 (69 basic instructions of 740 family and 2 multiplication
Number of basic instructions
and division instructions)
0.5 µ s (the minimum instructions, at 8 MHz clock input
Instruction execution time
oscillation frequency)
Clock input oscillation frequency
8 MHz (max.)
4096 bytes
M37470M2
8192 bytes
ROM
M37470M4/E4
Memory
16384 bytes
M37470M8/E8
size
128 bytes
M37470M2
192 bytes
RAM
M37470M4/E4
384 bytes
M37470M8/E8
8-bit
P0
Input/
8-bit
P1
I/O
Output
4-bit
P2
port
2-bit
P4
4-bit
Input
P3
8-bit ✕ 1
Serial I/O
8-bit timer ✕ 4
Timers
1 (in common with 2 timer)
PWM
8-bit ✕ 1 (4 channels)
A-D converter
64 levels max.
M37470M2
96 levels max.
Subroutine nesting
M37470M4/E4
192 levels max.
M37470M8/E8
5 external interrupts, 6 internal interrupts, 1 software interrupt
Interrupt
Built-in circuit with internal feedback resistor (an external
Clock generating circuit
ceramic resonator or a quartz-crystal oscillator)
2.7 V to 4.5 V
(at (2.2 VCC–2) MHz clock input oscillation frequency)
Power source voltage
4.5 V to 5.5 V
(at 8 MHz clock input oscillation frequency)
35 mW typ.
Power dissipation
(at 8 MHz clock input oscillation frequency)
Input/Output withstand voltage 5 V
Input/Output
Output current
characteristics
–5 mA to +10 mA (P0, P1, P2, P4: CMOS 3-state)
Operating temperature
–20 °C to +85 °C
Device structure
CMOS silicon gate
Package
32-pin shrink plastic molded DIP
M37470Mx/Ex-XXXSP
1-6
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.3 Performance overview
Table 1.3.2 Performance overview of 7471 group
Parameter
Functions
71 (69 basic instructions of 740 family and 2 multiplication
Number of basic instructions
and division instructions)
0.5 µs (the minimum instructions, at 8 MHz clock input
Instruction execution time
oscillation frequency)
Clock input oscillation frequency
8 MHz (max.)
M37471M2
4096 bytes
M37471M4/E4
8192 bytes
ROM
Memory
M37471M8/E8
16384 bytes
size
M37471M2
128 bytes
RAM
M37471M4/E4
192 bytes
M37471M8/E8
384 bytes
P0
8-bit
P1
8-bit
Input/
I/O
P2
8-bit
Output
P4
4-bit
port
P3
4-bit
Input
P5
4-bit
8-bit ✕ 1
Serial I/O
Timers
8-bit timer ✕ 4
PWM
1 (in common with 2 timer)
A-D converter
8-bit ✕ 1 (8 channels)
M37471M2
64 levels max.
Subroutine nesting
M37471M4/E4
96 levels max.
M37471M8/E8
192 levels max.
Interrupt
5 external interrupts, 6 internal interrupts, 1 software interrupt
Built-in circuit with internal feedback resistor (an external
Clock generating circuit
ceramic resonator or a quartz-crystal oscillator)
Built-in circuit with internal feedback resistor (a guartzSub-clock generating circuit
crystal oscillator)
2.7 V to 4.5 V
(at (2.2 VCC–2) MHz clock input oscillation frequency)
Power source voltage
4.5 V to 5.5 V
(at 8 MHz clock input oscillation frequency)
35 mW typ.
Power dissipation
(at 8 MHz clock input oscillation frequency)
Input/Output withstand voltage 5 V
Input/Output
Output current
characteristics
–5 mA to +10 mA (P0, P1, P2, P4: CMOS 3-state)
Operating temperature
–20 °C to +85 °C
Device structure
CMOS silicon gate
42-pin shrink plastic molded DIP
M37471Mx/Ex-XXXSP
Package
56-pin plastic molded QFP
M37471Mx/Ex-XXXFP
42-pin shrink ceramic DIP
M37471E8SS
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-7
HARDWARE
1.3 Performance overview
Table 1.3.3 Performance overview of 7477 group
Parameter
Functions
71 (69 basic instructions of 740 family and 2 multiplication
Number of basic instructions
and division instructions)
0.5 µs (the minimum instructions, at 8 MHz clock input
Instruction execution time
oscillation frequency)
8 MHz (max.)
Clock input oscillation frequency
M37477M2
4096 bytes
M37477M4
8192 bytes
ROM
Memory
M37477M8/E8
16384 bytes
size
M37477M2
128 bytes
M37477M4
192 bytes
RAM
M37477M8/E8
384 bytes
P0
8-bit
I/O
Input/
P1
8-bit
Output
P4
2-bit
port
P2
4-bit
Input
P3
4-bit
8-bit ✕ 1 (operable in UART mode)
Serial I/O
8-bit timer ✕ 4
Timers
1 (in common with 2 timer)
PWM
8-bit ✕ 1 (4 channels)
A-D converter
64 level max.
M37477M2
96 level max.
Subroutine nesting
M37477M4
192 level max.
M37477M8/E8
5 external interrupts, 7 internal interrupts, 1 software interrupt
Interrupt
Built-in circuit with internal feedback resistor (an external
Clock generating circuit
ceramic resonator or a quartz-crystal oscillator)
2.7 V to 4.5 V
(at (2.2 V CC–2) MHz clock input oscillation frequency)
Power source voltage
4.5 V to 5.5 V
(at 8 MHz clock input oscillation frequency)
35 mW typ.
Power dissipation
(at 8 MHz clock input oscillation frequency)
Input/Output
Input/Output withstand voltage 5 V
–5 mA to +10 mA (P0, P1, P4: CMOS 3-state)
characteristics
Output current
–20 °C to +85 °C (–40 °C to +85 °C for extended operating temperature version)
Operating temperature
CMOS silicon gate
Device structure
M37477Mx/E8-XXXSP
32-pin shrink plastic molded DIP
M37477Mx/E8TXXXSP
Package
M37477Mx/E8-XXXFP
32-pin plastic molded SOP
M37477Mx/E8TXXXFP
1-8
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.3 Performance overview
Table 1.3.4 Performance overview of 7478 group
Parameter
Functions
71 (69 basic instructions of 740 family and 2 multiplication
Number of basic instructions
and division instructions)
0.5 µs (the minimum instructions, at 8 MHz clock input
Instruction execution time
oscillation frequency)
8 MHz (max.)
Clock input oscillation frequency
4096 bytes
M37478M2
8192 bytes
ROM
M37478M4
Memory
16384 bytes
M37478M8/E8
size
128 bytes
M37478M2
192 bytes
RAM
M37478M4
384 bytes
M37478M8/E8
8-bit
P0
8-bit
I/O
P1
Input/
4-bit
P4
Output
8-bit
P2
port
4-bit
Input
P3
4-bit
P5
8-bit ✕ 1 (operable in UART mode)
Serial I/O
8-bit timer ✕ 4
Timers
1 (in common with 2 timer)
PWM
8-bit ✕ 1 (8 channels)
A-D converter
64 level max.
M37478M2
Subroutine nesting
96 level max.
M37478M4
192 level max.
M37478M8/E8
Interrupt
5 external interrupts, 7 internal interrupts, 1 software interrupt
Built-in circuit with internal feedback resistor (an external
Clock generating circuit
ceramic resonator or a quartz-crystal oscillator)
Built-in circuit with internal feedback resistor (a quartzSub-clock generating circuit
crystal oscillator)
2.7 V to 4.5 V
(at (2.2 V CC–2) MHz clock input oscillation frequency)
Power source voltage
4.5 V to 5.5 V
(at 8 MHz clock input oscillation frequency)
35 mW typ.
Power dissipation
(at 8 MHz clock input oscillation frequency)
Input/Output
Input/Output withstand voltage 5 V
characteristics
–5 mA to +10 mA (P0, P1, P4: CMOS 3-state)
Output current
Operating temperature
–20 °C to +85 °C (–40 °C to +85 °C for extended operating temperature version)
Device structure
CMOS silicon gate
M37478Mx/E8-XXXSP
42-pin shrink plastic molded DIP
M37478Mx/E8TXXXSP
Package
M37478Mx/E8-XXXFP
56-pin plastic molded QFP
M37478Mx/E8TXXXFP
M37478E8SS
42-pin shrink ceramic DIP
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-9
HARDWARE
1.4 Pin configuration
1.4 Pin configuration
Figures 1.4.1 to 1.4.4 show a pin configuration of “7470/7471/7477/7478 group.”
For pin connections in the EPROM mode of the built-in programmable ROM version, refer to “Figures
1.19.1 to 1.19.6 Pin connections in EPROM mode.”
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
1
32
2
31
3
30
4
29
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
M37470M8-XXXSP
M37470E8-XXXSP
P17/SRDY
P16/CLK
P15/SOUT
P14/SIN
P13/T1
P12/T0
P11
P10
P23/IN3
P22/IN2
P21/IN1
P20/IN0
VREF
XIN
XOUT
VSS
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
13
20
14
19
15
18
16
17
P07
P06
P05
P04
P03
P02
P01
P00
P41
P40
P33/CNTR 1
P32/CNTR 0
P31/INT1
P30/INT0
RESET
VCC
Outline 32P4B (Note)
Note: The M37470M2-XXXSP and M37470M4/E4-XXXSP are included in the 32P4B package. All of
these products are pin-compatible.
Fig. 1.4.1 Pin configuration of 7470 group
1-10
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.4 Pin configuration
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
1
42
2
41
3
40
4
39
5
38
6
37
7
36
M37471M8-XXXSP
M37471E8-XXXSP
M37471E8SS
P53
P17/S RDY
P16/CLK
P15/SOUT
P14/SIN
P13/T1
P12/T0
P11
P10
P27/IN7
P26/IN6
P25/IN5
P24/IN4
P23/IN3
P22/IN2
P21/IN1
P20/IN0
VREF
XIN
XOUT
VSS
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
P52
P07
P06
P05
P04
P03
P02
P01
P00
P43
P42
P41
P40
P33/CNTR1
P32/CNTR0
P31/INT1
P30/INT0
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
15
28
16
27
17
26
18
25
RESET
19
24
20
23
21
22
P51/XCOUT
P50/XCIN
VCC
30
29
31
32
34
33
35
36
38
37
39
40
42
41
43
44
NC
P04
P03
P02
P01
P00
P43
P42
P41
P40
NC
P33/CNTR 1
P32/CNTR0
P31/INT1
P30/INT0
NC
Outline 42P4B (Note 1)
42S1B-A (M37471E8SS)
NC
P05
P06
P07
P52
NC
VSS
P53
45
28
RESET
46
27
47
26
48
25
52
21
P17/SRDY
P16/CLK
P15/SOUT
NC
53
20
54
19
55
18
56
17
NC
P51/XCOUT
P50/XCIN
NC
VCC
VSS
AVSS
NC
XOUT
XIN
NC
49
24
16
15
14
22
13
12
11
9
10
8
7
6
4
3
2
23
NC
P14/SIN
P13/T1
P12/T0
P11
P10
P27/IN7
P26/IN6
P25/IN5
P24/IN4
P23/IN3
P22/IN2
P21/IN1
P20/IN0
VREF
NC
1
51
5
M37471M8-XXXFP
M37471E8-XXXFP
50
Outline 56P6N-A (Note 2)
NC: No connection
Notes 1 : The M37471M2-XXXSP and M37471M4/E4-XXXSP are included in the 42P4B package. All of these
products are pin-compatible.
2 : The M37471M2-XXXFP and M37471M4/E4-XXXFP are included in the 56P6N-A package. All of
these products are pin-compatible.
3 : The only differences between the 42P4B package product and the 56P6N-A package product are
package shape, absolute maximum ratings and the fact that the 56P6N-A package product has an AVSS pin.
Fig. 1.4.2 Pin configuration of 7471 group
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-11
HARDWARE
1.4 Pin configuration
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
13
20
14
19
P07
P06
P05
P04
P03
P02
P01
P00
P41
P40
P33/CNTR 1
P32/CNTR 0
P31/INT1
P30/INT0
15
18
RESET
16
17
VCC
1
32
2
31
3
30
4
29
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
M37477M8-XXXSP
M37477E8-XXXSP
M37477M8TXXXSP
M37477E8TXXXSP
P17/SRDY
P16/SCLK
P15/TXD
P14/RXD
P13/T1
P12/T0
P11
P10
P23/IN3
P22/IN2
P21/IN1
P20/IN0
VREF
XIN
XOUT
VSS
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
Outline 32P4B (Note 1)
13
20
14
19
P07
P06
P05
P04
P03
P02
P01
P00
P41
P40
P33/CNTR 1
P32/CNTR 0
P31/INT1
P30/INT0
15
18
RESET
16
17
VCC
1
32
2
31
3
30
4
29
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
M37477M8-XXXFP
M37477E8-XXXFP
M37477M8TXXXFP
M37477E8TXXXFP
P17/SRDY
P16/SCLK
P15/TXD
P14/RXD
P13/T1
P12/T0
P11
P10
P23/IN3
P22/IN2
P21/IN1
P20/IN0
VREF
XIN
XOUT
VSS
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
Outline 32P2W-A (Note 2)
Notes 1 : The M37477M2TXXXSP, M37477M4-XXXSP and M37477M4TXXXSP are included in the 32P4B package.
These products are pin-compatible.
2 : The M37477M2TXXXFP, M37477M4-XXXFP and M37477M4TXXXFP are included in the 32P2W-A package.
These products are pin-compatible.
3 : The only differences between the 32P4B package product and the 32P2W-A package product are
package shape and absolute maximum ratings.
Fig. 1.4.3 Pin configuration of 7477 group
1-12
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.4 Pin configuration
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
1
42
2
41
3
40
4
39
5
38
6
37
7
36
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
M37478M8-XXXSP
M37478E8-XXXSP
M37478M8TXXXSP
M37478E8TXXXSP
M37478E8SS
P53
P17/S RDY
P16/SCLK
P15/TXD
P14/RXD
P13/T1
P12/T0
P11
P10
P27/IN7
P26/IN6
P25/IN5
P24/IN4
P23/IN3
P22/IN2
P21/IN1
P20/IN0
VREF
XIN
XOUT
VSS
P52
P07
P06
P05
P04
P03
P02
P01
P00
P43
P42
P41
P40
P33/CNTR1
P32/CNTR0
P31/INT1
P30/INT0
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
15
28
16
27
17
26
18
25
RESET
19
24
20
23
21
22
P51/XCOUT
P50/XCIN
VCC
29
31
30
33
32
35
34
37
36
39
38
41
40
42
43
44
NC
P04
P03
P02
P01
P00
P43
P42
P41
P40
NC
P33/CNTR 1
P32/CNTR0
P31/INT1
P30/INT0
NC
Outline 42P4B (Note 1)
42S1B-A (M37478E8SS)
NC
P05
P06
P07
P52
NC
VSS
P53
45
28
RESET
46
27
47
26
P17/SRDY
P16/SCLK
P15/TXD
NC
53
20
54
19
55
18
56
17
NC
P51/XCOUT
P50/XCIN
NC
VCC
VSS
AVSS
NC
XOUT
XIN
NC
25
48
22
16
14
21
15
12
23
13
10
11
8
9
4
3
2
24
NC
P14/RXD
P13/T1
P12/T0
P11
P10
P27/IN7
P26/IN6
P25/IN5
P24/IN4
P23/IN3
P22/IN2
P21/IN1
P20/IN0
VREF
NC
1
52
7
51
6
50
5
M37478M8-XXXFP
M37478E8-XXXFP
M37478M8TXXXFP
M37478E8TXXXFP
49
Outline 56P6N-A (Note 2)
NC: No connection
Notes 1 : The M37478M2TXXXSP, M37478M4-XXXSP and M37478M4TXXXSP are included in the 42P4B package.
These products are pin-compatible
2 : The M37478M2TXXXFP, M37478M4-XXXFP and M37478M4TXXXFP are included in the 56P6N-A package.
These products are pin-compatible
3 : The only differences between the 42P4B package product and the 56P6N-A package product are package
shape, absolute maximum ratings and the fact that the 56P6N-A package product has an AVSS pin.
Fig. 1.4.4 Pin configuration of 7478 group
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-13
HARDWARE
1.5 Pin description
1.5 Pin description
Tables 1.5.1 to 1.5.3 show a pin description.
For pin functions in the EPROM mode of the built-in programmable ROM version, refer to “1.19.2 Pin
description.”
Table 1.5.1 Pin description (1)
Pin
Input/
Output
Name
V CC, VSS
Power source
AV SS
Analog power source
V REF
Reference voltage input
Input
RESET
Reset input
Input
X IN
Clock input
Input
X OUT
Clock output
P0 0–P0 7
I/O port P0
1-14
Output
I/O
Functions
• Apply the following voltage to the VCC pin:
2.7 V to 4.5 V
(at f(X IN ) = (2.2 VCC–2) MHz clock input oscillation frequency)
or
4.5 V to 5.5 V
(at f(X IN) = 8 MHz clock input oscillation frequency).
• Apply 0 V to the V SS pin.
• Ground level input pin for the A-D converter.
• Apply the same voltage as VSS pin to the AVSS pin.
Note: This pin is dedicated to 56P6N-A package
products among the 7471/7478 group.
• Reference voltage input pin for the A-D converter.
• When using the A-D converter, apply 0.5 V CC (Q
2) to VCC [V].
• When not using the A-D converter, connect to V CC.
• Reset input pin
• The microcomputer is put into a reset state by
keeping the RESET pin at “L” for 2 µs or more,
and the reset state is released by returning the
RESET pin to “H.”
• An input pin and an output pin for the main clock
generating circuit.
• Connect a ceramic resonator or a quartz-crystal
oscillator between pins X IN and X OUT.
• A feedback resistor is incorporated between the
X IN and the XOUT pins.
• To use an external clock input, connect the clock
oscillation source to the X IN pin and leave the
X OUT pin open.
• Port P0 is an 8-bit I/O port.
• The output structure is CMOS output.
• In input mode, a pull-up transistor is connectable
in units of one bit.
• In input mode, a key-on wake up function is provided.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.5 Pin description
Table 1.5.2 Pin description (2)
Pin
Input/
Output
I/O
Name
P10 –P17
I/O port P1
P20 –P27
I/O port P2
(7470/7471 group)
I/O
Input port P2
(7477/7478 group)
Input
P30 –P33
Input port P3
Input
P40 –P43
I/O port P4
I/O
Functions
• Port P1 is an 8-bit I/O port.
• The output structure is CMOS output.
• In input mode, pull-up transistor can be connected
in units of 4-bit.
• Pins P1 2 and P1 3 are in common with timer output pins T 0, T1 respectively.
• In the case of the 7470/7471 group, P14 –P17 are
in common with serial I/O pins SIN, S OUT, CLK,
S RDY respectirely.
• In the case of the 7470/7471 group, the outputs
of pins S OUT and the SRDY can be N-channel open
drain outputs.
• In the case of the 7477/7478 group, P14 –P17 are
in common with serial I/O pins RXD, TX D, SCLK ,
S RDY, respectively.
• Port P2 is an 8-bit I/O port.
• The output structure is CMOS output.
• In input mode, pull-up transistor can be connected
in units of 4-bit.
• Pins P2 0–P2 7 are in common with analog input
pins IN 0–IN7 respectively.
Note: The 7470 group has only the 4 pins P20 –P23
(IN 0–IN3 ).
• Port P2 is an 8-bit input port.
• It is impossible to connect a pull-up transistor.
• Pins P2 0–P2 7 are in common with analog lnput
pins IN 0–IN7 respectively.
Note: The 7477 group has only the 4 pins P20 –P23
(IN 0–IN 3).
• Port P3 is a 4-bit input port.
• Pins P30 , P3 1 are in common with external interrupt input pins INT0 , INT1 respectively.
• Pins P32 , P33 are in common with timer input pins
CNTR0 , CNTR1 respectively.
• Port P4 is a 4-bit I/O port.
• The output structure is CMOS output.
• In input mode, pull-up transistor can be connected
in units of 4-bit.
Note: The 7470/7477 group has only 2 pins P40
and P41 .
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-15
HARDWARE
1.5 Pin description
Table 1.5.3 Pin description (3)
Pin
P5 0–P5 3
1-16
Name
Input port P5
Input/
Output
Input
Functions
• Port P5 is a 4-bit input port.
• Pull-up transistor can be connected in units of
4-bit.
• Pins P5 0, P5 1 are in common with input/output
pins for sub-clock generating circuit XCIN , XCOUT
respectively.
• When using pins P5 0 and P5 1 as pins X CIN and
X COUT, connect a quartz-crystal oscillator between
pins X CIN and XCOUT.
• When using pins P5 0 and P5 1 as pins XCIN and
X COUT , a feedback resistor is connected between
pins X CIN and XCOUT.
• To use an external clock input, connect the clock
oscillation source to the X CIN pin and leave the
X COUT pin open.
Note: Only the 7471/7478 group has pins P5 0–P5 3.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
15
14
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
I/O port P4
Input port P3
22 21 20 19
Index
register
Y(8)
Program
counter
PCL (8)
13
Reference voltage input
VREF
4
A-D converter
INT0
INT1
Index
register
X(8)
24 23
CNTR0
16
VSS
Program
counter
PCH(8)
P3(4)
CNTR1
Processor
status
register
PS(8)
384
bytes
RAM
(Note 2)
17
VCC
P4(2)
Accumulator
A(8)
18
RESET
Reset
input
ROM
I/O port P2
9 10 11 12
P2(4)
Stack
pointer
S(8)
Data bus
1
Serial I/O(8)
Byte
counter(4)
(Note 1)
16384
bytes
Notes 1 : 4096 bytes for M37470M2-XXXSP, and 8192 bytes for M37470M4/E4-XXXSP
2 : 128 bytes for M37470M2-XXXSP, and 192 bytes for M37470M4/E4-XXXSP
8-bit
Arithmetic
and logical
unit
Clock generating
circuit
Clock
output
XOUT
Clock
input
XIN
M37470M8/E8-XXXSP BLOCK DIAGRAM
2
4
5
6
I/O port P1
3
P1(8)
Timer 4(8)
Timer 3(8)
Timer 2(8)
Timer 1(8)
7
8
PWM control
I/O port P0
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
P0(8)
Control signal
Instruction decoder
Instruction register(8)
HARDWARE
1.6 Functional block diagram
1.6 Functional block diagram
The functional block diagram of 7470/7471/7477/7478 group is shown in Figure 1.6.1 to Figure 1.6.6.
Fig. 1.6.1 M37470MX /EX -XXXSP functional block diagram
1-17
1-18
Fig. 1.6.2 M37471M X/E X-XXXSP, M37471E8SS functional block diagram
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
42 24 23
I/O port P4
33 32 31 30
P4(4)
CNTR1
21
VSS
P3(4)
Index
register
Y(8)
Program
counter
PCL (8)
18
P2(8)
Stack
pointer
S(8)
16384
bytes
I/O port P2
2
Serial I/O(8)
Byte
counter(4)
(Note 1)
ROM
Data bus
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Input port P3 Reference voltage input
VREF
8
A-D converter
INT0
INT1
Index
register
X(8)
Program
counter
PCH(8)
29 28 27 26
CNTR0
Processor
status
register
PS(8)
384
bytes
RAM
(Note 2)
22
VCC
Notes 1 : 4096 bytes for M37471M2-XXXSP, and 8192 bytes for M37471M4/E4-XXXSP
2 : 128 bytes for M37471M2-XXXSP, and 192 bytes for M37471M4/E4-XXXSP
XCIN
XCOUT
Input Port P5
1
XCOUT
8-bit
Arithmetic
and logical
unit
P5(4)
XCIN
Accumulator
A(8)
25
Clock generating
circuit
RESET
20
19
Reset
input
Clock
output
XOUT
Clock
input
XIN
M37471M8/E8-XXXSP, M37471E8SS BLOCK DIAGRAM
3
5
6
7
I/O port P1
4
P1(8)
Timer 4(8)
Timer 3(8)
Timer 2(8)
Timer 1(8)
8
9
PWM control
I/O port P0
41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34
P0(8)
Control signal
Instruction decoder
Instruction register(8)
HARDWARE
1.6 Functional block diagram
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
I/O port P4
Input port P5
INT0
15
VREF
8
7
A-D converter
Index
register
Y(8)
Program
counter
PCL(8)
8
I/O port P2
9 10 11 12 13 14
P2(8)
Stack
pointer
S(8)
16384
bytes
Data bus
4
I/O port P1
3
P1(8)
Timer 4(8)
Timer 3(8)
Timer 2(8)
Timer 1(8)
53 54 55 2
Serial I/O(8)
Byte
counter(4)
(Note 1)
ROM
Notes1 : 4096 bytes for M37471M2-XXXFP, and 8192 bytes for M37471M4/E4-XXXFP
2 : 128 bytes for M37471M2-XXXFP, and 192 bytes for M37471M4/E4-XXXFP
Input port P3 Reference voltage input
33 32 31 30
38 37 36 35
52 49 26 25
CNTR0
INT1
Index
register
X(8)
P3(4)
CNTR1
Processor
status
register
PS(8)
384
bytes
P4(4)
XCIN
XCOUT
8-bit
Arithmetic
and logical
unit
XCOUT
RAM
Program
counter
PCH(8)
21
23
(Note 2)
AVSS
VSS
22 51
VCC
P5(4)
XCIN
Accumulator
A(8)
28
Clock generating
circuit
RESET
19
18
Reset
input
Clock
output
XOUT
Clock
input
XIN
M37471M8/E8-XXXFP BLOCK DIAGRAM
5
6
PWM control
I/O port P0
48 47 46 43 42 41 40 39
P0(8)
Control signal
Instruction decoder
Instruction register(8)
HARDWARE
1.6 Functional block diagram
Fig. 1.6.3 M37471MX /EX -XXXFP functional block diagram
1-19
1-20
Fig. 1.6.4 M37477M X /E8-XXXSP/FP, M37477MX/E8TXXXSP/FP functional block diagram
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
I/O port P4
INT0
13
VREF
4
A-D converter
Index
register
Y(8)
(Note 1)
9 10 11 12
P2(4)
Stack
pointer
S(8)
16384
bytes
ROM
Input port P3 Reference voltage input Input port P2
22 21 20 19
24 23
CNTR0
P3(4)
CNTR1
INT1
Index
register
X(8)
P4(2)
Accumulator
A(8)
384
bytes
Program
counter
PCL (8)
1
Serial I/O(8)
Data bus
2
4
5
6
I/O port P1
3
P1(8)
Timer 4(8)
Timer 3(8)
Timer 2(8)
Timer 1(8)
Notes 1 : 4096 bytes for M37477M2TXXXSP/FP, and 8192 bytes for M37477M4-XXXSP/FP and M37477M4TXXXSP/FP
2 : 128 bytes for M37477M2TXXXSP/FP, and 192 bytes for M37477M4-XXXSP/FP and M37477M4TXXXSP/FP
8-bit
Arithmetic
and logical
unit
16
17
Program
counter
PCH(8)
VSS
VCC
(Note 2)
RAM
Processor
status
register
PS(8)
18
Clock generating
circuit
RESET
15
14
Reset
input
Clock
output
XOUT
Clock
input
XIN
M37477M8/E8-XXXSP/FP, M37477M8/E8TXXXSP/FP BLOCK DIAGRAM
7
8
PWM control
I/O port P0
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
P0(8)
Control signal
Instruction decoder
Instruction register(8)
HARDWARE
1.6 Functional block diagram
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
I/O port P4
Input port P5
18
VREF
8
(Note 1)
P2(8)
Stack
pointer
S(8)
16384
bytes
ROM
2
Serial I/O(8)
Notes 1 : 4096 bytes for M37478M2TXXXSP, and 8192 bytes for M37478M4-XXXSP and M37478M4TXXXSP
2 : 128 bytes for M37478M2TXXXSP, and 192 bytes for M37478M4-XXXSP and M37478M4TXXXSP
Input port P2
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Input port P3 Reference voltage input
29 28 27 26
33 32 31 30
Index
register
Y(8)
Program
counter
PCL(8)
A-D converter
INT0
INT1
1 42 24 23
CNTR0
Index
register
X(8)
P3(4)
CNTR1
Processor
status
register
PS(8)
384
bytes
21
VSS
Program
counter
PCH(8)
P4(4)
XCIN
XCOUT
8-bit
Arithmetic
and logical
unit
XCOUT
RAM
(Note 2)
22
VCC
P5(4)
XCIN
Accumulator
A(8)
25
Clock generating
circuit
RESET
20
19
Reset
input
Clock
output
XOUT
Clock
input
XIN
M37478M8/E8-XXXSP, M37478M8/E8TXXXSP, M37478E8SS BLOCK DIAGRAM
3
5
6
7
I/O port P1
4
P1(8)
Timer 4(8)
Timer 3(8)
Timer 2(8)
Timer 1(8)
8
9
PWM control
I/O port P0
41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34
P0(8)
Control signal
Instruction decoder
Instruction register(8)
HARDWARE
1.6 Functional block diagram
Fig. 1.6.5 M37478MX /E8-XXXSP, M37478MX /E8TXXXSP, M37478E8SS functional block diagram
1-21
1-22
19
18
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Fig. 1.6.6 M37478M X /E8-XXXFP, M37478MX /E8TXXXFP functional block diagram
I/O port P4
Input port P5
384
bytes
P3(4)
Index
register
Y(8)
Program
counter
PCL(8)
21
AVSS
15
7
8
(Note 1)
4
I/O port P1
3
P1(8)
Timer 4(8)
Timer 3(8)
Timer 2(8)
Timer 1(8)
53 54 55 2
Serial I/O(8)
Data bus
9 10 11 12 13 14
P2(8)
Stack
pointer
S(8)
16384
bytes
ROM
Input port P3 Reference voltage input Input port P2
VREF
8
A-D converter
INT0
INT1
Index
register
X(8)
Program
counter
PCH(8)
33 32 31 30
CNTR0
VSS
22 51
Notes 1 : 4096 bytes for M37478M2TXXXFP, and 8192 bytes for M37478M4-XXXFP and M37478M4TXXXFP
2 : 128 bytes for M37478M2TXXXFP, and 192 bytes for M37478M4-XXXFP and M37478M4TXXXFP
38 37 36 35
23
VCC
(Note 2)
RAM
Processor
status
register
PS(8)
CNTR1
52 49 26 25
Accumulator
A(8)
P4(4)
XCIN
XCOUT
8-bit
Arithmetic
and logical
unit
XCOUT
28
RESET
Reset
input
P5(4)
XCIN
Clock generating
circuit
Clock
output
XOUT
Clock
input
XIN
M37478M8/E8-XXXFP, M37478M8/E8TXXXFP BLOCK DIAGRAM
5
6
PWM control
I/O port P0
48 47 46 43 42 41 40 39
P0(8)
Control signal
Instruction decoder
Instruction register(8)
HARDWARE
1.6 Functional block diagram
HARDWARE
1.7 Central processing unit (CPU)
1.7 Central processing unit (CPU)
The CPU of 7470/7471/7477/7478 group has the following 6 registers (referred as “CPU registers”).
●
●
●
●
●
●
Accumulator (A) ·························································· 8-bit
Index register X (X) ··················································· 8-bit
Index register Y (Y) ··················································· 8-bit
Stack pointer (S) ························································ 8-bit
Processor status register (PS) ································· 8-bit
Program counter (PC) ·············································· 16-bit
high-order (PCH) ·········· 8-bit
low-order (PCL ) ············ 8-bit
Figure 1.7.1 shows a structure of CPU registers.
7
0
Accumulator
A
7
0
Index Register X
X
7
0
Index Register Y
Y
7
0
Stack Pointer
S
8 7
15
0
PCL
PCH
7
Program Counter
0
N V T B D I Z C
Processor Status Register (PS)
Carry Flag
Zero Flag
Interrupt Disable Flag
Decimal Mode Flag
Break Flag
Index X Mode Flag
Overflow Flag
Negative Flag
Fig. 1.7.1 Structure of CPU registers
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-23
HARDWARE
1.7 Central processing unit (CPU)
The CPU register states provided immediately after hardware reset are described below.
● The interrupt disable flag (I) of the Processor status register (PS) is set to “1.”
● The high-order 8 bits (PCH) of the Program counter (PC) become the contents of address FFFF16 and
the low-order 8 bits (PCL) become the contents of address FFFE 16 .
The contents of the other CPU registers are undefined, so be sure to initialize the CPU registers with
the program.
1.7.1 Accumulator (A)
The Accumulator is the central of microcomputer and is an 8-bit register. This accumulator is used for
arithmetic operations, data transfer, temporary storage, condition judgment, and is a general-purpose
register with the highest frequency of use.
1.7.2 Index register X (X), Index register Y (Y)
The Index register X and the Index register Y are 8-bit registers.
In the addressing mode using these Index registers, a value resulting from adding the contents of this
register to the operand becomes a real specified address. This addressing mode is used to make reference
to a subroutine table or a memory table. The Index registers are provided with increment, decrement,
comparison and data transfer functions and can also be used as a simplified accumulator.
In the Index register X, when the index X mode flag (T) of the Processor status register is “1,” the contents
of the Index register become an operand address.
1.7.3 Stack pointer (S)
The Stack pointer is an 8-bit register which is used to call a subroutine or generate an interrupt.
For a branch from a routine being executed to a subroutine or an interrupt processing routine, it is
necessary to temporarily store (push) in memory the return address at the termination of this processing.
Usually, the internal RAM is used as the push destination, and this area is called a stack area. The stack
pointer indicates an address in the stack area to which the data will be pushed next.
Figure 1.7.2 shows a push operation to the stack area of the register and a pop operation from the Stack
area of the register.
The Program counter and registers other than the Processor status register are not automatically pushed.
Accordingly, be sure to push necessary registers with the program.
The PHA instruction and the PLA instruction are used for push and pop operations of the Accumulator and
the PHP instruction and the PLP instruction are used for push and pop operations of the Processor status
register.
In the 7470/7471/7477/7478 group, the RAM in 0 page or 1 page is available as a stack area. Select it
by the stack page bit (bit 2) of the CPU mode register (address 00FB16 ), which will be described later (“0”
for 0 page or “1” for 1 page). In some products whose RAM capacity is 192 bytes or less, RAM does not
exist on 1 page, so be sure to set this bit to “0.”
The stack pointer is in an undefined state immediately after hardware reset. Be sure to initialize so as not
to destroy the data arranged in the RAM area.
1-24
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.7 Central processing unit (CPU)
On-going routine
• • • • • •
When an interrupt is accepted
Interrupt request (Note)
(PC H)
M(S)
(S)
• • • • • •
Execute JSR
Push return
address on
stack
(S)
(PCL)
(S)
(S)–1
•
•
•
(S)–1
M(S)
(PS)
Interrupt Service
Routine
(PC H)
• • • • • •
Push return address
on stack
(S)–1
M(S)
(S)
M(S)
(PCL )
M(S)
(S)
When a subroutine is called
(S)–1
Push contents of
Processor status
register on stack
I Flag is set from
“0” to “1”
Fetch the Jump
Vector
(S)–1
Execute RTI
Subroutine
(S)
•
•
•
(PS)
(S)
(PCL)
Execute RTS
(S)
(S)
Pop return
address from
stack
(PC L)
(S)
(PC H)
(S)+1
(PCH)
(S)+1
M(S)
Pop contents of
Processor status
register from stack
(S)+1
M(S)
(S)+1
Pop return
address from stack
M(S)
M(S)
(S)+1
M(S)
: Operation instructed by software
: Operation which is automatically performed by hardware
Note : Condition for acceptance of an interrupt • • •
Interrupt disable flag is “0” (enable state)
Interrupt enable bit is “1” (enable state)
Fig. 1.7.2 Register push and pop at interrupt generation and subroutine call
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-25
HARDWARE
1.7 Central processing unit (CPU)
1.7.4 Program counter (PC)
The Program counter is a 16-bit counter consisting of an 8-bit register PCH and an 8-bit register PC L. This
counter indicates the address at which the next instruction to be executed is stored.
The contents of this counter are automatically pushed to the stack when a subroutine is called or an
interrupt occurs.
The high-order 8 bits (PCH ) of the program counter become the contents of address FFFF16 and the loworder 8 bits (PC L) become the contents of address FFFE16 immediately after hardware reset.
1.7.5 Processor status register (PS)
The Processor status register is an 8-bit register consisting of 5 flags to indicate the state immediately
after arithmetic processing and 3 flags to determine an operation for the CPU.
Each bit of the Processor status register is described below.
(1) Carry flag (C) ...................................................... Bit 0
The carry flag holds the carry or borrow from the arithmetic logical unit after arithmetic processing.
This flag is also changed by the Shift instruction or Rotate instruction.
This flag is set to “1” by the SEC instruction and cleared to “0” by the CLC instruction.
(2) Zero flag (Z) ........................................................ Bit 1
The zero flag is set to “1” when the arithmetic processing or data transfer result is “0” and cleared
to “0” in all other cases. In the decimal operation mode, this flag is invalidated.
There is no instruction to change the contents of this flag.
(3) Interrupt disable flag (I) ................................... Bit 2
The interrupt request flag disables all instructions (except an interrupt by the BRK instruction). When
this flag is “1,” the interrupt disable state is provided. This flag is set to “1” by accepting an interrupt,
thereby disabling a multi-interrupt.
This flag is set to “1” by the SEI instruction and cleared to “0” by the CLI instruction.
This flag is set to “1” (interrupt disable state) immediately after hardware reset.
(4) Decimal mode flag (D) ...................................... Bit 3
The decimal mode flag determines whether addition and subtraction should be performed in binary
or decimal notation. When the contents of this flag are “0,” an ordinary binary operation is performed.
When they are “1,” an arithmetic operation is performed assuming that one word is a 2-digit decimal
number. In a decimal operation, decimal compensation is automatically performed (decimal operation
can be performed only by the ADC instruction and the SBC instruction).
This flag is set to “1” by the SED instruction and cleared to “0” by the CLD instruction.
This flag is put in an undefined state immediately after hardware reset. As this flag directly affects
arithmetic operations, be sure to initialize it.
(5) Break flag (B) ...................................................... Bit 4
The break flag identifies whether or not an interrupt has been caused by the BRK instruction. The
BRK instruction is used for program debugging and performs the same operation as an interrupt is
performed by executing the BRK instruction.
The Processor status register is pushed to the stack, after the B flag is automatically set to “1” in
case of the BRK instruction interrupt, or after the B flag is automatically cleared to “0” in case of the
other interrupts.
There is no instruction to change the contents of this flag.
1-26
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.7 Central processing unit (CPU)
(6) Index X mode flag (T) ....................................... Bit 5
When the Index X mode flag is “0,” arithmetic operations are performed between the Accumulator
and the memory. When this flag is “1,” direct arithmetic operations and direct data transfer between
one memory and another, between a memory and an I/O, or between one I/O and another without
passing through the accumulator. An arithmetic operation result between memory 1 directly specified
by the Index register X and memory 2 specified by an operand is stored into memory 1.
1 When the T flag is “0”
A
← A ✽ M2
2 When the T flag is “1”
M1 ← M1 ✽ M2
✽ : Denotes an arithmetic operation
A : Content of accumulataor
M1 : Contents of memory 1 directly specified by the Index register X
M2 : Contents of memory 2 specified by the operand
This flag is set to "1" by the SET instruction and cleared to "0" by the CLT instruction. This flag is
in the undefined state immediately after hardware resetting. This flag has a direct effect on arithmetic
operations. Accordingly, be sure to initialize it.
(7) Overflow flag (V) ................................................ Bit 6
The contents of the overflow flag have significance when addition and subtraction are performed
assuming that one word is a signed binary number. When an addition or subtraction result exceeds
the range of +127 to –128, this flag is set to “1.” When the BIT instruction is executed for other
cases, the contents of bit 6 of the executed memory are put into the overflow flag.
This flag is cleared to “0” by the CLV instruction, but there is no instruction to set this flag to “1.”
In the decimal operation mode, this flag is invalidated.
(8) Negative flag (N) ................................................ Bit 7
The negative flag is set to “1” when an arithmetic processing or data transfer result is negative (bit
7 is “1”). The contents of bit 7 of the executed memory are put into this flag when the BIT instruction
is executed.
There is no instruction to change the contents of this flag.
In the decimal operation mode, this flag is invalidated.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-27
HARDWARE
1.8 Access area
1.8 Access area
In the 7470/7471/7477/7478 group, all ROM, RAM and I/O and the various control registers are located in
the same memory area. Accordingly, the same instructions are used for data transfer and arithmetic
operations without discriminating between a memory and an I/O.
The Program counter consists of 16 bits and the access space is 64K-byte of memory area: addresses
000016 to FFFF 16 .
The area of the least significant 256 bytes (addresses 000016 to 00FF16 ) is called the “zero page,” and
memories with a high frequency of use such as internal RAM, I/O ports and timers are located here. The
area of the most significant 256 bytes (addresses FF00 16 to FFFF16 ) is called the “special page,” and an
internal ROM and interrupt vectors are located here.
The zero page and the special page can be accessed with 2 bytes by using each special addressing mode.
Figure 1.8.1 shows an outline of accsess area.
000016
RAM
00C016
00FF16
Zero page
SFR area
RAM
FF0016
ROM
Special page
FFFF16
Interrupt vector area
Fig. 1.8.1 Access area
1-28
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.8 Access area
1.8.1 Zero page (Addresses 0000 16 to 00FF16 )
The area of 256 bytes from addresses 000016 to 00FF 16 is called the zero page. The internal RAM and
the special function register (SFR) are located in this area.
To specify a memory or a register in this area, use the addressing mode shown in Table 1.8.1. In this
area, especially, it is possible to access this area in a shorter instruction cycle by using the zero addressing
mode.
1.8.2 Special page (Addresses FF00 16 to FFFF16 )
The area of 256 bytes from addresses FF0016 to FFFF16 is called the special page. The internal ROM
and the interrupt vector area are located in this area.
To specify a memory or subroutine in this area, use the addressing mode shown in Table 1.8.1. In this
area, especially, it is possible to jump to this area in a shorter instruction cycle by using the special page
addressing mode.
Ordinary, subroutines with high frequency of use are located in this area.
Table 1.8.1 Addressing mode accessible to each area
Addressing mode (bytes required)
Zero page (2)
Zero page indirect (2)
Zero page X (2)
Zero page Y (2)
Zero page bit (2)
Zero page bit relative (3)
Absolute (3)
Absolute X (3)
Absolute Y (3)
Relative (2)
Indirect (3)
Indirect X (2)
Indirect Y (2)
Special page (2)
Zero page reference
Special page reference
Other area reference
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
—
—
—
—
—
—
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
—
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-29
HARDWARE
1.9 Memory allocation
1.9 Memory allocation
Figure 1.9.1 and Figure 1.9.2 show the memory allocation of 7470/7471/7477/7478 group.
The memories, I/Os and others located in the access area are explained below.
● RAM
An internal RAM is located in each area shown in Table 1.9.1. The internal RAM is used as a data
storage area and a stack area for subroutine call and interrupt occurrence.
When the RAM is used as a stack area, be careful about subroutine nesting depth and interrupt levels
so that the data in the RAM is not destroyed.
● Special function register (SFR) (Addresses 00C016 to 00FF 16 )
The area from addresses 00C016 to 00FF16 is assigned to the SFR (Special Function Register).
Various control registers such as I/O ports, timers, serial I/Os, A-D converters and interrupts are
located in this SFR.
Figure 1.9.3 shows the special function register (SFR)memory map.
● ROM
An internal ROM is located in each area shown in Table 1.9.2.
The internal ROM is used to store data tables and programs. In the internal ROM, a vector area to
store jump destination addresses upon a reset or occurrence of interrupt are assigned to addresses
FFEA 16 to FFFF16 in the 7470/7471 group and to addresses FFE816 to FFFF16 in the 7477/7478 group.
Figure 1.9.4 shows the interrupt vector memory map.
Table 1.9.1 RAM area
Product
Range
M3747xM2
Addresses 000016 to 007F16
M3747xM4/E4
Addresses 000016 to 00BF16
M3747xM8/E8
Addresses 000016 to 00BF16, Addresses 0100 16 to 01BF16
Table 1.9.2 ROM area
Product
Memory type
M3747xM2
Mask ROM
M3747xM4
Mask ROM
M3747xE4
Programmable ROM
M3747xM8
Mask ROM
M3747xE8
Programmable ROM
1-30
Memory size
128 ✕ 8-bit
192 ✕ 8-bit
384 ✕ 8-bit
Range
Addresses F000 16 to FFFF16
Memory size
04K ✕ 8-bit
Addresses E000 16 to FFFF16
08K ✕ 8-bit
Addresses C000 16 to FFFF16
16K ✕ 8-bit
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.9 Memory allocation
M37470M2
M37471M2
000016
007F16
RAM
(128 bytes)
M37470M4/E4
M37471M4/E4
000016
007F16
RAM
(192 bytes)
M37470M8/E8
M37471M8/E8
000016
007F16
RAM
(192 bytes)
Zero page
Not used
00C0 16
00FF16
SFR area
00C0 16
00FF16
SFR area
00C0 16
00FF 16
010016
SFR area
RAM
(192 bytes)
01BF16
Not used
Not used
Not used
C00016
E00016
F00016
ROM
(4096 bytes)
ROM
(8192 bytes)
ROM
(16384 bytes)
FF0016
FFEA16 Interrupt vector
area
FFFF16
FF0016
FFEA16 Interrupt vector
area
FFFF16
FF00 16
FFEA16 Interrupt vector
area
FFFF16
Special
page
Fig. 1.9.1 Memory allocation of 7470/7471 group
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-31
HARDWARE
1.9 Memory allocation
M37477M4
M37478M4
M37477M2
M37478M2
000016
007F16
RAM
(128 bytes)
000016
007F16
RAM
(192 bytes)
M37477M8/E8
M37478M8/E8
000016
007F16
RAM
(192 bytes)
Zero page
Not used
00C0 16
00FF16
SFR area
00C0 16
00FF16
SFR area
00C0 16
00FF 16
010016
SFR area
RAM
(192 bytes)
01BF16
Not used
Not used
Not used
C00016
E00016
F00016
ROM
(4096 bytes)
ROM
(8192 bytes)
ROM
(16384 bytes)
FF0016
FFE8 16 Interrupt vector
area
FFFF 16
FF0016
FFE816 Interrupt vector
area
FFFF16
FF00 16
FFE816 Interrupt vector
area
FFFF16
Fig. 1.9.2 Memory allocation of 7477/7478 group
1-32
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Special
page
HARDWARE
1.9 Memory allocation
00C0 16
00C1 16
00C2 16
00C3 16
00C4 16
00C5 16
00C6 16
00C7 16
00C8 16
00C9 16
00CA16
00CB16
00CC16
00CD16
00CE16
00CF16
00D0 16
00D1 16
00D2 16
00D3 16
00D4 16
00D5 16
00D6 16
00D7 16
00D8 16
00D9 16
00DA16
00DB16
00DC16
00DD16
00DE16
00DF16
Port P0
Port P0 direction register
Port P1
Port P1 direction register
Port P2
Port P2 direction register (Note 1)
Port P3
Port P4
Port P4 direction register
Port P5 (Note 2)
Port P0 pull-up control register
Port P1-P5 pull-up control register (Note 3)
Edge polarity selection register
Input latch register
A-D control register
A-D conversion register
Serial I/O mode register
Serial I/O register
Serial I/O counter
Byte counter
(Note 4)
00E016
00E116
00E216
00E316
00E416
00E516
00E616
00E716
00E816
00E916
00EA16
00EB16
00EC16
00ED16
00EE16
00EF16
00F016
00F116
00F216
00F316
00F416
00F516
00F616
00F716
00F816
00F916
00FA16
00FB16
00FC16
00FD16
00FE16
00FF16
Transmit/receive buffer register
Serial I/O status register
Serial I/O control register
UART control register
Baud rate generator
(Note 5)
Timer 1
Timer 2
Timer 3
Timer 4
Timer FF register
Timer 12 mode register
Timer 34 mode register
Timer mode register 2
CPU mode register
Interrupt request register 1
Interrupt request register 2
Interrupt control register 1
Interrupt control register 2
Notes 1: In the 7477/7478 group, this register is not located.
2: In the 7470/7477 group, this register is not located.
3: This address is allocated P1-P4 pull-up control register for the 7470/7477 group.
4: In the 7477/7478 group, this register is not located.
5: In the 7470/7471 group, this register is not located.
Fig. 1.9.3 Special function register (SFR) memory map
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-33
HARDWARE
1.9 Memory allocation
FFEA 16
FFEB 16
FFEC16
FFED16
FFEE 16
FFEF 16
FFF0 16
FFF1 16
FFF2 16
FFF3 16
FFF4 16
FFF5 16
FFF6 16
FFF7 16
FFF8 16
FFF9 16
FFFA 16
FFFB 16
FFFC 16
FFFD 16
FFFE 16
FFFF 16
BRK instruction interrupt
A-D conversion completion interrupt
Serial I/O interrupt
Timer 4 interrupt
Timer 3 interrupt
Timer 2 interrupt
Timer 1 interrupt
CNTR0 interrupt or CNTR 1 interrupt
INT1 interrupt or key on wake up interrpt
INT0 interrupt
RESET
7470/7471 group
FFE8 16
FFE9 16
FFEA16
FFEB16
FFEC16
FFED16
FFEE16
FFEF 16
FFF0 16
FFF1 16
FFF2 16
FFF3 16
FFF4 16
FFF5 16
FFF6 16
FFF7 16
FFF8 16
FFF9 16
FFFA 16
FFFB 16
FFFC16
FFFD16
FFFE 16
FFFF 16
BRK instruction interrupt
A-D conversion completion interrupt
Serial I/O transmit interrupt
Serial I/O receive interrupt
Timer 4 interrupt
Timer 3 interrupt
Timer 2 interrupt
Timer 1 interrupt
CNTR0 interrupt or CNTR 1 interrupt
INT1 interrupt or key on wake up interrpt
INT0 interrupt
RESET
7477/7478 group
Fig. 1.9.4 Interrupt vector memory map
1-34
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.10 I/O pins
1.10 I/O pins
The 7470/7471/7477/7478 group is provided with the following I/O pins.
● I/O port (P0 to P5)
● Reset input (RESET)
● Clock input/output (XIN, XOUT, X CIN, XCOUT)
● A-D convesion reference voltage input (VREF )
● Power supply voltage input (V CC, VSS, AV SS)
Notes 1: The 7470/7477 group is not provided with port P5 and pins XCIN and X COUT.
2: The AV SS pin is dedicated to the 56P6N-A package product.
For an outline of each pin, refer to “1.5 Pin description.”
1.10.1. I/O port
(1) I/O port writing and reading
2 The input-only pin and the programmable I/O port set as input port
The values (pin states) which input to the input-only pin and to the programmable I/O port set as
input port can be read in by reading the Port register corresponding to each port.
When data is written into the Port register corresponding to each port, it can be only written in the
Port register and has no effect on the pin state.
2 The programmable I/O port set as an output port
The value written into the Port register corresponding to the programmable I/O port set as an
output port is output to the outside by way of a transistor.
When the Port register corresponding to each port has been read, each pin state is not read in
but the value written into the Port register is read. Accordingly, if the output “H” voltage has been
reduced or the output “L” voltage has been increased by an external load, the previous output
value can be correctly read.
Figure 1.10.1 shows the I/O port writing and reading and Table 1.10.1 shows the port register
address allocation.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-35
HARDWARE
1.10 I/O pins
At input : A write operation is enabled to the
Port register.
Each pin state can be read in by
reading the Port register.
Port direction
register
( “0” )
At output : An output value can be set by writing to the
Port register. The Port register can be read out.
“H” level output
*
Port direction
register
( “1” )
Port register
(When Writing)
Port register
“L” level output
Port register
(When Reading)
* : The P channel transistor and the N channel transistor are in a cut-off state.
Fig. 1.10.1 I/O port writing and reading
Table 1.10.1 Port register address allocation
Port register
Address
P0
00C0 16
P1
00C2 16
P2
00C4 16
00C6 16
P3
00C8 16
P4
00CA 16
P5 (Note)
Note: The 7470/7477 group is not provided
with P5.
1-36
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.10 I/O pins
(2) Input/output selection of the programmable I/O ports
An input/output selection of the programmable I/O ports is made by the Port direction register
corresponding to each port.
Figure 1.10.2 shows a structure of Port Pi (i = 0, 1, 2, 4) direction register.
Note: Each direction register is initialized into “0016 ” at reset, so that the I/O ports are put into an
input state.
Port Pi direction register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Port Pi direction register (PiD) (i = 0,1,2,4)
[Address 00C1 16, 00C316, 00C5 16, 00C9 16]
B
Name
0 Port Pi direction
register
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Function
0 : Port Pi 0 input mode
1 : Port Pi 0 output mode
0 : Port Pi 1 input mode
1 : Port Pi 1 output mode
0 : Port Pi 2 input mode
1 : Port Pi 2 output mode
0 : Port Pi 3 input mode
1 : Port Pi 3 output mode
0 : Port Pi 4 input mode
1 : Port Pi 4 output mode
0 : Port Pi 5 input mode
1 : Port Pi 5 output mode
0 : Port Pi 6 input mode
1 : Port Pi 6 output mode
0 : Port Pi 7 input mode
1 : Port Pi 7 output mode
At reset
R W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Notes 1: The 7477/7478 group is not provided with the port P2
direction register (input only).
2: The Port P4 is provided as below:
•7470/7477 group has 2 bits of P4 0 and P4 1.
•7471/7478 group has 4 bits of P4 0 to P4 3.
Fig. 1.10.2 Structure of Port Pi direction register (i=0, 1, 2, 4)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-37
HARDWARE
1.10 I/O pins
(3) Pull-up control
When input has been selected by the Port direction register, pull-up control can be exerted in bit units
shown in Table 1.10.1 by the Port P0 pull-up control register (address 00D0 16 ) or the Port P1–P5
pull-up control register* (address 00D116 ). At this time, control is exerted by turning on and off the
pull-up transistor.
*: The Port P1–P4 pull-up control register is arranged in the 7470/7477 group.
Note: Ports other than P0 cannot be controlled in one-bit units. For example, when P10 is pulled up
at P1 (pull-up control in units of 4 bits), P11 to P1 3 are also pulled up.
Figure 1.10.3 shows a structure of Port P0 pull-up control register, and Figure 1.10.4 shows a
structure of Port P1–P5 pull-up control register.
Port P0 pull-up control register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Port P0 pull-up control register [Address 00D0 16]
B
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Name
Port P0 0 pull-up
control bit
Port P0 1 pull-up
control bit
Port P0 2 pull-up
control bit
Port P0 3 pull-up
control bit
Port P0 4 pull-up
control bit
Port P0 5 pull-up
control bit
Port P0 6 pull-up
control bit
Port P0 7 pull-up
control bit
Function
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
Fig. 1.10.3 Structure of Port P0 pull-up control register
1-38
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
At reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R W
HARDWARE
1.10 I/O pins
Ports P1 to P5 pull-up control register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Ports P1 to P5 pull-up control register [Address 00D1 16]
b
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Name
Function
Ports P1 0 to P1 3
pull-up control bit
Ports P1 4 to P1 7
pull-up control bit
Ports P2 0 to P23 pull-up
control bit
(Note 2)
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
Ports P2 4 to P27 pull-up 0 : No pull-up
control bit
(Notes 2, 3) 1 : Pull-up
Ports P4 0 to P43 pull-up 0 : No pull-up
control bit
(Note 4) 1 : Pull-up
Nothing is allocated for this bit. This is write
disabled bit and is undefined at reading.
Ports P5 0 to P53 pull-up 0 : No pull-up
control bit
(Note 3) 1 : Pull-up
Nothing is allocated for this bit. This is write
disabled bit and is undefined at reading.
At reset
R W
0
0
0
0
0
?
? ✕
0
?
? ✕
Notes 1 : In the 7470/7477 group, the P1 to P4 Pull-up control register
is provided.
2 : In the 7477/7478 group, nothing is allocated to these bits.
They are undefined at reading.
3 : In the 7470/7477 group, nothing is allocated to these bits.
They are undefined at reading.
4 : The 7470/7477 group is provided with only P40 and P4 1.
Fig. 1.10.4 Structure of Ports P1 to P5 pull-up control register
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-39
HARDWARE
1.10 I/O pins
1.10.2 Port block diagram
Figure 1.10.5 to Figure 1.10.9 show the block diagram of I/O ports.
Port P0
Pull-up
control register
Tr1
Direction register
Data bus
Port latch
Port P0
Port P1
Data bus
Interrupt control circuit
Pull-up
control register
T34M7
Tr2
Direction register
Data bus
Port latch
Port P13
T1
Tr3
T12M3
Direction register
Data bus
Port latch
Port P1 2
T0
Tr4
Direction register
Data bus
Port latch
Port P1 1
Tr5
Direction register
Data bus
Port latch
Port P1 0
Tr1-Tr5 are pull-up transistors
Fig. 1.10.5 Block diagram of Ports P0, P10 to P1 3
1-40
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.10 I/O pins
SM7
Port P14-P17
Tr6
SM4
Direction register
Data bus
Port latch
Port P17
SRDY
SM2
SM3
Tr7
Direction register
Data bus
Port latch
Port P1 6
CLK output
CLK input
SM3
Direction register
Data bus
Tr8
SM7
Port latch
Port P1 5
SOUT
Tr9
Direction register
Data bus
Port latch
Port P1 4
SIN
Data bus
Pull-up control register
Tr6-Tr9 are pull-up transistors
Fig. 1.10.6 Block diagram of Ports P14 to P1 7 (7470/7471 group)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-41
HARDWARE
1.10 I/O pins
Port P14-P17
SIOE
SIOM
SRDY
Tr6
Direction register
Port latch
Data bus
Port P17
SRDY
SCS
SIOE
SIOM
SIOE
Tr7
Direction register
Data bus
Port latch
Port P16
SCLK output
SCLK input
SIOE
TE
Tr8
Direction register
Data bus
Port latch
Port P15
TXD
SIOE
RE
Tr9
Direction register
Data bus
Port latch
Port P14
RXD
Data bus
Pull-up
control register
Tr6-Tr9 are pull-up transistors
Fig. 1.10.7 Block diagram of Ports P14 to P1 7 (7477/7478 group)
1-42
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.10 I/O pins
Port P2 (7470/7471 group)
* : Control in units of 4-bit
Pull-up
control register
Data bus
*
Tr10
Direction register
Port latch
Data bus
Port P2
A-D conversion circuit
Multiplexer
Port P2 (7477/7478 group)
Data bus
Port P2
A-D conversion circuit
Multiplexer
Port P3
Data bus
Port P3
INT0, INT1
CNTR0, CNTR 1
* : Control in units of 4-bit (Control in units of 2-bit for 7470/7477 group )
Port P4
Data bus
Pull-up
control register
*
Tr11
(7470/7471 group)
Tr10
(7477/7478 group)
Direction register
Data bus
Port latch
Port P4
Tr10 and Tr11 are pull-up transistors
Fig. 1.10.8 Block diagram of Ports P2 to P4
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-43
HARDWARE
1.10 I/O pins
Port P5 (7471/7478 group)
Data bus
Pull-up
control register
Tr12 (7471 group)
Tr11 (7478 group)
Data bus
Port P5 3
Tr13 (7471 group)
Tr12 (7478 group)
Data bus
Port P5 2
CM4
Tr14 (7471 group)
Tr13 (7478 group)
Data bus
Port P5 1
CM4
CM4
XCIN
CM4
Tr15 (7471 group)
Tr14 (7478 group)
Data bus
Port P5 0
Tr11-Tr15 are pull-up transistors
Fig. 1.10.9 Block diagram of Port P5
1-44
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.10 I/O pins
1.10.3 Notes on use
When using I/O ports, note the following.
(1) Modify of the content of I/O port latch
When the content of the port latch of an I/O port is modified with the bit managing instruction*, the
value of the unspecified bit may be changed.
Reason
The bit managing instruction is read-modify-write instruction for reading and writing data by a byte
unit. Accordingly, when this instruction is executed on one bit of the port latch of an I/O port, the
following is executed to all bits of the port latch.
● As for a bit which is set as an input port: The pin state is read in the CPU, and is written to this
bit after bit managing.
● As for a bit which is set as an output port: The bit value is read in the CPU, and is written to this
bit after bit managing.
Make sure the following:
● Even when a port which is set as an output port is changed for an input port, its port latch holds
the output data.
● Even when a bit of a port latch which is set as an input port is not specified with a bit managing
instruction, its value may be changed in case where content of the pin differs from a content of
the port latch.
∗ bit managing instructions: SEB and CLB instruction
(2) Pull-up control
To pull-up ports by software, note the following.
● When P1 is used in the serial I/O mode, the pull-up settings corresponding to P14 to P17 are
invalidated (pull-up is impossible).
Refer to the port block diagram for details.
● When a port is set in the output mode, the pull-up setting corresponding to the port is invalidated
(pull-up is impossible).
● Ports other than P0 cannot be controlled in one-bit units. For example, when P10 is pulled up at
P1 (pull-up control in units of 4 bits), P11 to P1 3 are also pulled up.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-45
HARDWARE
1.10 I/O pins
(3) Fix of a port input level in stand-by state
Fix input levels of an input and an I/O port for getting effect of low-power dissipation in stand-by
state ∗, especially for the I/O ports of the N-channel open-drain.
Pull-up (connect the port to VCC) or pull-down (connect the port to V SS) these ports through a
resistor.
When determining a resistance value, make sure the following:
● External circuit
● Variation of output levels during the ordinary operation
∗: “Stand-by state”: The stop mode by execution of the STP instruction or the wait mode by execution
of the WIT instruction:
Reason
Even when setting as an output port with its direction register, in the following state:
• N-channel ....... when the content of the port latch is “1”
the transistor becomes the OFF state, which causes the ports to be the high-impedance state. Make
sure that the level becomes “undefined” depending on external circuits.
Accordingly, the potential which is input to the input buffer in a microcomputer is unstable in the state
that input levels of an input and an I/O port are “undefined.” This may cause power source current.
1-46
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.10 I/O pins
(4) Termination of unused pins
Table 1.10.2 shows a termination of unused pins.
Table 1.10.2 Termination of unused pins
Port
P0
P10 to P1 3
P15 , P1 7
P2 (7470/7471 group)
P4
Terminations
Pull-up (connect to VCC) Pull down (connect to Connect Connect
Open
to
to
ports through a resistor V SS ) ports through a
(Note 1)
resistor (Note 2)
V CC
VSS
(Note 2)
,
(Note 4)
,
,
(Note 3)
,
(Note 5)
×
×
,
×
×
(Note 5)
,
,
,
P2 (7477/7478 group)
×
(Note 6)
(Note 6) (Note 6)
,
,
,
P30 to P3 3
×
(Note 6)
(Note 6) (Note 6)
,
P5
×
×
,
,
(Note 8)
(Note 7)
×
V REF
,
×
×
×
×
AVSS
×
,
×
×
Notes 1: A pin that can be opened at the unused time has a circuit that does not allow a current to flow
into itself unless any read signal is internally input even if a medium-level input is applied at the
open state.
2: For programmable I/O ports, do not connect two or more ports together through a resistor to VCC
or VSS.
3: Note the following when setting them to the output mode and making the pins open.
• The ports function as input ports in the period from reset release till switching the ports to the
output mode by software. Accordingly, the power source current may be increased depending
on the input levels of the pins.
• If the Port direction register has been changed into the input mode by runaway or noise, re-set
the Port direction register to the output mode periodically by software.
4: To pull up a pin, set the Port direction register and the Port latch so that this pin may be into the
input mode or “H” output state.
5: To pull down a pin, set the Port direction register, the Port pull-up control register and the Port
latch so that this pin may be put in the no pull-up transistor state in the input mode or in the “L”
output state.
6: These pins are connect to the VCC or V SS without a resistor when the wiring is the shortest.
However, they are connect to the VCC or VSS through a resistor. In addition, the P33 pin of the
built-in programmable ROM version is used in common with the VPP pin, insert a resistor of about
5 kΩ in series and connect by the shortest wiring.
7: When using neither the P50 pin nor the P5 1 pin (used in common with the XCIN and X COUT pin),
set bit 4 of the CPU mode register to “0” (P50 and P51 functions).
8: To pull down a pin, set the port pull-up control register so that a pull-up transistor will not be
provided for this pin.
P14 , P1 6
,
(Note 4)
,
(Note 6)
,
(Note 6)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-47
HARDWARE
1.11 Interrupts
1.11 Interrupts
Interrupts are used in the following cases.
● When it is requested to execute higher-priority processing than the processing routine being executed.
● When it is necessary to observe any timing for processing.
The 7470/7471 group can generate interrupts from 12 sources and the 7477/7478 group can generate
interrupts from 13 sources.
1.11.1 Description of interrupt source
2 Priority of interrupt
The interrupts are vector interrupts with a fixed priority sequence. When two or more interrupt
requests occur at the same sampling time, they are accepted starting with the highest-priority interrupt.
This priority is determined by hardware. However, a variety of priority processing can be executed
by software when the interrupt control flags (interrupt enable bit and interrupt disable flag) are used.
2 Acceptance of interrupt
The corresponding interrupt request bit is set to “1” upon occurrence of an interrupt. When the
following conditions are satisfied in this state, this interrupt is accepted.
For the details, refer to “1.11.3 Interrupt control.”
1 When the interrupt disable flag is cleared to “0” (interrupt enable state)
2 When the interrupt enable bit is set to “1” (interrupt enable state)
Table 1.11.1 shows an interrupt priority, interrupt sources and vector addresses.
Table 1.11.1 Interrupt sources and priority
Vector
Interrupt source
Priority
7470/7471 group
7477/7478 group
High
1
Reset (Note)
FFFF 16
2
INT0 interrupt
FFFD 16
3
INT1 interrupt or key-on wake up interrupt
FFFB 16
4
CNTR0 interrupt or CNTR 1 interrupt
FFF916
5
Timer 1 interrupt
FFF716
6
Timer 2 interrupt
FFF516
7
Timer 3 interrupt
FFF316
8
Timer 4 interrupt
FFF116
Serial I/O interrupt
Serial I/O receive interrupt FFEF 16
9
10 A-D conversion completion interrupt Serial I/O transmit interrupt FFED 16
A-D conversion
11 BRK instruction interrupt
FFEB 16
completion interrupt
BRK instruction interrupt FFE9 16
12
Note: A reset operation is performed in the same way as
1-48
address
Lower
FFFE16
FFFC 16
FFFA16
FFF816
FFF616
FFF416
FFF216
FFF016
FFEE 16
FFEC 16
FFEA 16
Remark
Non-maskable
Polarity programmable
INT1: polarity programmable
Polarity programmable
BRK instruction interrupt is nonmaskable software interrupt
FFE816
an interrupt, so it is described in the table.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.11 Interrupts
(1) INT interrupt
When detecting a rising edge or a falling edge of each INT pin (INT0, INT 1), the microcomputer
generates an INT interrupt request.These polarity is selected by the edge polarity selection register
(EG: Address 00D416 ).
2 P3 0, P3 1 pins
The INT0 and INT1 pins are used in common with the P3 0 and P3 1 pins and always detect the
levels of P30 and P31.
2 In the stop mode/wait mode
When bit 5 of the Edge polarity selection register is “0,” a restoration can be attained by the INT
interrupt from the stop mode/wait mode state provided by the STP/WIT instruction. For the details,
refer to “1.17 Low-power dissipation function.”
2 After reset
At reset release, the Edge polarity selection register is cleared to “0016 ,” so the INT0 and INT 1
interrupts generate the interrupt request by detecting a falling edge. At reset release, however, the
Interrupt control register is put into the interrupt disable state, so any interrupt is not accepted.
Note: The INT0 and INT1 pins are used in common with input port P30 and P31, however, there is
no register for switching between the INT pins and the ports, so the active edges of P30 and
P3 1 are always detected. When these pins are used as ports, put the corresponding INT
interrupt into the disable state.
In the INT interrupt enable state, the INT interrupt is generated by a pin level change, thereby
causing a program run away.
(2) Key-on wake up interrupt
When bit 5 of the Edge polarity selection register is “1,” the key-on wake up interrupt request is
generated by applying the “L” level to any pin of P0 being an input port in the stop mode/wait mode
provided by the STP/WIT instruction, so that a recovery can be attained from the stop mode/wait
mode.
2 After reset
At reset release, bit 5 of the Edge polarity selection register is cleared to “0” so that the key-on
wake up interrupt request does not occur in the stop mode/wait mode.
Notes 1: In modes other than the stop mode/wait mode, the key-on wake up interrupt is disabled.
2: To select the stop mode/wait mode by the STP/WIT instruction when the interrupt disable
flag is cleared to “0” and bit 5 of the Edge polarity selection register is set to “1,” set every
input to P0 to “H.”
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-49
HARDWARE
1.11 Interrupts
Figure 1.11.1 shows a block diagram of interrupt input and key-on wake up circuit.
P33/CNTR1
Port P33 data read circuit
CNTR interrupt request signal
EG3
EG4
EG2
P32/CNTR0
Port P32 data read circuit
XCIN 1/2
P30/INT0 XIN 1/2
CM7
Port P3 0 data read circuit
EG0
Noise elimination
circuit
INT0 interrupt request signal
P31/INT1
Port P31 data read circuit
EG1
Noise elimination
circuit
EG 5
INT1 interrupt request signal
CPU stop state signal
Pull-up control register
P07
Direction register
P01
Pull-up control
register
Direction register
Port P0 data read circuit
P00
Pull-up control
register
Direction register
Note: The 7470/7477 group is not provided with the XCIN pin.
Fig. 1.11.1 Block diagram of interrupt input and key-on wake up circuit
1-50
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.11 Interrupts
(3) CNTR interrupt
When detecting a rising edge or a falling edge of each CNTR pin (CNTR0, CNTR 1), the microcomputer
generates an CNTR interrupt. For selecting the active edge of interrupt and the CNTR0/CNTR 1 pin,
the Edge polarity selection register (EG) is used.
2 After reset
At reset release, the Edge polarity selection register is cleared to “0016 ,” so the CNTR 0 interrupts
generate the interrupt request by detecting a falling edge. At reset release, however, the Interrupt
control register is put into the interrupt disable state, so any interrupt is not accepted.
Note: The CNTR0 and CNTR1 pins are used in common with input port P32 and P33, however there
is no register for switching between the CNTR pins and the ports, so the active edges of P3 2
and P3 3 are always detected. When these pins are used as ports, put the corresponding CNTR
interrupt into the disable state. In the CNTR interrupt enable state, the CNTR interrupt is
generated by a pin level change, thereby causing a program run away.
(4) Timer interrupt
The microcomputer generates the interrupt request at the rise of the next count source after the
respective timer overflows.
For the details of the timer interrupt, refer to “1.12 Timers.”
(5) Serial I/O interrupt
There is a difference in the serial I/O interrupt between the 7470/7471 group and the 7477/7478
group.
2 Serial I/O interrupt of 7470/7471 group
An interrupt request is generated upon termination of the serial I/O transmit/receive.
2 Serial I/O interrupt of 7477/7478 group
The serial I/O transmit interrupt and the serial I/O receive interrupt are available.
● Serial I/O transmit interrupt
For the Serial I/O transmit interrupt, interrupt request generation timing can be selected by bit 3
of the Serial I/O control register (SIOCON: Address 00E216 ) as shown below.
0: The data written in the Transmit buffer is transferred to the Transmit shift register, and when
the Transmit buffer becomes empty, the interrupt request is generated.
1: The interrupt request is generated when a shift operation of the Transmit shift register terminates.
Note: When the transmit enable bit is set to the enable state, the Transmit buffer becomes empty
and the transmit shift terminates. Accordingly, the interrupt request can be generated by
selecting one of these sources. To use the transmit interrupt, set the transmit enable bit to “1,”
clear the transmit interrupt request bit to “0,” and then set the transmit interrupt enable bit to
the enable state.
● Serial I/O receive interrupt
When all data has been put in the Receive shift register and the contents of the shift register have
been transferred to the Receive buffer, the interrupt request is generated.
For the details of the serial I/O interrupt, refer to “1.13 Serial I/O.”
(6) A-D conversion completion interrupt
As soon as A-D conversion terminates, the interrupt request is generated.
For the details of the A-D conversion completion interrupt, refer to “1.14 A-D Converter.”
(7) BRK instruction interrupt
This is the lowest-priority software interrupt without any corresponding interrupt enable flag, and not
affected by the interrupt disable flag. (Non maskable)
For the details, refer to “SERIES 740 SOFTWARE USER’S MANUAL.”
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-51
HARDWARE
1.11 Interrupts
1.11.2 Operation description
(1) Interrupt operation
After an interrupt is accepted, the contents of the register shown below are automatically pushed to
the stack area in sequence in the order of 1, 2 and 3.
1 Program counter high-order (PCH)
2 Program counter low-order (PCL)
3 Processor status register (PS)
After the above register is pushed, a branch is made to the vector address of the accepted interrupt.
When the RTI instruction is executed at the end of the interrupt processing routine, the contents of
the above register which were pushed onto the stack area are popped to the respective registers in
sequence in the order of 3, 2 and 1, and the processing precedent to the acceptance of the
interrupt is restarted.
Figure 1.11.2 shows the interrupt operation.
Executing routine
·······
Interrupt occurs
(Accepting interrupt request)
Suspended Contents of Program counter (high-order) are pushed onto stack
operation
Contents of Program counter (low-order) are pushed onto stack
Resume processing
Contents of Processor status register are pushed onto stack
·······
Interrupt
processing
routine
RTI instruction
Contents of Processor status register are popped from stack
Contents of Program counter (low-order) are popped from stack
Contents of Program counter (high-order) are popped from stack
: Operation commanded by software
: Internal operation to be performed automatically
Fig. 1.11.2 Interrupt operation
1-52
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.11 Interrupts
(2) Processing upon acceptance of interrupt
When an interrupt is accepted, the following operations are automatically performed.
1 The processing being executed is interrupted.
2 The contents of the Program counter and the Processor status register are pushed to the stack
area.
Figure 1.11.3 shows a change of the contents of the Program counter and the Stack pointer upon
acceptance of the interrupt.
3 The vector address (start address of the interrupt processing routine) stored in the vector area
corresponding to the generated interrupt concurrently with pushing is set in the Program counter
and the interrupt processing routine is executed.
4 After the interrupt processing routine is started, the corresponding interrupt request bit is automatically
cleared to “0.” The interrupt disable flag is set to “1,” thereby disabling a multi-interrupt.
To execute the interrupt processing routine, it is necessary to set a vector address in the vector
area corresponding to each interrupt beforehand.
Program counter
PCL
Stack area
Program counter (low-order)
PCH Program counter (high-order)
Interrupt disable flag = “0”
Stack pointer
(S)
S
(S)
Interrupt
request is
accepted
Program counter
Stack area
PCL
Vector address
PCH
(from Interrupt vector area)
Interrupt disable flag = “1”
(S) – 3
Processor status register
Program counter (low-order)
Stack pointer
S
(S) Program counter (high-order)
(S) – 3
Fig. 1.11.3 Changes of contents of Program counter and Stack pointer upon acceptance of interrupt
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-53
HARDWARE
1.11 Interrupts
(3) Timing after acceptance of interrupt
The interrupt processing routine starts with the machine cycle after termination of the instruction
being executed.
Figure 1.11.4 shows a processing time up to the execution of the interrupt processing routine and
Figure 1.11.5 shows a timing after acceptance of the interrupt.
Interrupt operation starts
Interrupt request occurs
Waiting time for
pipeline postprocessing
Main routine
∗
0 to 16 cycles
Push onto stack
Vector fetch
2 cycles
Interrupt processing routine
5 cycles
7 to 23 cycles
(At internal system clock φ = 4 MHz, 1.75 µs to 5.75 µs)
∗: At the DIV instruction executed.
Fig. 1.11.4 Processing time up to the execution of interrupt processing routine
Waiting time for
pipeline
postprocessing
Interrupt operation starts
Push onto stack
Vector fetch
φ
SYNC
R/W
Address bus
Data bus
PC
Not used
S, SPS
PCH
S-1, SPS S-2, SPS
PCL
PS
BL
BH
AL
A L , AH
AH
SYNC : CPU operation code fetch cycle
(This is an internal signal which cannot be observed from the external unit.)
BL, BH : Vector address of each interrupt
AL, AH : Jump destination address of each interrupt
SPS : “0016” or “0116”
(when the stack page bit is “0,” SPS is 0016,” and when the bit is “1,” SPS is “0116”)
Fig. 1.11.5 Timing after acceptance of interrupt
1-54
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.11 Interrupts
1.11.3 Interrupt control
Regarding interrupts other than the BRK instruction, the acceptance of them can be controlled by the
interrupt request bit, the interrupt enable bit and the interrupt disable flag. This section describes interrupt
control other than the BRK instruction.
Figure 1.11.6 shows a interrupt control diagram.
Interrupt request bit
Interrupt enable bit
Interrupt accepted
Interrupt disable flag
BRK instruction
Reset
Fig. 1.11.6 Interrupt control diagram
The interrupt request bit, the interrupt enable bit and the interrupt disable flag function independently and
do not affect one another. An interrupt is accepted when all the following conditions are satisfied.
● Interrupt request bit ............. “1”
● Interrupt enable bit .............. “1”
● Interrupt disable flag ............ “0”
The priority is determined by hardware. However, a variety of priority processing can be executed by
software when the above flag and bits are used.
Table 1.11.2 shows a interrupt control bits for individual interrupt sources.
Table 1.11.2 Interrupt control bits for individual interrupt sources
Interrupt request bits
Interrupt source
Address
Bits
00FC 16
b0
Timer 1
00FC 16
b1
Timer 2
00FC 16
b2
Timer 3
00FC 16
b3
Timer 4
00FC 16
b6 (Note 1)
Serial I/O (7470/7471 group)
00FC 16
b5 (Note 2)
Serial I/O receive (7477/7478 group)
00FC 16
b6 (Note 2)
Serial I/O transmit (7477/7478 group)
00FC 16
b7
A-D conversion
00FD 16
b0
INT0
00FD 16
b1
INT1
00FD 16
b2
CNTR0 /CNTR1
Notes 1: This bit is not provided in the 7477/7478 group.
2: This bit is not provided in the 7470/7471 group.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Interrupt enable bits
Bits
Address
b0
00FE16
b1
00FE16
b2
00FE16
b3
00FE16
b6 (Note 1)
00FE16
b5 (Note 2)
00FE16
b6 (Note 2)
00FE16
b7
00FE16
b0
00FF16
b1
00FF16
b2
00FF16
1-55
HARDWARE
1.11 Interrupts
(1) Interrupt request bit
The interrupt request bits are assigned to each bit of the Interrupt request register 1(IR1: Address
00FC 16 ) and the Interrupt request register 2(IR2: Address 00FD16 ).
If an interrupt request occurs, the corresponding interrupt request bit is set to “1.”
The interrupt request bit is held in the “1” state until the interrupt is accepted. After it is accepted,
this bit is automatically cleared to “0.”
The interrupt request bit can be cleared to “0” by software but cannot be set to “1” by software.
(2) Interrupt enable bit
The interrupt enable bits are assigned to each bit of the Interrupt control register 1 (IE1: Address
00FE 16) and the Interrupt control register 2 (IE2: Address 00FF16 ).
The interrupt enable bit controls the acceptance of the corresponding interrupt. When the interrupt
enable bit is “0,” the acceptance of the corresponding interrupt is disabled. If an interrupt request
occurs when this bit is “0,” the corresponding interrupt request bit is set to “1,” but this interrupt is
not accepted. In this case, the interrupt request bit is cleared to “0” by software or remains in the
“1” state until the interrupt enable bit is set to “1.”
When an interrupt enable bit is “1,” the corresponding interrupt is enabled. If an interrupt request
occurs when this bit is “1,” this interrupt is accepted. (However, the interrupt disable flag that will be
described later must be “0.”) The interrupt enable bit can be cleared to “0” or set to “1” by software.
(3) Interrupt disable flag
The interrupt disable flag controls the acceptance of the interrupt, and is assigned to bit 2 of the
Processor status register (PS).
When this flag is “1,” the interrupt disable state is provided. When this flag is “0,” the acceptance of
interrupt is enable state.
This flag is set to “1” by the SEI instruction and cleared to “0” by the CLI instruction.
This flag is set to “1” (interrupt disable state) automatically after the interrupt processing routine. To
use a multi-interrupt, set this flag to “0” by using the CLI instruction in the interrupt processing
routine.
2 Interrupt setting
Set an interrupt according to the procedure shown below.
1The interrupt disable flag is set to “1.”
2The interrupt enable bit is cleared to “0.”
3For the INT interrupt or the CNTR interrupt, set the active edge in the Edge polarity selection
register.
Select one of the above interrupts in bit 4 of the Edge polarity selection register because the
CNTR0 interrupt and the CNTR1 interrupt can not be used simultaneously. ( 0: CNTR 0, 1:
CNTR1 )
4The request bit of interrupt used is cleared to “0.” (Refer to “Table 1.11.2.”)
5The enable bit of interrupt used is set to “1.” (Refer to “Table 1.11.2.”)
6The interrupt disable flag is cleared to “0.”
1-56
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.11 Interrupts
1.11.4 Notes on use
(1) When using P30 to P3 3 as input ports, put the corresponding INT interrupt or the CNTR interrupt into
a disable state.
(2) Set the interrupt request bit and the interrupt enable bit for preparations for an interrupt in the
following order.
1 Clear the interrupt request bit to “0.” (No interrupt request)
2 Set the interrupt enable bit to “1.” (Interrupt enabled)
When using the INT interrupt or the CNTR interrupt, first set the interrupt detection edge and then
set the above items 1 and 2. (Refer to (4) that will be described later.)
(3) An interrupt request bit can be cleared to “0” by software, but is still remained at the value precedent
to a change immediately after execution of the clear instruction. For this reason, when executing
the BBC or BBS instruction after changing an interrupt request bit, first execute the interrupt request
bit change instruction and then execute the BBC or BBS instruction after one instruction or more.
(4) When the detection edge of the INT interrupt or that of the CNTR interrupt is switched, the corresponding
interrupt request bit may be set to “1.” Accordingly, perform setting referring to the register setting
example shown in Figure 1.11.7.
Clear the corresponding interrupt enable bit to “0”
Set the interrupt active edge
Clear the corresponding interrupt request bit to “0”
Execute one or more instructions (NOP instruction, and so on)
Set the corresponding interrupt enable bit to “1”
Fig. 1.11.7 Example of register setting
(5) Whether an interrupt is caused by the BRK instruction or not can be judged by the contents of the
break flag of the Processor status register pushed on the stack area.
● Break flag = “1” : An interrupt has been caused by the BRK instruction
● Break flag = “0” : In case of the other interrupts
Note: Make this judgment in the interrupt processing routine.
(6) When an INT interrupt request is generated by executing the STP/WIT instruction in one of the
following states, the stop mode/wait mode is released.
● When the active edge of the INT interrupt is a rising edge and the INT pin input level is “H”
● When the active edge of the INT interrupt is a falling edge and the INT pin input level is “L”
Accordingly, when executing the STP/WIT instruction, it is necessary to consider the input level of
the INT pin and the polarity of the INT edge. Examples of countermeasures for it are shown below.
1. An example of a countermeasure for the case where the stop mode/wait mode is released at the
rising edge of the INT pin input level
Point: To release the stop mode/wait mode normally, perform mode release processing in the
INT interrupt processing routine only when the STP/WIT instruction was executed at the
“L” INT pin input level.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-57
HARDWARE
1.11 Interrupts
< Main routine >
In the main routine, set the INT edge polarity according to the INT pin input level just precedent
to execution of the STP/WIT instruction.
1 INT interrupt disable
2 ● Select the falling edge when the INT pin input level is “H.”
● Select the rising edge when the INT pin input level is “L.”
3 Clear the INT interrupt request bit to “0” and enable an INT interrupt after one instruction
or more.
4 Clear the interrupt disable flag to “0.”
5 Execute the STP/WIT instruction
< INT interrupt processing routine >
In the INT interrupt processing routine, change the active edge of the INT interrupt without
performing release processing and proceed to the stop mode/wait mode in the case where the
stop mode/wait mode is released by detecting a falling edge.
● When the INT pin input level is “H” (when a rising edge is detected)
Processing for releasing the stop mode/wait mode
● When the INT pin input level is “L” (when a falling edge is detected)
[1] Select the rising edge
[2] Clear the INT interrupt request bit to “0”
[3] Pop from stack
[4] Perform 4 and 5 processing of the main routine.
2. An example of a countermeasure for the case where the stop mode/wait mode is released at the
rising edge of the INT0 pin input level or the falling edge of the INT 1 pin input level after the same
signal is input to the INT0 pin and the INT 1 pin.
Point: Select the INT interrupt, by the main routine, that becomes a source of release of the stop
mode/wait mode according to the INT pin input level just precedent to execution of the
STP/WIT instruction.
< Main routine >
1 INT0 and INT1 interrupt disable
2 Select the rising edge for the active edge of the INT0 interrupt.
Select the falling edge for the active edge of the INT 1 interrupt.
3 ● When the INT pin input level is “H”
Clear the INT1 interrupt request bit to “0” and enable the INT1 interrupt after one instruction
or more.
● When the INT pin input level is “L”
Clear the INT0 interrupt request bit to “0” and enable the INT0 interrupt after one instruction
or more.
4 Clear the interrupt disable flag to “0.”
5 Execute the STP/WIT instruction.
(7) In ordinary operation, if the pulse width of the INT input signal is 2 internal clocks f ( f(XIN)/2 ) or
more by the built-in noise elimination circuit, it is accepted as an interrupt input. Input the INT input
signal with a pulse width of 100 ns or more in the stop mode and the wait mode.
Reference: As a hardware-level means to prevent incorrect interrupt processing due to noise, a noise
elimination circuit is incorporated in the INT0 and INT 1 pins so that no interrupt can be
generated by an “H” pulse (when the rising edge is selected) or an “L” pulse (when a
falling edge is selected) of one machine cycle or less in modes other than the stop mode
and the wait mode. As a software-level means, the levels of the INT 0 and INT1 pins are
judged at the beginning of the interrupt processing routine.
1-58
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.11 Interrupts
1.11.5 Related registers
(1) Edge polarity selection register (EG: Address 00D416)
The Edge polarity selection register selects an active edge of each INT interrupt and selects a
source of interrupt.
Figure 1.11.8 shows a structure of Edge polarity selection register.
Edge polarity selection register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Edge polarity selection register (EG) [Address 00D416]
Name
INT
0
edge
selection
0
bit
B
1 INT1 edge selection
bit
2 CNTR 0 edge
selection bit
3 CNTR 1 edge
selection bit
4 CNTR 0/CNTR1
interrupt selection bit
Function
0 : Falling edge
1 : Rising edge
0 : Falling edge
1 : Rising edge
0 : Falling edge
1 : Rising edge
0 : Falling edge
1 : Rising edge
0 : CNTR 0
1 : CNTR 1
5 INT 1 source selection 0 : P3 1/INT1
bit (at STP or WIT
1 : P00 to P0 7 “L” level input
instruction execution) (for key-on wake-up)
6, 7 Nothing is allocated for these bits. These are
write disabled bits and are undefined at reading.
At reset
R W
0
0
0
0
0
0
?
? ✕
Fig. 1.11.8 Structure of Edge polarity selection register
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-59
HARDWARE
1.11 Interrupts
(2) Interrupt request register 1 (IR1: Address 00FC 16)
Interrupt request register 2 (IR2: Address 00FD 16)
The Interrupt request register 1 and the Interrupt request register 2 consist of bits that indicate
whether an interrupt request exists or not.
Figure 1.11.9 shows a structure of the Interrupt request register 1 and Figure 1.11.10 shows a
structure of the Interrupt request register 2.
Interrupt request register 1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Interrupt request register 1 (IR1) [Address 00FC16]
B
Name
Function
At reset
R W
0 : No interrupt request
Timer 1 interrupt
1 : Interrupt requested
request bit
Timer 2 interrupt
0 : No interrupt request
request bit
1 : Interrupt requested
0 : No interrupt request
Timer 3 interrupt
1 : Interrupt requested
request bit
Timer 4 interrupt
0 : No interrupt request
request bit
1 : Interrupt requested
Nothing is allocated for this bit. This is write
disabled bit and is undefined at reading.
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
?
? ✕
5
Serial I/O receive interrupt
request bit
(7477/7478 group)(Note)
0 : No interrupt request
1 : Interrupt requested
0
✽
6
Serial I/O interrupt request
bit (7470/7471group)
Serial I/O transmit
interrupt request bit
(7477/7478 group)
0 : No interrupt request
1 : Interrupt requested
0
✽
A-D conversion completion
interrupt request bit
0 : No interrupt request
1 : Interrupt requested
0
✽
0
1
2
3
4
7
Note: In the 7470/7471group, nothing is allocated for bit 5. This is write
disabled bit and is undefined at reading.
✽ : “0” is set by software, but not “1.”
Fig. 1.11.9 Structure of Interrupt request register 1
Interrupt request register 2
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Interrupt request register 2 (IR2) [Address 00FD 16]
B
Name
Function
0
INT0 interrupt request 0 : No interrupt request
1 : Interrupt requested
bit
1 INT1 interrupt request 0 : No interrupt request
bit
1 : Interrupt requested
0 : No interrupt request
2 CNTR 0 or CNTR 1
interrupt request bit
1 : Interrupt requested
3 Nothing is allocated for these bits. There are write
to disabled bits and are undefined at reading.
7
✽ : “0” is set by software, but not “1.”
Fig. 1.11.10 Structure of Interrupt request register 2
1-60
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
At reset
R W
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
?
? ✕
HARDWARE
1.11 Interrupts
(3) Interrupt control register 1 (IE1: Address 00FE16 )
Interrupt control register 2 (IE2: Address 00FF16 )
The Interrupt control register 1 and the Interrupt control register 2 control the acceptance of interrupt
by source.
Figure 1.11.11 shows a structure of the Interrupt control register 1 and Figure 1.11.12 shows a
structure of an Interrupt control register 2.
Interrupt control register 1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Interrupt control register 1 (IE1) [Address 00FE 16]
B
0
1
2
3
4
Name
Function
At reset
0 : Interrupt disabled
Timer 1 interrupt
1 : Interrupt enabled
enable bit
0 : Interrupt disabled
Timer 2 interrupt
1 : Interrupt enabled
enable bit
0 : Interrupt disabled
Timer 3 interrupt
1 : Interrupt enabled
enable bit
Timer 4 interrupt
0 : Interrupt disabled
enable bit
1 : Interrupt enabled
Nothing is allocated for this bit. This is write
disabled bit and is undefined at reading.
0
0
0
?
5
Serial I/O receive interrupt
enable bit (7477/7478
group) (Note)
0 : Interrupt disabled
1 : Interrupt enabled
0
6
Serial I/O interrupt enable
bit (7470/7471 group)
Serial I/O transmit interrupt
enable bit (7477/7478 group)
A-D conversion completion
interrupt enable bit
0 : Interrupt disabled
1 : Interrupt enabled
0
0 : Interrupt disabled
1 : Interrupt enabled
0
7
R W
0
? ✕
Note: In the 7470/7471 group, Nothing is allocated for bit 5.
This is write disabled bit and undefined at reading.
Fig. 1.11.11 Structure of Interrupt control register 1
Interrupt control register 2
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Interrupt control register 2 (IE2) [Address 00FF 16]
B
Name
Function
0
0 : Interrupt disabled
INT0 interrupt enable
1 : Interrupt enabled
bit
1 INT1 interrupt enable
0 : Interrupt disabled
bit
1 : Interrupt enabled
0 : Interrupt disabled
2 CNTR 0 or CNTR 1
interrupt enable bit
1 : Interrupt enabled
Nothing
is
allocated
for
these
bits. There are write
3
to disabled bits and are undefined at reading.
7
At reset
R W
0
0
0
?
? ✕
Fig. 1.11.12 Structure of Interrupt control register 2
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-61
HARDWARE
1.12 Timers
1.12 Timers
The 7470/7471/7477/7478 group has four 8-bit timers (Timer 1, Timer 2, Timer 3 and Timer 4) with an 8bit timer latch. The division ratio of the timer is 1/(n+1) when the contents of the timer latch are n (n:0
to 255).
For the timer, the following modes can be selected by software setting.
•
•
•
•
•
Timer mode
Event counter mode
Pulse output mode
External pulse width measurement mode
PWM mode
Table 1.12.1 shows the modes of each timer and Figure 1.12.1 shows a timer block diagram.
Table 1.12.1 Modes of each timer
Mode
Timer
Timer
Timer
Timer
Timer
1-62
1
2
3
4
Timer mode
Event
counter mode
Pulse
output mode
External pulse width
measurement mode
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
✕
PWM mode
✕
✕
HARDWARE
1.12 Timers
Data bus
XCIN
1/2
1/2
XIN
1/8
P32/CNTR0
Timer 1 latch (8)
T12M2
CM7
T12M 0
Timer 1
interrupt request
Timer 1 (8)
T12M1
EG2
Port latch
TM20
1/2
P12/T0
T12M3
Timer 2 latch (8)
T12M6, T12M7
T12M 4
Timer 2
interrupt request
Timer 2 (8)
T12M5
1/4
TM26
1/8
T34M 1
T34M 2
1/16
Timer 3 latch (8)
T34M 0
P33/CNTR 1
Timer 3
interrupt request
Timer 3 (8)
EG 3
T34M 4
T34M 5
Timer 4 latch (8)
Timer 4
interrupt request
Timer 4 (8)
Port latch
EG4
T34M6
F/F
T34M3
P13/T1
T34M7
EG3
P33/CNTR 1
EG2
P32/CNTR 0
EG1
P31/INT1
TM2 7
1/2
TM21
C
D3
D2
D1
D0
Q3
Q2
Q1
Q0
EG0
P30/INT0
Notes 1: The 7470/7477 group is not provided with the XCIN pin.
2: The number (ex. EG 3) described the right side of the register represents
the bit number of the register.
Fig. 1.12.1 Timer block diagram
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-63
HARDWARE
1.12 Timers
1.12.1 Operation description
In a write operation, the timer latch is specified at the same time when the timer is specified. If the timer
is set to n16 , the timer latch is also set to n16 (n: 00 16 to FF 16 ). After the timer starts to count,
1 the timer value is counted down as n16 → (n-1)16 → (n-2) 16 → ... → 1 16 → 0 16 → FF 16 at each rise
of the count source.
2 At the next rise of the count source after “FF16 ,”
● (n-1)16 resulting from decrementing 1 from the timer latch value is set (reloaded) in the timer and
then the timer continues to count.
● When an overflow occurs, the interrupt request bit is set to “1.”
Note: When the interrupt is accepted, the interrupt request bit changes from “1” to “0.” It can be
clearned to “0” but cannot be set to “1” by software.
Figure 1.12.2 shows a timer count timing.
Count start
Count operation stop
Count stop bit
Reload
Writing to timer
Timer count source
Value of timer
Read value of timer
✕✕16
(✕✕+1)16
n16
(n–1)16 (n–2)16 (n–3)16
n16
(n–1)16 (n–2)16 (n–3)16
Timer interrupt
request bit
Fig. 1.12.2 Timer count timing
1-64
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
116
FF16 (n–1)16
016
116
016
FF16 (n–1)16
HARDWARE
1.12 Timers
1.12.2 Description of modes
(1) Timer mode
The operations of the timer modes are as explained below.
1 Start of count operation
When the count stop bit is cleared to “0,” a count operation starts. When there is a count source
input, the contents of the timer are decremented by 1.
Note: Because the count stop bit is “0” immediately after reset release, the count operation is
automatically started after reset release.
2 Reload operation
When the timer overflows, the value resulting from decrementing 1 from the contents of the timer
latch is transferred (reloaded) to the timer.
3 Interrupt operation
2 Timer interrupt
When the timer overflows, an interrupt request occurs, so that the interrupt request bit is set
to “1.” The acceptance of interrupt is controlled by the interrupt enable bit of each timer.
4 Stop of count operation
When the counter stop bit is set to “1” by software, the count operation stops. (The count operation
continues until the count stop bit is set to “1.”)
Figure 1.12.3 shows an example of timer mode operation.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-65
HARDWARE
1.12 Timers
Count period
Count period
T(s) = 1 ÷ count source frequency ✕ (the timer initial value + 1)
Timer mode operation example
• OF: Overflow
• RL: Reload
• n: Timer initial value
“1” is written “0” is written
Timer 1 count stop bit
Timer 1 count source
Value of timer 1
RL
RL
RL
RL
Count stop
(n-1)16
Count restart
Down count
OF
OF
OF
OF
FF16
Time
T
Timer 1 interrupt
request bit
A
A
A
A
Timer 1 interrupt
enable bit
A : • Clearing by writing “0” to the timer interrupt request bit.
• Clearing by accepting the timer interrupt request when the timer interrupt enable bit is “1.”
Fig. 1.12.3 Example of timer mode operation
1-66
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.12 Timers
[Setting method]
1 Set a value to be used according to the count source setting for timers. The count operation of
the timer is stopped. Refer to “Table 1.12.2 Setting for count stop.”
Table 1.12.2 Setting for count stop
Setting item
Timer 12 mode register
(T12M: Address 00F8 16)
b4
b0
Timer
–
1
Timer 1
1
–
Timer 2
Timer 3
–
–
Timer 4
Timer 34 mode register
(T34M: Address 00F9 16)
b3
b0
–
–
–
1
1
–
2 Count source selecting
Select a count source according to the count source setting for timers shown in Table 1.12.3 to
Table 1.12.6. Note that selectable count sources are different among timers.
Because the 7470/7477 group is not provided with an XCIN pin, do not select f(XCIN) as a count
source.
Table 1.12.3 Setting for timer 1 count source
Setting item
CPU mode register
Timer 12 mode register
Count source
(CM: Address 00FB16)
(T12M: Address 00F8 16)
to be selected
b7
b2
b1
f(XIN)/16
0
0
f(XCIN)
– (Note)
1
0
f(XCIN)/16
1
0
External clock input from
–
–
1
CNTR0 pin.
Note: When f(X CIN) is selected as a timer count source, f(XIN) or f(X CIN) can be selected as a system clock.
Table 1.12.4 Setting for timer 2 count source
CPU mode register
Setting item
(CM: Address 00FB 16 )
Count source
to be selected
b7
f(XIN)/16
f(XIN)/64
0
f(XIN)/128
f(XIN)/256
f(XCIN)/16
f(XCIN)/64
1
f(XCIN)/128
f(XCIN)/256
Timer 1 overflow signal
–
Timer 12 mode register
(T12M: Address 00F8 16)
b7
b6
b5
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
–
–
1
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-67
HARDWARE
1.12 Timers
Table 1.12.5 Setting for Timer 3 count source
Setting item
CPU mode register
Timer mode register 2
Timer 34 mode register
Count source
(CM: Address 00FB16) (TM2: Address 00FA 16 ) (T34M: Address 00F916)
to be selected
b7
b6
b2
b1
f(XIN )/16
0
0
0
(Note)
f(X CIN)
–
–
0
1
f(XCIN )/16
1
0
0
Timer 1 overflow signal
0
–
1
0
Timer 2 overflow signal
1
External clock input from
–
–
1
1
CNTR1 pin
Note: When f(X CIN) is selected as a timer count source, f(XIN) or f(XCIN) can be selected as a system clock.
Table 1.12.6 Setting for Timer 4 count source
Setting item
Timer mode register 2
Timer 34 mode register
CPU mode register
Count source
(CM: Address 00FB16) (TM2: Address 00FA 16) (T34M: Address 00F916)
to be selected
b7
b6
b5
b4
b6
f(XIN)/16
0
–
0
1
f(XCIN )/16
1
0
1
0
Timer 1 overflow signal
1
(Note) (Note)
Timer 2 overflow signal
0
–
0
0
Timer 3 overflow signal
External clock input from
–
1
1
CNTR1 pin
Note: If the Timer 1 overflow signal is selected as a Timer 2 count source at [b5,b4] = [1,0], the Timer 4
count source becomes the Timer 1 overflow signal regardless of bit 6 of Timer mode register 2.
3 Set a count value in the timer.
Refer to “Table 1.12.7 Address allocation
for timer.”
Table 1.12.7 Address allocation of timer
Timer
Address
Timer 1(T1)
00F016
Timer 2(T2)
00F116
Timer 3(T3)
00F216
Timer 4(T4)
00F316
4 When a value is set according to the count start setting shown in Table 1.12.8, the timer starts
to count.
Table 1.12.8 Count start setting
Setting item
Timer 12 mode register
(T12M: Address 00F8 16)
b4
b0
Timer
–
0
Timer 1
0
–
Timer 2
Timer 3
–
–
Timer 4
1-68
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Timer 34 mode register
(T34M: Address 00F916)
b3
b0
–
–
–
0
0
–
HARDWARE
1.12 Timers
(2) Event counter mode
In the event counter mode, the same operations as those in the timer mode are performed, with the
exception that the signal input from the CNTR0 pin becomes a count source of Timer 1 and the signal
input from the CNTR1 pin becomes a count source of Timer 3 and Timer 4.
The operation in the event counter mode are described below.
1 Start of count operation
After the count stop bit is cleared to “0,” a count operation starts. Each time a count source is
input, the contents of the timer are decremented by 1.
For the active edge of count source, a rise or a fall can be selected by the edge polarity selection
register (address 00D4 16 ).
Note: Because the count stop bit is “0” immediately after reset release, the count operation is
automatically started after reset release but the count source is not a CNTR pin input (operates
as the timer mode).
2 Reload operation
When the timer overflows, the value resulting from decrementing 1 from the contents of the timer
latch is transferred (reloaded) to the timer.
3 Interrupt operation
2 Timer interrupt
When the timer overflows, an interrupt request occurs, so that the interrupt request bit is set
to “1.” The acceptance of interrupt is controlled by the interrupt enable bit of each timer.
2 CNTR interrupt
An interrupt request is generated from the edge of the count source input from the CNTR 0 pin
or the CNTR 1 pin, so that the interrupt request is set to “1.” The acceptance of interrupt is
controlled by the interrupt enable bit of each timer.
The edge polarity selection register selects an active edge of count source and a CNTR 0/
CNTR 1 interrupt.
4 Stop of count operation
When the counter stop bit is set to “1” by software, the count operation stops. (The count operation
continues until “1” is set in the count stop bit.)
Figure 1.12.4 shows an example of event counter mode operation.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-69
HARDWARE
1.12 Timers
Count period
Count period
T(s) = 1 ÷ count source frequency ✕ (the timer initial value + 1)
Event counter mode operation example
“0” is written
• OF: Overflow
• RL: Reload
• n: Timer initial value
“1” is written
Timer 1 count stop bit
Count source
(CNTR0 pin)
to B
Count stop
RL
RL
RL
Count restart
Value of timer 1
Down count
(n-1)16
OF
OF
FF16
OF
T
Time
CNTR edge
selection bit
In this example, the CNTR interrupt request occurs at rising edge of the count source.
In this example, each CNTR interrupt request does not occur during executing the CNTR interrupt processing routine.
CNTR interrupt
request bit
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
CNTR interrupt
enable bit
B
Timer 1 interrupt
request bit
A
A
A
Timer 1 interrupt
enable bit
A : • Clearing by writing “0” to the Timer 1 and CNTR interrupt request bits.
• Clearing by accepting the Timer 1 and CNTR interrupt requests when the timer 1 and
CNTR interrupt enable bits are “1.”
Fig. 1.12.4 Example of event counter mode operation
1-70
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
A
HARDWARE
1.12 Timers
[Setting method]
1 The count operation of a timer to be used is stopped.
Refer to “Table 1.12.2 Setting for count stop.”
2 Select a count source according to the event counter mode setting shown in Table1.12.9.
3 Set a count value in the timer.
Refer to “Table 1.12.7 Address allocation of timer.”
4 Start a count operation of timer to be used.
Refer to “Table 1.12.8 Count start setting.”
Table. 1.12.9 Event counter mode setting
Timer 34 mode register
Timer
Edge polarity selection register Timer 12 mode register
Count
(T34M: Address 00F916 )
to be
(EG: Address 00D416 ) (T12M: Address 00F816)
source
used
b3
b1
b6
b2
b1
b2
b5
b4
Timer 1 CNTR 0
–
Select (Note)
1
–
Timer 3
Select
1
1
–
–
–
CNTR1
0
Timer 4
(Note)
–
1
1
Note: 0: The falling edge (An input, when it is inverted, becomes a count source).
1: The rising edge (An input itself becomes a count source).
(3) Pulse output mode
The pulse output mode is a mode resulting from adding a pulse output operation to a timer mode
operation. In this mode, a pulse whose polarity is inverted at each overflow is output from the T0
(Timer 1 overflow signal/2) pin and the T1 (Timer 4 overflow signal/2) pin.
The operations in the pulse output mode are described below.
1 Start of count operation
After the count stop bit is set to “0,” a count operation starts. Each time a count source is input,
the contents of the timer are decremented by 1.
Note: Because the count stop bit is “0” immediately after reset release, the count operation is
automatically started immediately after reset release but no pulse is output.
2 Reload operation
When the timer overflows, the value resulting from decrementing 1 from the contents of the timer
latch is transferred (reloaded) to the timer.
3 Pulse is output
• A pulse whose polarity is inverted at each overflow is output from the T0 pin and the T 1 pin.
• “H” or “L” can be selected as a level for a start of pulse output by each division flip-flop.
• A pulse output is started from the moment when the T0 or T1 pin output is selected by the Timer
12 mode register or the Timer 34 mode register.
4 Interrupt operation
2 Timer interrupt
When the timer overflows, an interrupt request occurs, so that the interrupt request bit is set.
The acceptance of interrupt is controlled by the interrupt enable bit of each timer.
5 Stop of count operation
When “1” is set in the counter stop bit by software, the count operation stops. (The count operation
continues until “1” is set in the count stop bit.)
Figure 1.12.5 shows a example of pulse output mode operation.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-71
HARDWARE
1.12 Timers
Count period
Count period
T(s) = 1 ÷ count source frequency ✕ (the timer initial value + 1)
Pulse output mode operation example
• OF: Overflow
• RL: Reload
• n: Timer initial value
Writing “1” Writing “0”
Timer 1 count stop bit
Timer 1 count
source
RL
RL
RL
RL
Count stop
Down count
(n-1)16
Value of timer 1
Count restart
OF
OF
OF
OF
FF16
Time
T
T0 output selected
T0 pin
Setting to
output port
Initial value “0”
Timer FF register
bit 0
Timer 1 interrupt
request bit
A
A
A
A
Timer 1 interrupt
enable bit
A : • Clearing by writing “0” to the Timer 1 interrupt request bit.
• Clearing by accepting the Timer 1 interrupt request when the Timer 1 interrupt enable bit is “1.”
Fig. 1.12.5 Example of pulse output mode operation
1-72
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.12 Timers
[Setting method]
1 The count operation of a timer to be used is stopped.
Refer to “Table 1.12.2 Setting for count stop.”
2 Set the pulse output mode according to the pulse output mode initial value setting shown in Table
1.12.10. However, set the timer FF register after setting timer mode register 2.
Table 1.12.10 Pulse output mode initial value setting
Setting item
Timer mode register 2
(TM2: Address 00FA 16)
b0
b1
Timer to be used
1
–
Timer 1
–
1
Timer 4
Note: 0: The initial value becomes “0.”
1: The initial value becomes “1.”
Timer FF mode register
(TF: Address 00F7 16)
b0
b1
Select (Note)
–
–
Select (Note)
3 Set the pulse output mode according to the pulse output mode setting shown in Table 1.12.11.
The T 0 output port and the T 1 output port are used in common with P1 2 and P13 , respectively.
Accordingly, set the bit 2 and bit 3 of the port P1 direction register to the output mode.
Table 1.12.11 Pulse output mode setting
Timer 12 mode register
Output pin
Timer
(T12M: Address 00F816 )
b3
T0
Timer 1
Timer 1 overflow
1
signal / 2
T1
Timer 4
Timer 4 overflow
–
signal / 2
Timer 34 mode register
(T34M: Address 00F916 )
b7
b6
–
1
0
4 Set a count value in Timer 1 (T0 output) and Timer 4 (T1 output).
5 When a value is set according to the count start setting shown in Table 1.12.8, the timer starts
to count.
Note: When resetting a value in the Timer FF register, be sure to observe the setting methods of
the above items 1 to 5.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-73
HARDWARE
1.12 Timers
(4) External pulse width measurement mode
The external pulse width measurement mode is used to measure a pulse width (“H” or “L”) input from
the CNTR 0 or CNTR 1 pin.
The operations in the external pulse width measuring mode are described below.
1 Start of count operation
After the count stop bit is cleared to “0,” a count operation starts. Each time a count source is
input, the contents of the timer are decremented by 1.
Note: Because the count stop bit is “0” immediately after reset release, the count operation is
automatically started after reset release but the count source is not a CNTR pin input.
At this time, the external pulse width measurement mode is not provided.
2 Reload operation
When the timer overflows, the value resulting from decrementing 1 from the contents of the timer
latch is transferred (reloaded) to the timer.
3 External pulse width measurement mode
● The “H” or “L” level of a pulse can be selected as a pulse measuring period by the Edge polarity
selection register.
● The difference between the initial value of the timer and the counter value at a count stop
becomes a measured pulse width.
● A reload operation by reading the count value is not performed automatically. To perform
measurement continuously, re-set the initial value by software.
4 Interrupt operation
2Timer interrupt
When the timer overflows, an interrupt request occurs, so that the interrupt request bit is set to
“1.” The acceptance of interrupt is controlled by the interrupt enable bit of each timer.
2CNTR interrupt
An interrupt request is generated from the edge of the pulse input from the CNTR 0 pin or the
CNTR 1 pin, so that the interrupt request bit is set to “1.” Interrupt acceptance is controlled by
the interrupt enable bit.
The pulse active edge and the CNTR 0/CNTR 1 interrupt are selected by the Edge polarity selection
register.
5 Stop of count operation
The count operation terminates at the falling edge (at “H” level pulse width measurement) or the
falling edge (“L” level pulse width measurement) of the CNTR pin input. This operation is also
terminated by setting "1" in the count stop bit by software.
Figure 1.12.6 shows an example of the operation of the external pulse width measurement mode.
1-74
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.12 Timers
Pulse width
Pulse width
H(s) = 1 ÷ count source frequency ✕ (the timer initial value - count value at count stop)
External pulse width measurement mode operation example
• n: Timer initial value
• m: Count value at count stop
Timer 4 count stop bit
Timer 4 count
source
CNTR0 pin
CNTR
edge selection bit
Setting the initial value
to timer
Setting the initial value
to timer
Count start
Count start
Value of timer 4
(n-1)16
Count stop
m16
FF16
H
H
Time
CNTR interrupt
request bit
CNTR interrupt
enable bit
A
Timer 4 interrupt
request bit
Timer 4 interrupt
enable bit
A : • Clearing by writing “0” to the CNTR interrupt request bit.
• Clearing by accepting the CNTR interrupt request when the CNTR interrupt enable bit is “1.”
✽ : When the CNTR edge selection bit is “0,” “H” level width of the input pulse is measured.
Fig. 1.12.6 Example of operation of external pulse width measurement mode
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-75
HARDWARE
1.12 Timers
[Setting method]
1 The count operation of Timer 4 is stopped by setting bit 3 of the Timer 34 mode register to “1.”
Refer to “Table 1.12.2 Setting for count stop.”
2 Set each register according to the external pulse width measuring mode setting shown in Table
1.12.12.
3 Set a value in the timer.
Refer to “Table 1.12.7 Address allocation of timer.”
4 Clear bit 3 of the Timer 34 mode register to "0" and start the count of timer 4.
Refer to “Table 1.12.8 Count start setting.”
Table 1.12.12 External pulse width measurement mode setting
Timer 34 mode register
Timer to
Measuring
(T34M: Address 00F816 )
be used
pulse
b6
b5
b4
CNTR 0
1
Timer 4
CNTR 1
b5 b4
0 0 : Timer 3 overflow signal
0 1 : f (XIN)/16 or f (X CIN)/16
1 0 : Timer 1 or Timer 2 overflow signal
1 1 : CNTR 1 pin (Note 2)
Edge polarity selection register
(EG: Address 00D416 )
b3
b4
b2
0
–
Select
(Note 1)
1
Select
(Note 1)
–
Notes 1: 0: The count source is counted while the external pulse is “H.”
1: The count source is counted while the external pulse is “L.”
2: When the measured pulse is the CNTR 1 pin, do not select the CNTR1 as the count source of
Timer 4.
1-76
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.12 Timers
(5) PWM mode
In the PWM mode, a PWM waveform is output from the T1 pin by using Timer 3 and Timer 4.
The operations in the PWM mode are described below.
1 Start of count operation
After the count stop bit is cleared to “0,” a count operation starts. Each time a count source is
input, the contents of the timer are decremented by 1.
Note: The count stop bit is “0” immediately after reset release. Accordingly, a count operation is
automatically started immediately after reset release but no PWM waveform is output because
the PWM mode is not provided.
2 Reload operation
When the timer overflows, the value resulting from decrementing 1 from the contents of the timer
latch is transferred (reloaded) to the timer.
To be repeated
3 PWM output
In the PWM mode, the following operations are performed.
1 When the PWM mode is started
• The PWM waveform starts with “L.”
• Timer 3: Counts the count sources.
• Timer 4: Stops
2When Timer 3 overflows
• The PWM waveform goes to “H.”
• Timer 3: Stops.
• Timer 4: Counts the count sources.
3 When Timer 4 overflows
• The PWM waveform goes to “L.”
• Timer 3: Counts the count sources.
• Timer 4: Stops.
The “L” width of the PWM waveform is set in Timer 3 and the “H” width is set in Timer 4.
4 Interrupt operation
2Timer interrupt
When the timer overflows, an interrupt request occurs, so that the interrupt request bit is set to
“1.” The acceptance of interrupt is controlled by the interrupt enable bit of each timer.
5 Stop of count operation
When the counter stop bit is set to “1” by software, the count operation stops. (The count operation
continues until the count stop bit is set to “1.”)
Figure 1.12.7 shows an example of the operation of the PWM output mode.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-77
HARDWARE
1.12 Timers
Count period
T3(s) = 1 ÷ timer 3 count source frequency ✕ (the timer 3 initial value + 1)
T4(s) = 1 ÷ timer 4 count source frequency ✕ (the timer 4 initial value + 1)
Timer 3 count period
Timer 4 count period
PWM mode operation example
• OF: Overflow
• RL: Reload
• n: Timer 3 initial value
• m: Timer 4 initial value
Timer 3 count
source
To B
To B '
RL
To B "
RL
(Note)
(n-1)16
Value of timer 3
RL
OF
(Note)
OF
FF16
OF
T3
Time
T3
“1” is written
“0” is written
Timer 4 count stop bit
Timer 4 count source
RL
RL
(Note)
(m-1)16
Value of timer 4
Count stop
To C '
To C
OF
FF16
Setting to
output port
Count restart
(Note)
OF
PWM output
mode selected
T4
T4
C'
B'
B"
T1 pin
A
Timer 3 interrupt
request bit
A
A
B'
B
B"
Timer 3 interrupt
enable bit
A
C
A
C'
Timer 4 interrupt
request bit
Timer 4 interrupt
enable bit
A : • Clearing by writing “0” to the Timer 3 and Timer 4 interrupt request bits.
• Clearing by accepting the interrupt request when the Timer 3 and Timer 4 interrupt enable bits are “1.”
Note: Timer 3 and Timer 4 do not accept count sources in the period from an overflow of the respective
timer till an overflow of the other timer. Because the timer read value changes at the fall of a count
source, the read value in this period remains “FF16”.
Fig.1.12.7 Example of operation of PWM output mode
1-78
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Time
HARDWARE
1.12 Timers
[Setting method]
1 The count operation of a timer to be used is stopped.
Refer to “Table 1.12.2 Setting for count stop.”
2 Port P1 3 is put into the output mode by setting bit 3 of the port P1 direction register (address
00C116 ) to “1.”
3 Select a count source of Timer 3 and Timer 4. However, don't select the Timer 3 overflow signal
as a count source of Timer 4.
Refer to “Table 1.12.5 Setting for Timer 3 count source” and “Table 1.12.6 Setting for Timer
4 count source.”
4 Set the bit 7 of the Timer 34 mode register to “1.”
5 Set a value in the timer.
Refer to “Table 1.12.7 Address allocation of timer.”
6 Set the bit 7 of the Timer mode register 2 to “1.”
7 The count operation of a timer to be used is started.
Refer to “Table 1.12.8 Count start setting.”
Note: When the PWM mode is started from another mode, the PWM waveform starts with the “L”
state.
1.12.3 Input latch function
There is a function which latches the levels of the INT0 , INT1, CNTR 0 and CNTR 1 pins to the input latch
register when Timer 4 overflows. Using this function permits knowing the level of each pin accurately the
moment when a Timer 4 overflow occurs. The polarity of each pin is selected by the edge polarity
selection register, the level or the reverse level of each pin are latched to the Input latch register.
Table 1.12.13 shows the Edge polarity selection register setting related to the input latch.
Table 1.12.13 Edge polarity selection register setting
Input latch register
(ILR: Address 00D616)
b0
b1
b2
b3
Latched contents
INT0 pin level
Reverse level on
INT1 pin level
Reverse level on
CNTR0 pin level
Reverse level on
CNTR1 pin level
Reverse level on
INT0 pin
INT1 pin
CNTR0 pin
CNTR1 pin
Edge polarity selection register
(EG: Address 00D416 )
b3
b2
b1
b0
1
–
–
–
0
1
–
–
–
0
1
–
–
–
0
1
–
–
–
0
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-79
HARDWARE
1.12 Timers
1.12.4 Updating of contents of Timer and Timer latch
After data is written to the Timer, the contents of the Timer and the Timer latch are updated.
2 Timer 1 and Timer 2
When data is written to the Timer, this data is set in the Timer and the Timer latch at the same time.
As a result, after data is written to the Timer which is in count operation, the count period becomes
invalid.
Figure 1.12.8 shows an example of updating of the contents of Timer 1, Time 2 and Timer latch.
Example of updating of Timer 1
• OF: Overflow
• RL: Reload
• n: Timer 1 initial value before updating
• m: Timer 1 initial value after updating
Writing “m 16” to timer 1
RL
m16
Value of timer 1
(m-1)16
RL
RL
(n-1)16
OF
OF
OF
FF16
Time
Incorrect count period
Timer 1 interrupt
request bit
A
A
A
Timer 1 interrupt
enable bit
A : • Clearing by writing “0” to the Timer 1 interrupt request bit.
• Clearing by accepting the Timer 1 interrupt request when the Timer 1 interrupt enable bit is “1.”
Fig. 1.12.8 Example of updating of Timer 1, Timer 2 and Timer latch
1-80
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.12 Timers
2 Timer 3 and Timer 4
● At PWM mode
After data is written to the Timer which is in count operation, the written data is set only in the
Timer latch but not in the Timer. After that, when the Timer overflows, a value resulting from
decrementing 1 from the value of the Timer latch is written in the Timer.
When data is written to the Timer being at a stop, the written data is set in both Timer and Timer
latch.
● In modes other than the PWM mode
The same operation as “Timer 1 and Timer 2” described in the previous item is performed.
Figure 1.12.9 shows an example of updating of the contents of Timer 3, Time 4 and Timer latch in
PWM mode.
Example of updating of Timer at PWM mode
• OF: Overflow
• RL: Reload
• n: Timer 3 initial value before updating
• m: Timer 3 initial value after updating
• k: Timer 4 initial value before updating
• h: Timer 4 initial value after updaiting
Writing “m 16” to timer 3
RL
Value of timer 3
m16
(m-1)16
RL
(n-1)16
OF
OF
FF16
Count of timer 3
Time
Count of timer 3 by rewriting timer value
RL
Value of timer 4
(h-1)16
Writing “h 16” to timer 4
RL
(k-1)16
OF
OF
FF16
Count of timer 4 by rewriting timer value Time
Count of timer 4
Timer 3 interrupt request bit
Timer 4
Timer 3
interrupt
A
Timer 4
interrupt
A
Timer 3
interrupt
A
Timer 3
interrupt enable bit
Timer 4
A : • Clearing by writing “0” to the Timer 3 or Timer 4 interrupt request bit.
• Clearing by accepting the Timer 3 and the Timer 4 interrupt request when the Timer 3
and the Timer 4 interrupt enable bit is “1.”
Fig. 1.12.9 Example of updating of Timer 3, Timer 4 and Timer latch in PWM mode
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-81
HARDWARE
1.12 Timers
1.12.5 Notes on use
(1) The contents of the Timer 12 mode register (T12M: Address 00F816 ) and the Timer 34 mode register
(T34M: Address 00F916 ) become “0016 ” at reset and each timer performs a count operation.
(2) Figure 1.12.10 shows the relation between Timer value change timing and read value change timing.
The Timer value changes at the rise of the count source, while the read value changes at the fall of
the count source. Accordingly, the read value may be larger than the real timer value by “1.”
Example: Writing “99 16” into Timer 1
Timer count source
Timer value
Timer read value
0116
0216
0016
0116
FF16
0016
9816
FF16
9716
9816
9716
Interrupt request bit
Fig. 1.12.10 Relation between timer value change timing and read value change timing
(3) To select the CNTR pin input as Timer count source, the frequency of the CNTR count source should
satisfy the condition shown in Table 1.12.14.
Table 1.12.14 Frequency of CNTR
Frequency of the CNTR count source
Main clock
Upper boundary
Lower boundary
4MHz
1MHz
There is no
8MHz
2MHz
special restriction.
1-82
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.12 Timers
1.12.6 Related registers
(1) Timer 1, Timer 2, Timer 3, Timer 4 (T1 to T4: Address 00F0 16 to 00F3 16 )
Each Timer is a register consisting of 8 bits.
Read
The contents (count value) of the Timer are read by reading the timer.
Write
When
time.
When
is set
Refer
data is written to the Timer, this data is set in the Timer and the Timer latch at the same
data is written into the Timer being in count operation in the PWM mode, the written data
only in the Timer latch.
to “1.12.4 Updating of contents of Timer and Timer latch.”
✽Timer latch
The Timer latch is a register that holds a value to be automatically transferred (reloaded) to the
Timer as its initial value when the Timer overflows. It is impossible to read the contents of the
Timer latch.
Figure 1.12.11 shows a structure of Timer.
Timers 1 to 4
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Timer 1, Timer 2, Timer 3, Timer 4 (T1, T2, T3, T4)
[Address 00F0 16, 00F116, 00F2 16, 00F316]
B
Function
0 •Set “00 16 to FF 16.”
to •The value is decremented by 1 each time a
7 count source is input.
•Each Timer values are set to the respective
counter.
•The count values are read out by reading the
respective timer.
At reset
R W
(Note)
Note : Timers 1 and 2 are undefined.
Timer 3 is “FF 16.”
Timer 4 is “07 16.”
Fig. 1.12.11 Structure of Timers 1 to 4
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-83
HARDWARE
1.12 Timers
(2) Timer 12 mode register (T12M: Address 00F816 )
The Timer 12 mode register is a register consisting of bits that control a Timer count source and a
count operation.
Figure 1.12.12 shows a structure of Timer 12 mode register.
Timer 12 mode register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Timer 12 mode register (T12M) [Address 00F816]
B
Name
Function
Timer 1 count stop
bit
1 Timer 1 count
source selection bit
2 Timer 1 internal clock
source selection bit
0 : Count start
1 : Count stop
0 : Internal clock
(Note 1)
1 : P32/CNTR 0 external clock
0 : f(XIN)/16 or f(XCIN)/16
1 : f(XCIN)
(Note 2)
0
3
P12/T0 port output
selection bit
4 Timer 2 count stop
bit
5
Timer 2 count
source selection bit
0 : P1 2 port output
1 : T0(Timer 1 overflow
divided by 2)
0 : Count start
1 : Count stop
0 : Internal clock (Note 1)
1 : Timer 1 overflow signal
At reset
R W
0
0
0
0
0
0
b7 b6
6, 7 Timer 2 internal clock
source selection bits 0 0 : f(XIN)/16 or f(X CIN)/16
0 1 : f(XIN)/64 or f(X CIN)/64
1 0 : f(XIN)/128 or f(X CIN)/128
1 1 : f(XIN)/256 or f(X CIN)/256
(Note 3)
0
Notes 1: In the 7470/7477 group, the internal clock is f(X IN)/16.
2: Since the 7470/7477 group is not provided the sub-clock
generating circuit, f(XCIN ) cannot be used. Fix this bit to “0.”
3: Since the 7470/7477 group is not provided the sub-clock
generating circuit, f(XCIN) cannot be used.
Fig. 1.12.12 Structure of Timer 12 mode register
1-84
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.12 Timers
(3) Timer 34 mode register (T34M: Address 00F9 16 )
The Timer 34 mode register is a register consisting of bits that control a timer count source and a
count operation.
Figure 1.12.13 shows a structure of Timer 34 mode register.
Timer 34 mode register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Timer 34 mode register (T34M) [Address 00F9 16]
B
Name
0
Timer 3 count stop
bit
1, 2 Timer 3 count
source selection bits
Function
0 : Count start
1 : Count stop
Timer 4 count stop
bit
4, 5 Timer 4 count
source selection bits
R W
0
b2 b1
0 0 : f(XIN)/16 or f(X CIN)/16
0 1 : f(XCIN )
1 0 : Timer 1 overflow or
Timer 2 overflow
1 1 : P33/CNTR 1 external
clock
(Note 2)
3
At reset
0 : Count start
1 : Count stop
0
0
b4 b3
0 0 : Timer 3 overflow
0 1 : f(XIN)/16 or f(X CIN)/16
1 0 : Timer 1 overflow or
0
Timer 2 overflow
1 1 : P33/CNTR 1 external
clock
(Notes 1, 2)
6
7
Timer 4 pulse width
measurement mode
selection bit
0 : Timer mode
1 : External pulse width
measurement mode
0
P13/T1 port output
selection bit
0 : P13 port
1 : T1(Timer 4 overflow divided
0
by 2 or PWM output)
Notes 1: When Timer 1 overflow is selected as a Timer 2
count source, the Timer 4 count source is the Timer 1
overflow regardless of the value of bit 6 of the
Timer mode register 2.
2: Since the 7470/7477 group is not provided the sub-clock
generating circuit, f(X CIN) cannot be used.
Fig. 1.12.13 Structure of Timer 34 mode register
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-85
HARDWARE
1.12 Timers
(4) Timer mode register 2 (TM2: Address 00FA16 )
The Timer mode register 2 consists of bits that control a mode selection and a count source selection.
Figure 1.12.14 shows a structure of Timer mode register 2.
Timer mode register 2
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Timer mode register 2 (TM2) [Address 00FA16]
B
Name
Function
0 : Set disable
Timer 1 overflow FF
1 : Set enable
set enable bit
0 : Set disable
1 Timer 4 overflow FF
set enable bit
1 : Set enable
Nothing
is
allocated
for
these
bits. These are
2
to write disabled bits and are undefined at reading.
5
0
Timer 3, timer 4 count
overflow signal selection bit
Timer 3, timer 4
function selection bit
6
7
0 : Timer 1 overflow
1 : Timer 2 overflow
0 : Ordinary mode
1 : PWM mode
At reset
R W
0
0
?
? ✕
0
0
Fig. 1.12.14 Structure of Timer mode register 2
(5) Timer FF register (TF: Address 00F7 16)
The Timer FF register consists of bits that are used for initialization in the pulse output mode.
Figure 1.12.15 shows a structure of Timer FF register.
Timer FF register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Timer FF register (TF) [Address 00F716]
B
0
1
2
to
7
Name
Timer 1
division flip-flop
Timer 4
division flip-flop
Function
0 : Initial value is “0”
1 : Initial value is “1”
0 : Initial value is “0”
1 : Initial value is “1”
Nothing is allocated for these bits. These are
write disabled bits and are undefined at
reading.
Fig. 1.12.15 Structure of Timer FF register
1-86
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
At reset
R W
0
0
?
? ✕
HARDWARE
1.12 Timers
(6) Input latch register (ILR: Address 00D616)
The Input latch register consists of bits that latch the levels of the INT0 , INT1, CNTR0 and CNTR1
pins when the Timer 4 overflows.
Figure 1.12.16 shows a structure of Input latch register.
Input latch register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Input latch register (ILR) [Address 00D616]
B
Name
0 P30/INT0 latch bit
Function
When b0 of EG (Note) is “1”:
level on INT 0 pin
1 P31/INT1 latch bit
At reset
R W
When b0 of EG (Note) is “0”:
reverse level on INT 0 pin
?
✕
?
✕
?
✕
?
✕
?
? ✕
When b1 of EG (Note) is “0”:
reverse level on INT 1 pin
When b1 of EG (Note) is “1”:
level on INT1 pin
2 P32/CNTR0 latch bit When b2 of EG (Note) is “0”:
reverse level on CNTR 0 pin
When b2 of EG (Note) is “1”:
level on CNTR 0 pin
3 P33/CNTR1 latch bit When b3 of EG (Note) is “0”:
reverse level on CNTR 1 pin
When b3 of EG (Note) is “1”:
level on CNTR 1 pin
4 Nothing is allocated for these bits. These
to are write disabled bits and are undefined at
7 reading.
Note: EG is the Edge polarity selection register.
Fig. 1.12.16 Structure of Input latch register
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-87
HARDWARE
1.12 Timers
(7) Edge polarity selection register (EG: Address 00D416 )
The Edge polarity selection register consists of bits that control a polarity selection of each of the
INT0 , INT 1, CNTR 0 and CNTR 1 pins and an INT1 interrupt or key on wake-up interrupt selection at
stop mode or wait mode.
Figure 1.12.17 shows a structure of Edge polarity selection register.
Edge polarity selection register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Edge polarity selection register (EG) [Address 00D416]
Name
0 INT0 edge selection
bit
B
1 INT1 edge selection
bit
2 CNTR 0 edge
selection bit
3 CNTR 1 edge
selection bit
4 CNTR 0/CNTR1
interrupt selection bit
Function
0 : Falling edge
1 : Rising edge
0 : Falling edge
1 : Rising edge
0 : Falling edge
1 : Rising edge
0 : Falling edge
1 : Rising edge
0 : CNTR 0
1 : CNTR 1
5 INT 1 source selection 0 : P3 1/INT1
bit (at STP or WIT
1 : P00 to P0 7 “L” level input
instruction execution) (for key-on wake-up)
6, 7 Nothing is allocated for these bits. These are
write disabled bits and are undefined at reading.
Fig. 1.12.17 Structure of Edge polarity selection register
1-88
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
At reset
R W
0
0
0
0
0
0
?
? ✕
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
1.13 Serial I/O
The 7470/7471/7477/7478 group can transmit or receive 8-bit data in series by Serial I/O.
The Serial I/O transmit/receive method is shown below.
● In the 7470/7471 group, only the clock synchronous is available.
● In the 7477/7478 group, either clock synchronous or clock asynchronous (UART) can be selected.
There are differences in circuit configuration and applicable registers between them.
This section explains each of them as “1.13A 7470/7471 group part” and “1.13B 7477/7478 group part.”
Table 1.13.1 shows defferences between 7470/7471 group and 7477/7478 group.
Table 1.13.1 7470/7471 group vs. 7477/7478 group serial I/O
7470/7471 group
Serial I/O transmit/ Clock synchronous
v
receive method
Clock asynchronous
u
✽1
S RDY signal output
v
✽1
SARDY signal output
v
✽2
Byte specification mode
v
7477/7478 group
v
v
v
u
u
✽1 SRDY and SARDY signal : Signal that indicates a Serial I/O transfer ready state
✽ 2 Byte specification mode : Mode for transmitting or receiving 1-byte data of a specific cycle out of
multiple-byte data to be transmitted or received.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-89
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
1.13A 7470/7471 group part
1.13A.1 Operation description
The 7470/7471 group incorporates a clock synchronous Serial I/O.
The 8 shift clocks obtained by the clock control circuit are used as synchronous clocks for transmitting
or receiving data. The transmit operation of the transmit side and the receive operation of the receive side
are simultaneously executed in synchronization with these shift clocks.
● The transmit side transmits data bit by bit from the P15/SOUT pin in synchronization with the fall of each
shift clock.
● The receive side receives data bit by bit from the P14/SIN pin in synchronization with the rise of each shift
clock.
Figure 1.13A.1 shows a Serial I/O block diagram.
∗
XCIN
1/2
XIN
1/2
Counter
1/4
CM7
1/2
1/4
SARDY
SRDY
SM0
SM2
SM5 SRDY Synchronous circuit
1/64
SM1
CLK input
(Address 00DE 16)
CLK output
Serial I/O counter (3)
Serial I/O interrupt
request
SM6
Byte counter (4)
(Address 00DE 16)
Data bus
(Address 00DD 16)
SIN
Serial I/O register (8)
S OUT
Q
S
R
✽: The 7470 group is not provided with the XCIN pin.
Fig. 1.13A.1 Serial I/O block diagram
1-90
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
2 Communication format
The half-duplex data communication or the full-duplex data communication are available.
2 Synchronous clock
The internal clock or the external clock can be selected as a synchronous clock by bit 2 of the Serial
I/O mode register (SM: address 00DC 16 ).
● The synchronous clock for the case where the internal clock is selected is shown below.
• f(X IN)/8
• f(X IN)/16
• f(X IN)/32
• f(X IN)/512
• f(X CIN)/8
• f(X CIN)/16
• f(X CIN)/32
• f(X CIN)/512
When the system clock is f(XIN)
When the system clock is f(XCIN)
Notes 1: In the 7470 group, f(XCIN) is not available.
2: When selecting a divided signal of f(X CIN), set the system clock to the low-speed mode
by bit 7 of the CPU mode register.
● When the external clock is selected, the synchronous clock is an external clock input from the P1 6 /
CLK pin.
Notes on external clock selection
● When writing data into the Serial I/O register, perform a write operation while the synchronous
clock is at “H.”
● The shift operation of the Serial I/O register is continued while the synchronous clock is input to
the Serial I/O circuit. When the external clock is selected, stop the synchronous clock at the end
of 8 cycles. (When the internal clock is selected, the synchronous clock stops automatically.)
● Set the “H” and “L” widths (TWH , TWL) of the pulse used as the external clock source to T WH , TWL
[s] > 2/(system clock frequency [Hz]). For example, when the system clock is 8 MHz, use a clock
of 2 MHz or less (duty ratio 50 %).
2 Shift clock
Usually, when a clock synchronous transfer is performed between 2 microcomputers, one microcomputer
selects the internal clock and outputs the 8 shift clock pulses generated by a start of transfer
operation from the P1 6 /CLK pin. The other microcomputer selects the external clock and uses the
clock input from the CLK pin as a synchronous clock.
2 S RDY signal, SARDY signal
A Serial I/O transfer ready status can be known to the outside by outputting the SRDY signal and the
SA RDY signal.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-91
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
2 Transmit operation of Serial I/O
The transmit operation of the Serial I/O is described below.
● Start of transmit operation
✽2
Transmit operation begins by writing transmit data into the Serial I/O register in the transmit
✽1
enable state. At the time when this data has been written, “7” is set in the Serial I/O counter
(address 00DE16 , bit 4 – 6), so that the synchronous clock is forced to go to “H.”
✽ 1: State in which the register for transmit operation has been initialized. Refer to “[Transmit
setting method]” which will be described later.
✽ 2: When the external clock is selected, perform a write operation while the synchronous clock is
at “H.”
● Transmit operation
1The transmit data written in the Serial I/O register is output from the P15 /SOUT pin in synchronization
with the fall of the synchronous clock. At this time, the Serial I/O counter is decremented by 1.
2Transmit data is output starting with the least significant bit of the Serial I/O register. Each time
one bit is output, the contents of the Serial I/O register are shifted by 1 in the direction of the
least significant bit.
3After the transmit shift operation is completed, an interrupt request occurs at the rise of the last
✽3
cycle of the synchronous clock, so that the Serial I/O interrupt request bit is set to “1.”
✽ 3: When the internal clock is selected as a synchronous clock, the shift clock supply to the Serial
I/O register is automatically stopped after 8-bit data is transmitted (the Serial I/O counter
overflows). When the external clock is selected, the contents of the Serial I/O register are
continuously sifted while the synchronous clock is input. Accordingly, stop it externally.
● When using the S RDY output
At the time when transmit data has been written, the level of the S RDY signal changes from “H” to
“L” and the level of the SA RDY signal changes from “L” to “H,” by which a receive ready state can
be known externally. The SRDY signal goes to “H” at the first fall of the synchronous clock and the
SARDY signal goes to “L” at the rise of the last cycle of the synchronous clock.
Figure 1.13A.2 shows a transmit operation and Figure 1.13A.3 shows a transmit timing chart.
1-92
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
1
Synchronous clock
Data bus
Address 00DD 16
b0
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1
Serial I/O register
Write transmit data
Serial I/O register
D0
P15/SOUT
2 Synchronous clock
b0
D7 D6 D 5 D4 D3
Transmit shift register
D2
P15/SOUT
3 Synchronous clock
b0
D7
Interrupt request
register 1
(Address 00FC 16)
0
by rising edge
1
b6
Fig. 1.13A.2 Serial I/O transmit operation
Synchronous clock,
internal clock divided by 8 to 512, or
external clock
SOUT pin
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Write signal to
serial I/O register
SRDY signal
SARDY signal
Serial I/O interrupt enable bit
Serial I/O interrupt request bit
A
A:
• Clearing by writing “0” to the Serial I/O interrupt request bit.
• Clearing by accepting the Serial I/O interrupt.
Fig. 1.13A.3 Serial I/O transmit timing chart
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-93
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
[Transmit setting method]
1Clear the Serial I/O interrupt enable bit (bit 6 of the Interrupt control register 1) to “0.”
2Set the Serial I/O mode register according to “Table 1.13A.1.”
3When using the Serial I/O interrupt,
[1] Clear the Serial I/O interrupt request bit (bit 6 of the Interrupt request register 1) to “0.”
[2] Set the Serial I/O interrupt enable bit to “1.”
4Write transmit data into the Serial I/O register (address 00DD16 ).
Note: When the external clock is selected, perform a write operation while the synchronous clock is
at “H.”
Table 1.13A.1 shows a Serial I/O transmit setting.
Table 1.13A.1 Serial I/O transmit setting
Register to be used
Item
Synchronous clock (at internal
clock selection)
(Note 1)
Synchronous clock selection
Serial I/O port using
S RDY signal output selection
S RDY signal selection
Serial I/O
Byte specification mode selection
P1 5/S OUT, SRDY pin output
format
(Note 3)
f(XIN)/8
f(XCIN )/8
f(XIN )/16
f(XCIN )/16
f(XIN )/32
f(XCIN )/32
f(XIN )/512
f(XCIN )/512
External clock
Internal clock
Serial I/O port (SOUT, CLK) (Note 2)
Ordinary port
SRDY signal output
SRDY signal
SA RDY signal
Ordinary mode
Byte specification mode
CMOS output
N channel open drain output
Serial I/O mode register
(SM: Address 00DC16 )
Bit
Setting value
00
01
b1 • b0
10
11
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Notes 1: Select the internal clock as a synchronous clock in the following condition. In the 7470 group,
however, f(X CIN) is not available.
● When a divided signal of f(XIN ) is selected, the system clock is f(XIN).
● When a divided signal of f(XCIN ) is selected, the system clock is f(XCIN).
Select a system clock state by bit 7 of the CPU mode register.
2: When the ordinary port is switched over to the Serial I/O port, the Serial I/O interrupt request bit
may be set to “1.” Clear the Serial I/O interrupt request bit to “0” after one instruction or more
after switching the ordinary port over to the Serial I/O port.
3: When ordinary P1 7 is selected by bit 4 of the Serial I/O mode register, the CMOS output is
provided regardless of the set value of bit 7.
1-94
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
2 Receive operation of Serial I/O
The receive operation of the Serial I/O is described below.
● Start of receive operation
Receive operation begins by writing the following data into the Serial I/O register (SIO: address
00DD16 ) ✽2 in the receive enable state.✽ 1
• Transmit data in the full-duplex data communication
• Arbitrary dummy data in the half-duplex data communication
At the time when this data has been written, “7” is set in the Serial I/O counter (address 00DE16 ,
bit 4 – 6), so that the synchronous clock is forced to go to “H.”
✽ 1: State in which the register for receive operation has been initialized. Refer to “[Receive setting
method]” which will be described later.
✽ 2: When the external clock is selected, perform a write operation while the synchronous clock is
at “H.”
● Receive operation
1Receive data is input from the P1 4 /SIN pin to the Serial I/O register in synchronization with the
rise of the synchronous clock. At this time, the Serial I/O counter is decremented by 1.
2Receive data is input starting into the most significant bit of the Serial I/O register. Each time one
bit is input, the contents of the Serial I/O register are shifted by 1 in the direction of the least
significant bit.
3After the receive shift operation is completed, an interrupt request occurs at the rise of the last
cycle of the synchronous clock, so that the Serial I/O interrupt request bit is set to “1”.✽3
✽ 3: When the internal clock is selected as a synchronous clock, the shift clock supply to the Serial
I/O register is automatically stopped after 8-bit data is transmitted (the Serial I/O counter overflows).
When the external clock is selected, the contents of the Serial I/O register are continuously
sifted while the synchronous clock is input. Accordingly, stop it externally.
● When using the S RDY output
At the time when data has been written into the Serial I/O register, the level of the S RDY signal
changes from “H” to “L” and the level of the SARDY signal changes from “L” to “H,” by which a
receive ready state can be known externally. The S RDY signal goes to “H” at the first fall of the
synchronous clock and the SARDY signal goes to “L” at the rise of the last cycle of the synchronous
clock.
Figure 1.13A.4 shows a receive operation and Figure 1.13A.5 shows a receive timing chart.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-95
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
1
Synchronous
clock
b0
P14/SIN
2
D0
Serial I/O register
Synchronous
clock
b0
D3 D2 D1 D0
P14/SIN
3
Synchronous clock
Serial I/O
register
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
0
Interrupt request
register 1
(Address 00FC 16)
by rising edge
1
b6
Serial I/O register
Fig. 1.13A.4 Serial I/O receive operation
Synchronous clock,
internal clock divided by 8 to 512, or
external clock
SIN pin
D0
Writing data to
Serial I/O register
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Reading into Serial I/O register
SRDY signal
SARDY signal
Serial I/O interrupt enable bit
Serial I/O interrupt request bit
A
A:
• Clearing by writing “0” to the Serial I/O interrupt request bit.
• Clearing by accepting the Serial I/O interrupt.
Fig. 1.13A.5 Serial I/O receive timing chart
1-96
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
[Receive setting method]
1Clear the Serial I/O interrupt enable bit (bit 6 of the Interrupt control register 1) to “0.”
2Clear the Port P1 4 direction register to “0” to set it to the input mode.
3Clear the Serial I/O mode register according to “Table 1.13A.2.”
4When using the Serial I/O interrupt,
[1] Clear the Serial I/O interrupt request bit (bit 6 of the Interrupt request register 1) to “0.”
[2] Set the Serial I/O interrupt enable bit to “1.”
5Write the following data into the Serial I/O register.
•
Transmit data in the full-duplex data communication
•
Arbitrary dummy data in the half-duplex data communication
Note: When the external clock is selected, write data into the Serial I/O register while the synchronous
clock is at “H.”
Table 1.13A.2 shows a Serial I/O receive setting.
Table 1.13A.2 Serial I/O receive setting
Register to be used
Item
Serial I/O mode register
(SM: Address 00DC16 )
Bit
Synchronous clock (at internal
clock selection)
(Note 1)
Synchronous clock selection
Serial I/O port using
S RDY signal output selection
S RDY signal selection
Serial I/O
Byte specification mode selection
P1 5/ SOUT, SRDY pin output
format
(Note 4, Note 5)
f(X IN)/8
f(X CIN)/8
f(X IN)/16
f(X CIN)/16
f(X IN)/32
f(X CIN)/32
f(X IN)/512
f(X CIN)/512
External clock
Internal clock
Ordinary port (P15 , P1 6) (Note 2)
Serial I/O port (SOUT , CLK) (Note 3)
Ordinary port
SRDY signal output
SRDY signal
SA RDY signal
Ordinary mode
Byte specification mode
CMOS output
N channel open drain output
Setting value
00
01
b1 • b0
10
11
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Notes 1: Select the internal clock as a synchronous clock in the following condition. In the 7470 group,
however, f(X CIN) is not available.
● When a divided signal of f(X IN) is selected, the system clock is f(XIN).
● When a divided signal of f(X CIN) is selected, the system clock is f(XCIN).
Select a system clock state by bit 7 of the CPU mode register.
2: When the external clock is selected, the P16 /CLK pin becomes clock input pin CLK regardless
of the set value of bit 3 of the Serial I/O mode register. For this reason, only P1 5 is available
as an ordinary port.
3: When the ordinary port is switched over to the Serial I/O port, the Serial I/O interrupt request bit
may be set to “1.” Clear the Serial I/O interrupt request bit to “0” after one instruction or more
after switching the ordinary port over to the Serial I/O port.
4: When ordinary P1 7 is selected by bit 4 of the Serial I/O mode register, the CMOS output is
provided regardless of the set value of bit 7.
5: When SOUT is selected by bit 3 of the Serial I/O mode register, the data written in the Serial
I/O register is output from the S OUT pin in synchronization with the fall of the synchronous clock.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-97
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
1.13A.2 Byte specification mode
The Serial I/O of the 7470/7471 group has the byte specification mode.
This mode permits transmitting or receiving specific one-byte data out of multiple-byte data transmitted
or received through the Serial I/O bus.
2 Byte counter (Address 00DE 16 )
The Byte counter is located at the same address as that of the Serial I/O counter but the Serial
I/O counter is a read-only type. So this counter is not affected by any write operation to the Byte
counter. Because the Byte counter is not provided with a reload function, re-set a value to transmit
or receive data continuously.
2 SARDY
When the SA RDY signal is selected in the byte specification mode, the N channel open drain is
selected as its output type, and the SRDY pins of multiple microcomputers are connected, the SA RDY
signal goes to “H” only when all the microcomputers have become ready for data transfer.
2 Operations in the byte specification mode
After setting the Serial I/O mode register, specify a byte corresponding to the clock to be used for
a Serial I/O transmit/receive in the Byte counter. Where the value written in the Byte counter is n,
a Serial I/O transmit/receive is performed by the clock of the (n + 1)-th byte.
● Start of transmit/receive operation
A transfer operation is started by writing the data (arbitrary dummy data in the half-duplex data
✽1
communication) to be transmitted to the Serial I/O register.
✽ 1: When the external clock is selected, write data into the Serial I/O register when the synchronous
clock is at “H.” However, if the Byte counter value is a value other than “0,” writing data is
enabled even if the synchronous clock is at “L.”
● Transmit/receive operation
1Each time the synchronous clock is input in 8 cycles, the Byte counter value is decremented by 1.
2With the synchronous clock of the next 8 cycles after the Byte counter value becomes “0,” a
✽2
Serial I/O transmit/receive is performed as in the ordinary mode. After completion of the 8-bit
data output, an interrupt occurs at the rise of the last cycle of the synchronous clock, so that bit
6 of the Interrupt request register (address 00FC 16 ) is set to “1.”
3When the Byte counter overflows, the Serial I/O transfer stops.
✽ 2: When the Byte counter value is a value other than 0, the output of the S OUT pin goes to “H”
at the fall of the first synchronous clock. If the N channel open drain is selected as the output
type of the S OUT pin, the output is put into a high-impedance state, so the SOUT pin can be
connected to the S OUT pin of another microcomputer.
1-98
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
Figure 1.13A.6 shows a transmit/receive operation in the byte specification mode.
1
n16
Byte counter
(n-1)16
0
2 When transmit
When receive
Synchronous
clock
Synchronous
clock
b0
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D 1
b0
D0
D0
P15/SOUT
Serial I/O register
P14/SIN
Synchronous clock
8 cycles
Serial I/O register
Synchronous clock
b0
D7 D 6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
D7
Interrupt request
register 1
(Address 00FC 16)
0
by rising edge
1
b6
3
Byte counter
FF16
Fig. 1.13A.6 Transmit/receive operation in byte specification mode
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-99
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
[Byte specification mode setting]
For a Serial I/O transfer in the byte specification mode, refer to the setting method in the ordinary
mode in “1.13A.1 Operation description,” and also take the following into consideration.
● Select the byte specification mode. (Set bit 6 of the Serial I/O register to “1.”)
● Be sure to select the external clock as the synchronous clock. (Clear bit 2 of the Serial I/O mode
register to “0.”)
[1] When data is received, the ordinary port can be selected by the Serial I/O port selection bit
(bit 3 of the Serial I/O mode register). P16 pin is used as a external clock input pin CLK. Only
P1 5 is available as an ordinary port.
[2] Write data into the Serial I/O register when the synchronous clock is at “H.” However, if the
Byte counter value is a value other than “0,” writing data is enabled even if the synchronous
clock is at “L.”
● When performing a Serial I/O transmit/receive at the n–th byte, write (n – 1) in the Byte counter.
Note: Because the Byte counter is not provided with a reload function, re-set a value to transmit or
receive data continuously.
1-100
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
1.13A.3 Pins
The 7470/7471 group uses 4 pins for data transmit, data receive, shift clock transmit/receive and receive
ready signal output. All these pins are used in common with P1. A function selection is made by the Serial
I/O port selection bit (bit 3) and the SRDY signal output selection bit (bit 4) of the Serial I/O mode register
(SM : Address 00DC16 ).
The function of each pin is explained below.
(1) Data transmit pin [S OUT ]
Transmit data is output bit by bit. This pin is used in common with P15 . When the Serial I/O port
selection bit (bit 3) of the Serial I/O mode register is set to “1,” this pin becomes a Serial I/O data
output pin.
(2) Data receive pin [S IN]
Data is input bit by bit. This pin is used in common with P14 . When the port P14 direction register
is put into the input mode, this pin becomes a Serial I/O data input pin.
(3) Shift clock transmit/receive pin [CLK]
This pin inputs (receives from the outside) or outputs (supplies to the outside) the shift clock for data
transmit/receive. This pin is used in common with P16 .
The internal clock or the external clock can be selected by bit 2 of the Serial I/O mode register.
(4) Receive enable signal output pins [ S RDY], [SA RDY ]
This pin informs the outside of a receive ready state. This pin is used in common with P1 7.
● SRDY signal
• SRDY signal output selection bit (bit 4) of Serial I/O mode register is set to “1.”
• SRDY signal selection bit (bit 5) of Serial I/O mode register is cleared to “0.”
When the above 2 conditions are satisfied, the level of the pin changes from “H” to “L” at the timing
at which data is written into the Serial I/O register, informing the outside of a receive ready state.
● SARDY signal
• SRDY signal output selection bit (bit 4) of Serial I/O mode register is set to “1.”
• SRDY signal selection bit (bit 5) of Serial I/O mode register is set to “1.”
When the above 2 conditions are satisfied, the level of the pin changes from “L” to “H” at the timing
at which data is written into the Serial I/O register, informing the outside of a receive ready state.
1.13A.4 Notes on use
When the external clock is selected, take the following points into consideration.
1When writing data into the Serial I/O register, perform a write operation while the synchronous clock
is at “H.”
2The shift operation of the Serial I/O register is continued while the synchronous clock is input to the
Serial I/O circuit. When the external clock is selected, stop the synchronous clock at the end of 8
cycles. (When the internal clock is selected, the synchronous clock stops automatically at the end of
8 cycles.)
3Set the “H” and “L” widths (TWH , T WL) of the pulse used as the external clock source to TWH , TWL [s]
> 2/(system clock frequency [Hz]). For example, when the system clock is 8 MHz, use a clock of 2
MHz or less (duty ratio 50 %).
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-101
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
1.13A.5 Related registers
(1) Serial I/O register (SIO: Address 00DD 16 )
The Serial I/O register is written Serial I/O transmit data or is read receive data.
● When transmitting data, write transmit data into this register.
● Receive data can be obtained by reading this register.
Figure 1.13A.7 shows a structure of the Serial I/O register.
Serial I/O register (7470/7471 group)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Serial I/O register (SIO) [Address 00DD16]
B
Function
At reset
0 At transmit: A value of “00 16” to “FF16” can be
to
set as transmit data.
7
At the transmit, data is transmitted one
bit at a time starting with the least
significant bit.
At receive: At the receive, data is received one bit
at a time starting with the most
significant bit.
?
Fig. 1.13A.7 Structure of Serial I/O register
1-102
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
R W
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
(2) Serial I/O counter, Byte counter (Address 00DE16 )
The Serial I/O counter and the Byte counter are located at the same address.
● Serial I/O counter (bit 4 – bit 6)
The Serial I/O counter is set to “7” by writing transmit data into the Serial I/O register and counts
the synchronous clock of the Serial I/O eight times. The Serial I/O counter is a read-only type and
not affected by any write operation to the Byte counter.
● Byte counter (bit 0 – bit 3)
In the Serial I/O byte specification mode, the value written in the Byte counter is counted down at
8 cycles of the synchronous clock. When the value becomes “0,” a Serial I/O transmit/receive is
performed by the synchronous clock of the next 8 cycles. Because a reload function is not available,
re-set a value to transfer data continuously in the byte specification mode.
Figure 1.13A.8 shows a structure of the Serial I/O counter and the Byte counter.
Serial I/O counter and Byte counter (7470/7471 group)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Serial I/O counter and Byte counter [Address 00DE 16]
B
Function
0 Byte counter
to When using the byte specification mode, set
3 a value of “00 16” to “0F 16.” Supposing that the
value to be written into the byte counter is “n,”
a Serial I/O transmit/receive is performed with
the clock of the “n + 1”-th byte.
4 Serial I/O counter
to When the internal clock is selected as a
6
synchronous clock, this counter generates 8
shift clocks.
When transmit data is written into the Serial
I/O register, “07 16” is set in the Serial I/O
counter.
7 Nothing is allocated for this bit. This is write
disabled bit and is undefined at reading.
At reset
R W
?
?
✕
?
? ✕
Fig. 1.13A.8 Structure of Serial I/O counter and Byte counter
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-103
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
(3) Serial I/O mode register (SM: Address 00DC 16 )
The Serial I/O mode register selects a state of the clock or port to be used for a data transfer.
Figure 1.13A.9 shows a structure of the Serial I/O mode register.
Serial I/O mode register (7470/7471 group)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Serial I/O mode register (SM) [Address 00DC16]
B
Name
0, 1 Internal clock
selection bits
Function
At reset
0 : f(X IN)/8 or f(XCIN)/8
1 : f(X IN)/16 or f(X CIN)/16
0 : f(X IN)/32 or f(X CIN)/32
1 : f(X IN)/512 or f(XCIN)/512
(Note)
0
0
0
1
1
2
Synchronous clock 0 : External clock
selection bit
1 : Internal clock
3
Serial I/O port
selection bit
4
5
6
7
SRDY signal output
selection bit
SRDY signal
selection bit
Serial I/O byte specify
mode selection bit
R W
b1 b0
0 : Ordinary I/O port
(P1 5, P1 6)
1 : Serial I/O port (S OUT, CLK pin)
0 : Ordinary I/O port(P1 7)
1 : SRDY signal output pin
0 : SRDY signal
1 : SA RDY signal
0 : Ordinary mode
1 : Byte specify mode
P15/SOUT, SRDY output 0 : CMOS output
structure selection bit
1 : N-channel open-drain
output
0
0
0
0
0
0
Note: Since the 7470 group is not provided with the sub-clock
generating circuit, do not select f(XCIN).
Fig. 1.13A.9 Structure of Serial I/O mode register
1-104
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
1.13B 7477/7478 group part
1.13B.1 Operation description
The 7477/7478 group incorporates a Serial I/O that permits selecting one of the clock synchronous and
the clock asynchronous. This section describes the operation in each of the clock synchronous serial I/
O and the clock asynchronous Serial I/O (UART).
(1) Clock synchronous Serial I/O
In the clock synchronous Serial I/O, the 8 shift clocks obtained by the clock control circuit are used
as synchronous clocks for transmitting or receiving. The transmit operation of the transmit side and
the receive operation of the receive side are simultaneously executed in synchronization with these
shift clocks.
● The transmit side transmits data bit by bit from the P1 5/TxD pin in synchronization with the fall of
each shift clock.
● The receive side receives data bit by bit from the P1 4/RxD pin in synchronization with the rise of
each shift clock.
Figure 1.13B.1 shows a clock synchronous Serial I/O block diagram.
Data bus
P16
P14
Address 00E0 16
Serial I/O control register Address 00E2 16
Receive buffer register
RXD
Receive
enable bit
(RE)
Receive buffer full flag (RBF)
Receive interrupt request (RI)
Receive shift register
Shift clock
Clock control circuit
SCLK
✽
XCIN
Serial I/O enable bit
(SIOE)
BRG count source
selection bit (CSS)
1/4
XIN
SRDY
S RDY output
enable bit
(SRDY)
Serial I/O synchronous
clock selection bit (SCS)
Dividing ratio 1/(n+1)
Baud rate generator
1/4
F/F
Transmit enable
bit (TE)
TXD
Falling
detected
Shift clock
Transmit shift register
Transmit interrupt source
selection bit (TIC)
P17
P15
1/4
Address 00E4 16
Transmit buffer register
Address 00E0 16
Clock control circuit
Transmit shift completion flag (TSC)
Transmit interrupt request (TI)
Transmit buffer empty flag (TBE)
Serial I/O status register
Address 00E1 16
Data bus
✽: The 7477 group is not provided with the XCIN pin.
Fig. 1.13B.1 Clock synchronous Serial I/O block diagram
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-105
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
2 Communication format
The half-duplex data communication or the full-duplex data communication are available for
communication.
2 Synchronous clock
The following can be selected as a synchronous clock by bit 1 of the Serial I/O control register
(SIOCON: address 00E216 ).
● “0” : Baud rate generator (BRG) output divided by 4
● “1” : External clock input from the S CLK pin
The BRG output is set by the baud rate generator (BRG: address 00E416 ), which is an 8-bit
counter dedicated to the Serial I/O. As an input clock to the BRG, f(XIN)/4 or f(XCIN )/4 (at “0”),
f(XIN )/16 or f(XCIN )/16 (at “1”) can be selected by bit 0 of the Serial I/O control register.
Notes on external clock selection
● When setting the transmit enable bit to “1” or writing data into the Transmit buffer register,
perform a write operation while the synchronous clock is at “H.”
● The shift operation of the Transmit shift register or the Receive shift register is continued while
the synchronous clock is input to the Serial I/O circuit. When the external clock is selected, stop
the synchronous clock at the end of 8 cycles. (When the internal clock is selected, the synchronous
clock stops automatically at the end of 8 cycles.)
● Set the “H” and “L” widths (T WH , TWL) of the pulse used as the external clock source to TWH ,
T WL [s] > 8/(system clock [Hz]). For example, when a system clock is 8 MHz, use a clock of
500 kHz or less (duty ratio 50 %).
2 Shift clock
Usually, when a clock synchronous transfer is performed between 2 microcomputers, one microcomputer
selects the internal clock and outputs the 8 shift clock pulses generated by a start of transmit
operation from the P16/S CLK pin. The other microcomputer selects the external clock and uses the
clock input from the P1 6/SCLK pin as a synchronous clock.
2 Data transfer rate (baud rate)
In the clock synchronous Serial I/O, the expression for calculating a data transfer rate (baud rate),
which is the frequency of the synchronous clock is shown below.
● When the internal clock is selected (using the BRG)
Baud rate [bps] =
Division ratio
✽1
f(X IN)
✽2
✕ (BRG set value + 1) ✕ 4
✽ 1 Division ratio : Select “4” or “16” by the BRG count source selection bit.
✽ 2 BRG set value : 0 – 255 (00 16 – FF 16 )
● When the external clock is selected
Baud rate [bps] = Input clock frequency to S CLK pin
The BRG is an 8-bit counter dedicated to the Serial I/O, having a reload register, and divides the
count source by (n + 1) by setting the value n. As a count source, f(XIN)/4 or f(X CIN)/4 (at “0”), f(X IN)/
16 or f(XCIN)/16 (at “1”) can be selected by bit 0 of the Serial I/O control register.
1-106
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
2 SRDY signal
The clock synchronous Serial I/O can inform the outside that a serial transfer has become ready,
by outputting the S RDY signal.
2 Transmit operation of the clock synchronous Serial I/O
The transmit operation of the clock synchronous Serial I/O is described below.
● Start of transmit operation
✽2
Transmit data is transmitted by writing it into the Transmit buffer register (TB: address 00E016 )
✽1
in the transmit enable state. When the internal clock is selected as a synchronous clock, 8 shift
clocks are generated at the time when this set value has been written.
● Transmit operation
✽2
1After transmit data is written into the Transmit buffer register, the transmit buffer empty flag
(bit 0) of the Serial I/O status register is cleared to “0.”
2The transmit data written in the Transmit buffer register is transferred to the Transmit shift
✽3
register.
3When the data transfer from the Transmit buffer register to the Transmit shift register is completed,
✽4
the transmit buffer empty flag is set to “1.”
4The transmit data transferred to the Transmit shift register is output from the P15 /TxD pin in
synchronization with the fall of the synchronous clock.
5When a transmit shift operation is started, the transmit shift completion flag (b2) of the Serial
✽5
I/O status register is cleared to “0.”
6Data is output starting with the least significant bit of the Transmit shift register. Each time onebit data is output, the contents of the Transmit shift register are shifted by 1 bit in the direction
of the least significant bit.
7At the time when the transmit shift operation has been completed, the Transmit shift register
✽ 3 ✽5
shift completion flag is set to “1.”
✽ 1: Status in which the register for transmit operation has been completed. Refer to “[Clock
synchronous Serial I/O setting method]” which will be described later.
✽ 2: When the external clock is selected, write data into the Transmit buffer register when the
synchronous clock is at “H.”
✽ 3: A transmit interrupt request occurs immediately after the transfer of 2 when the transmit
interrupt source bit (bit 3) of the Serial I/O control register (SIOCON) is “0,” or at the time of
7 when the said bit is “1.”
✽ 4: While the transmit buffer empty flag is “1,” the next transmit data can be written into the
Transmit buffer register.
✽ 5: When the internal clock is used as a synchronous clock, the shift clock supply to the Transmit
shift register is automatically stopped after 8-bit data is transmitted. However, if the next
transmit data is written to the Transmit buffer register while the Transmit shift register shift
completion flag is “0,” the shift clock supply is continued and serial data is continuously
output from the TxD pin.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-107
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
● When using the SRDY output
At the time when data has been written into the Transmit buffer register, the S RDY pin changes from
“H” to “L,” informing the outside of a receive ready state. The SRDY pin is restored to “H” at the
first fall of the synchronous clock.
● Transmit interrupt operation (valid when the Serial I/O is selected)
Regarding a transmit interrupt, interrupt request generating timing can be selected by bit 3 of the
Serial I/O control register (SIOCON).
0: When the Transmit buffer register becomes empty after the data written in the Transmit buffer
register is transferred to the Transmit shift register, an interrupt request is generated.
1: When the shift operation of the Transmit shift register is completed, an interrupt request is
generated.
Figure 1.13B.2 shows a transmit operation of clock synchronous Serial I/O and Figure 1.13B.3
shows a transmit timing chart of clock synchronous Serial I/O.
5
1
Data bus
Address 00E0 16
Transmit data writing
Transmit buffer register
0
b2
b0
1
Serial I/O status register
(Address 00E1 16)
0
2
1
Serial I/O status register
(Address 00E1 16)
6
Synchronous clock
b0
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2
Transmit buffer register
D1
P15/TxD
Transmit shift register
Transmit data transfer
Transmit shift register
7
Synchronous clock
b0
3
0
Serial I/O status register
(Address 00E1 16)
D7
Transmit shift register
1
b0
✽ When “0” is selected by the bit 3
of the Serial I/O control register
0
Interrupt request register 1
1
b2
✽ When “1” is selected by the bit 3
of the Serial I/O control register
1
b6
Synchronous clock
b0
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D 2 D1
Transmit shift register
D0
P15/TxD
Interrupt request register 1
(Address 00FC 16)
Fig. 1.13B.2 Transmit operation of clock synchronous Serial I/O
1-108
0
Serial I/O status register
(Address 00E1 16)
(Address 00FC 16)
4
P15/TxD
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
0
1
b6
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
Synchronous clock,
BRG divided by 4, or
external clock
D0
TXD pin
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Write signal to
transmit buffer register
SRDY pin
Transmit buffer empty flag
Transmit shift completion flag
B1
B2
Transmit interrupt enable bit
Transmit interrupt request bit
B1
A1
A1
B2
A2
A2 : • Clearing by writing “0” to the transmit interrupt request bit.
• Clearing by accepting the transmit interrupt.
B1 : When interrupt request generation is selected, when the Transmit buffer register
becomes empty by clearing the transmit interrupt source selection bit to “0”.
B2 : When interrupt request generation is selected, when the shift operation of the
transmit shift register is completed by setting the transmit interrupt source selection bit to “1”.
Fig. 1.13B.3 Transmit timing chart of clock synchronous Serial I/O
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-109
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
[Clock synchronous Serial I/O transmit setting method]
1Clear the Serial I/O transmit interrupt enable bit (bit 6 of Interrupt control register 1) to “0.”
2When selecting the internal clock, set the BRG value.
3Set the Serial I/O control register according to Table 1.13B.1.
4When using a Serial I/O transmit interrupt
[1] Clear the Serial I/O transmit interrupt request bit (bit 6 of Interrupt request register 1) to “0.”
Note: When the ordinary port is switched over to the Serial I/O port, the Serial I/O transmit
interrupt request bit may be set to “1.” Clear the Serial I/O transmit interrupt request bit
to “0” after one instruction or more after switching the ordinary port over to the Serial I/
O port.
[2] Set the Serial I/O transmit interrupt enable bit to “1.”
5Write transmit data into the Transmit buffer register (TB: address 00E016 ).
Note: When the external clock is selected, perform a write operation while the synchronous clock
is at “H.”
Table 1.13B.1 Clock synchronous Serial I/O transmit setting
Register to be used
Item
BRG count source selection
Synchronous clock selection
S RDY signal output selection
Transmit interrupt request selection
Transmit enable selection
Receive enable selection
Clock synchronous selection
Serial I/O enable selection
f(XIN )/4 or f(XCIN )/4
f(XIN )/16 or f(XCIN )/16
BRG output divided by 4
External clock input
Ordinary port
SRDY signal output
Transmit buffer empty
When the transmit shift operation is completed
Transmit enable
Disable (half-duplex data communication)
Enable (full-duplex data communication)
Clock synchronous
P1 4 to P1 7 function as serial I/O pins
Serial I/O control register
(SIOCON: Address 00E2 16)
Setting value
Bit
0
b0
1
0
b1
1
0
b2
1
0
b3
1
1(Note)
b4
0
b5
1
1
b6
1
b7
Note: When the external clock is selected, write “1” in bit 4 (transmit enable bit) while the synchronous
clock is at “H.”
1-110
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
2 Receive operation of clock synchronous Serial I/O
The receive operation of the clock synchronous Serial I/O is described below.
● Start of receive operation
✽2
Receive operation begins by writing data into the Transmit buffer register (TB: address 00E016 )
✽1
in the receive enable state.
• Transmit data in the full-duplex data communication
• Arbitrary dummy data in the half-duplex data communication
● Receive operation
1Receive data is input bit by bit from the P14 /RxD pin to the Receive shift register in synchronization
with the rise of the synchronous clock.
2Receive data is input starting with the most significant bit of the Receive shift register. Each time
one bit is input, the contents of the Receive shift register are shifted by 1 in the direction of the
least significant bit.
3After one-byte data is completely input to the Receive shift register, the contents of the Receive
✽3
shift register are transferred to the receive buffer register (RB).
4When receive data has been transferred to the receive buffer register, the receive buffer full flag
✽4
(b1) of the Serial I/O status register (SIOSTS) is set to “1,” so that a receive interrupt request
is generated.
✽ 1: Status in which the register for receive operation has been completed. Refer to “[Clock
synchronous Serial I/O receive setting method]” which will be described later.
✽ 2: When the external clock is selected, write data into the Transmit buffer register when the
synchronous clock is at “H.”
✽ 3: If receive data is further input to the Receive shift register when data remains (when the
receive buffer full flag is “1”) without reading out the contents of the Receive buffer register,
the overrun error flag of the Serial I/O status register is set to “1.” At this time, the data of the
Receive shift register is not transferred to the Receive buffer register and the original data of
the Receive buffer register is held.
✽ 4: The receive buffer full flag is cleared to “0” by reading out the Receive buffer register.
● When using the S RDY output
At the time when data has been written into the Transmit buffer register, the level of the S RDY
signal changes from “H” to “L” by which a receive ready state can be known externally. The S RDY
signal goes to “H” at the first fall of the synchronous clock of the synchronous clock.
● Receive interrupt operation (Serial I/O select only)
When receive data is transferred from the receive shift register to the Receive buffer register after
one-byte data is all input to the Receive shift register, an interrupt request is generated.
Figure 1.13B.4 shows a receive operation of the clock synchronous Serial I/O and Figure 1.13B.5
shows a receive timing chart of the clock synchronous Serial I/O.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-111
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
1
Synchronous clock
4
b0
D0
0
Serial I/O status
register
(Address 00E1 16)
Receive shift register
P14/RxD
1
b1
Synchronous clock
2
b0
D3 D2 D1 D0
P14/RxD
3
Receive shift
register
0
Interrupt request
register 1
(Address 00FC 16)
Receive shift register
1
b5
Synchronous clock
D7 D6 D 5 D4 D3 D2 D1D 0
Receive data transfer
(Address 00E0 16)
Receive buffer register
Fig. 1.13B.4 Receive operation of clock synchronous serial I/O
Synchronous clock
D0
RxD pin
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Reading into receive shift register
Writing data to transmit shift register
SRDY pin
Receive buffer register
read signal
Receive buffer full flag
Receive enable bit
Receive interrupt request bit
A:
• Clearing by writing “0” to the receive interrupt request bit.
• Clearing by accepting the receive interrupt.
Fig. 1.13B.5 Receive timing chart of clock synchronous serial I/O
1-112
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
A
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
[Clock synchronous Serial I/O receive setting method]
1Clear the Serial I/O receive interrupt enable bit (bit 5 of interrupt control register 1) to “0.”
2When selecting the internal clock, set the BRG value.
3Set the Serial I/O control register according to Table 1.13B.2.
4When using a Serial I/O receive interrupt
[1] Clear the Serial I/O receive interrupt request bit (bit 5 of interrupt request register 1) to “0.”
Note: When the ordinary port is switched over to the Serial I/O port, the Serial I/O receive
interrupt request bit may be set. Clear the Serial I/O receive interrupt request bit to “0”
after one instruction or more after switching the ordinary port over to the Serial I/O port.
[2] Set the Serial I/O receive interrupt enable bit to “1.”
5Set the following data into the Transmit buffer register (TB).
• Transmit data in the full-duplex data communication
• Arbitrary dummy data in the half-duplex data communication
Note: When the external clock is selected, perform a write operation while the synchronous
clock is at “H.”
Table 1.13B.2 Clock synchronous Serial I/O receive setting
Register to be used
Item
BRG count source selection
Synchronous clock selection
S RDY signal output selection
Transmit enable selection
Receive enable selection
Clock synchronous selection
Serial I/O enable selection
f(XIN)/4 or f(X CIN )/4
f(XIN)/16 or f(X CIN)/16
BRG output divided by 4
External clock input
Ordinary port
SRDY signal output (Note 1)
Disable (half-duplex data communication)
Enable (full-duplex data communication)
Receive enable
Clock synchronous
P14 to P1 7 function as Serial I/O pins
Serial I/O control register
(SIOCON: Address 00E216 )
Bit
Setting value
0
b0
1
0
b1
1
0
b2
1
0
b4
1(Note 2)
b5
1
b6
1
b7
1
Notes 1: When the receive side performs an SRDY output by using an external clock, set the
receive enable bit, the S RDY output enable bit, and the transmit enable bit to “1”
(transmit enable).
2: When the external clock is selected, write “1” in bit 4 (transmit enable bit) while the
synchronous clock is at “H.”
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-113
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
(2) Clock asynchronous Serial I/O
In case of the clock asynchronous Serial I/O (UART), the transmit operation of the transmit side and
the receive operation of the receive side are simultaneously executed by unifying the baud rate and
the transfer data format between both transmit side and receive side.
Figure 1.13B.6 shows a UART block diagram.
Data bus
Address 00E2 16
P14
RXD
Receive enable bit
(RE)
ST detected
OE
7 bits
8 bits
Address 00E0 16
Serial I/O control register
Receive buffer register
Receive buffer full flag (RBF)
Receive interrupt request (RI)
Receive shift register
Character length
selection bit (CHAS) PE
FE
SP detected
UART control register
1/16
Address 00E3 16
Clock control circuit
Serial I/O enable bit(SIOE)
BRG count source
selection bit (CSS)
SCLK
✽
XCIN
XIN
1/4
Serial I/O synchronous clock selection bit
(SCS)
Dividing ratio 1/(n+1)
Baud rate generator
1/4
Address 00E4 16
ST/SP/PA occur
Transmit enable bit (TE)
TXD
Transmit shift completion flag (TSC)
Transmit shift register
Transmit interrupt source
selection bit (TIC)
Character length
selection bit (CHAS)
P16 P15
1/16
Transmit buffer register
Address 00E0 16
Transmit interrupt request (TI)
Transmit buffer empty flag (TBE)
Serial I/O status register Address 00E1 16
Data bus
✽: The 7477 group is not provided with the XCIN pin.
Fig. 1.13B.6 UART block diagram
1-114
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
2 Synchronous clock
The following can be selected as a synchronous clock by bit 1 of the Serial I/O control register
(SIOCON: address 00E216 ).
● “0” : Baud rate generator (BRG) output divided by 16
● “1” : External clock input from the S CLK pin divided by 16
The BRG output is set by the baud rate generator (BRG: address 00E416 ), which is an 8-bit
counter dedicated to the Serial I/O. As an input clock to the BRG, f(XIN)/4 or f(XCIN )/4 (at “0”),
f(XIN )/16 or f(XCIN )/16 (at “1”) can be selected by bit 0 of the Serial I/O control register.
Precaution on internal clock selection
In the UART, when the internal clock is selected as a synchronous clock, the P16/SCLK pin can
be used as port P1 6.
Notes on external clock selection
● Set the “H” and “L” widths (TWH , T WL) of the pulse used as the external clock source to TWH ,
T WL [s] > 2/(f(XIN) [Hz]). For example, when f(X IN) = 8 MHz, use a clock of 2 MHz or less (duty
ratio 50 %).
2 Data transfer speed (Baud rate)
In the UART, the expression for calculating a data transfer speed (baud rate), which is the frequency
of the synchronous clock is shown below.
● When the internal clock is selected (using the BRG)
Baud rate [bps] =
f(XIN) or f(XCIN )
Division ratio
✽1
✕ (BRG set value
✽2
+ 1) ✕ 16
✽ 1 Division ratio : Select “4” or “16” by the BRG count source selection bit.
✽ 2 BRG set value : 0 – 255 (0016 – FF16 )
● When the external clock is selected
Baud rate [bps] =
Input clock oscillation frequency to SCLK pin
16
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-115
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
The BRG is an 8-bit counter dedicated to the Serial I/O, having a reload register, and divides the
count source by (n + 1) by setting the value n. As a count source, f(XIN)/4 or f(X CIN)/4 (at “0”),
f(XIN)/16 or f(X CIN )/16 (at “1”) can be selected by bit 0 of the Serial I/O control register.
Table 1.13B.3 shows a baud rate reference value.
Table 1.13B.3 Baud rate reference value
At f(X IN) = 7.9872 MHz
Baud rate [bps]
BRG set value
Count source
1-116
At f(XIN ) = 3.9936 MHz
BRG set value
Count source
300
f(XIN)/16
103(67 16 )
f(X IN)/16
51(33 16 )
600
f(XIN)/16
51(33 16 )
f(X IN)/16
25(19 16 )
1200
f(XIN)/16
25(19 16 )
f(X IN)/16
12(0C 16 )
2400
f(XIN)/16
12(0C 16 )
f(X IN)/4
25(19 16 )
4800
f(XIN)/4
25(19 16 )
f(X IN)/4
12(0C 16 )
9600
f(XIN)/4
12(0C 16 )
15600
f(XIN)/4
7(07 16 )
31200
f(XIN)/4
3(03 16 )
41600
f(XIN)/4
2(02 16 )
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
2 Transmit/receive data format
A transmit/receive data format can be selected by the bits of the UART control register (UARTCON).
•
•
•
•
Start bit (ST)
Data bit (DATA)
Parity bit (PA)
Stop bit (SP)
:
:
:
:
1-bit
7-bit or 8-bit
Non or 1-bit
1-bit or 2-bit
Figure 1.13B.7 shows a transmit/receive data format, Table 1.13B.4 shows a function of each bit of
transmit data, and Figure 1.13B.8 shows all data formats.
● For 1ST-8DATA-1PA-2SP
Next transmit data
(at continuous output)
Transmit data
Data bit (8 bits)
ST
LSB
D0
D1
D6
MSB
D7
PA
SP
SP
ST
D0
D1
Fig. 1.13B.7 UART data format
Table 1.13B.4 Each bit function of UART transmit data
Name
Function
Start bit ST
The “L” signal for 1 bit is added by the bit indicating a start of data transmission
immediately before the transmit data.
Data bit DATA
This bit indicates the transmit data written in the UART transmit buffer register.
The “0” data is an “L” signal and the “1” data is an “H” signal.
Parity bit PA
This bit is added immediately after the data bit for improvement of data reliability.
The contents of this bit change according to the contents of the parity selection bit
so that the number of “1”s in the transmit data including the parity bit may always be
even or odd.
Stop bit SP
This bit indicates that data has been transmitted, and is added immediately after the
data bit (immediately after the parity bit when the parity is valid). The “H” signal for
1 bit or 2 bits is output.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-117
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
ST: Start bit
Di: Data bit
PA: Parity bit
SP: Stop bit
● For 7-bit UART mode
ST
LSB
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
MSB
D6
SP
ST
LSB
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
MSB
D6
SP
ST
LSB
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
MSB
D6
PA
SP
ST
LSB
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
MSB
D6
PA
SP
SP
SP
● For 8-bit UART mode
ST
LSB
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
MSB
D7
SP
ST
LSB
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
MSB
D7
SP
ST
LSB
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
MSB
D7
PA
SP
ST
LSB
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
MSB
D7
PA
SP
Fig. 1.13B.8 Transmit/receive format of UART
1-118
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
SP
SP
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
2 Transmit operation of UART
The Transmit operation of the UART is described below.
● Start of Transmit operation
Transmit data is transmitted by writing it into the Transmit buffer register (TB: address 00E0 16) in
the Transmit enable state. ✽ 1
● Transmit operation
1 After transmit data is written into the Transmit buffer register, the transmit buffer empty flag (bit
0) of the Serial I/O status register is cleared to “0.”
2 The transmit data written in the Transmit buffer register is transferred to the Transmit shift
register. When the data transfer from the Transmit buffer register to the Transmit shift register
is completed, the transmit buffer empty flag is set to “1.”✽ 2
When the transmit interrupt source bit (bit 3) of the Serial I/O control register (SIOCON) is “0,”
the interrupt request bit is set to “1,” then a transmit interrupt request occurs.
3 The transmit data transferred to the transmit shift register is output from the P1 5/TxD pin in
synchronization with the fall of the synchronous clock starting with the start bit. The start bit,
the parity bit and the stop bit are automatically generated and output according to the contents
of setting of the UART control register.
4 When a transmit shift operation is started, the transmit shift completion flag (b2) of the Serial
I/O status register is cleared to “0.”
5 Data is output starting with the least significant bit of the Transmit shift register. Each time onebit data is output, the contents of the Transmit shift register are shifted by 1 bit in the direction
of the least significant bit.
6 After one-half a cycle of the synchronous clock ✽3 after a start of stop bit transmission, the
transmit shift completion flag is set to “1.”
When the bit 3 of the Serial I/O control register is “1” (transmit shift operation is completed),
at the time the interrupt request bit is set to “1” and the Transmit interrupt request occurs.
✽ 1: Status in which the register for transmit operation has been completed. Refer to the “[UART
transmit setting method]” which will be described later.
✽ 2: While the transmit buffer empty flag is “1,” the next transmit data can be written into the
Transmit buffer register.
✽ 3: In case of two stop bits, the stop bit output period is that of the 2nd bit.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-119
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
● Transmit interrupt operation (valid when the Serial I/O is selected)
Regarding a transmit interrupt, interrupt request generating timing can be selected by bit 3 of the
Serial I/O control register (SIOCON).
0: When the Transmit buffer register becomes empty after the data written in the Transmit buffer
register is transferred to the Transmit shift register, an interrupt request is generated.
1: When the shift operation of the Transmit shift register is completed, an interrupt request is
generated.
* In case of the UART, an interrupt operation is performed in the same way as when the synchronous
clock is selected.
Figure 1.13B.9 shows a transmit operation of UART and Figure 1.13B.10 shows a transmit timing
of UART.
1
Data bus
Address 00E0 16
4
Write transmit data
Transmit buffer register
b0
1
1
Serial I/O status register
(Address 00E1 16)
0
b2
Serial I/O status register
(Address 00E1 16)
2
0
5
b0
D7 D6 D 5 D4 D3 D2 D1
Transmit buffer register
Transfer transmit data
0
Serial I/O status register
(Address 00E1 16)
1
b0
When “0” is selected by the bit 3
of the Serial I/O control register
0
Interrupt request register 1
6
SP
Synchronous clock
P15/TxD
0
Serial I/O status register
1
b2
When “1” is selected by the bit 3
of the Serial I/O control register
1
b6
Synchronous clock
Transmit shift register
ST
P15/TxD
Interrupt request
register 1
0
(Address 00FC 16)
1
b6
Fig. 1.13B.9 Transmit operation of UART
1-120
P15/TxD
(Address 00E1 16)
(Address 00FC 16)
b0
D7 D6 D5 D 4 D 3 D2 D1 D0
D0
Transmit shift register
Transmit shift register
3
Synchronous clock
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
Synchronous clock,
BRG output divided by 16, or
external clock divided by 16
ST
TXD pin
D0
D1
D2
D6
D7
SP
Serial I/O not used
Write signal to
Transmit buffer register
Transmit buffer empty flag
Transmit shift completion flag
Transmit interrupt enable bit
Transmit interrupt request bit
B1
A1
A1
B2
A2
A2 : • Clearing by writing “0” to the transmit interrupt request bit.
• Clearing by accepting the transmit interrupt.
B1
: When interrupt request generation is selected, when the Transmit buffer register
becomes empty by clearing the transmit interrupt source selection bit to “0”.
B2
: When interrupt request generation is selected, when the shift operation of the
Transmit shift register is completed by setting the transmit interrupt source selection bit to “1”.
Fig. 1.13B.10 Transmit timing chart of UART
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-121
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
[UART transmit setting method]
1 Clear the Serial I/O transmit interrupt enable bit (bit 6 of Interrupt control register 1) to “0.”
2 When selecting the internal clock, set the BRG value.
3 Set the Serial I/O control register according to Table 1.13B.5.
4 Set the data format according to Table 1.13B.6.
5 When using a Serial I/O transmit interrupt
[1] Clear the Serial I/O transmit interrupt request bit (bit 6 of Interrupt request register 1) to “0.”
Note: When the ordinary port is switched over to the Serial I/O port, the Serial I/O transmit
interrupt request may be set to “1.” Clear the Serial I/O transmit interrupt request bit
to “0” after one instruction or more after switching the ordinary port over to the Serial
I/O port.
[2] Set the Serial I/O transmit interrupt enable bit to “1.”
6 Write transmit data into the Transmit buffer register.
Table 1.13B.5 UART transmit setting
Serial I/O control register
(SIOCON: Address 00E216)
Item
bit
setting value
f (X IN)/4 or f(XCIN)/4
0
b0
BRG count source selection
f (X IN)/16 or f(X CIN)/16
1
BRG output divided by 16
0
b1
Synchronous clock selection
External clock input divided by 16
1
(Note 1)
b2
SRDY signal output selection
0
Transmit buffer empty
b3
Transmit interrupt request selection
When the transmit shift operation is completed
1
Transmit enable
1
b4
Transmit enable selection
Disable (Half-duplex data communication)
0
b5
Receive enable selection
Enable (Full-duplex data communication)
1
Clock asynchronization
0
b6
Clock asynchronous selection
P14 to P17 function as Serial I/O pins (Note 2)
1
b7
Serial I/O enable selection
Notes 1: When the UART is selected, this bit does not function.
2: When the internal clock is selected, the P1 6/S CLK pin can be used as port P1 6.
Register to be used
Table 1.13B.6 Set value of UART control register
UART control register (UARTCON: Address 00E3 16 )
Serial I/O data transfer format
b3
b2
b1
b0
1ST-8DATA-1SP
0
0
0
–
1ST-7DATA-1SP
0
0
1
1ST-8DATA-1PA-1SP
0
Selection
1
0
1ST-7DATA-1PA-1SP
0
(Note)
1
1
1ST-8DATA-2SP
1
0
0
_
1ST-7DATA-2SP
1
0
1
1ST-8DATA-1PA-2SP
1
Selection
1
0
1
1ST-7DATA-1PA-2SP
(Note)
1
1
Note: 0: Even parity
1: Odd parity
1-122
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
2 Receive operation of UART
The receive operation of UART is described below.
● Start of receive operation
Set the receive enable bit (bit 5) of the Serial I/O control register (SIOCON) to the enable state
(“1”) in the receive enable state. ✽1 With this operation, the start bit is detected and serial data is
received.
● Receive operation
1 After a fall of the P14 /RxD pin is detected, the level of the P14 /RxD pin is checked after onehalf a cycle of the synchronous clock. If its level is “L,” the bit is judged as a start bit. When
its level is “H,” it is judged that noise is generated, so that the the receive operation is stopped
and the UART waits for the start bit.
2 Receive data is input bit by bit from the P14/RxD pin to the Receive shift register in synchronization
with the rise of the synchronous clock.
3 Data, immediately after the start bit, is input starting with the most significant bit of the Receive
shift register. Each time one bit is received, the contents of the Receive shift register are shifted
by 1 bit in the direction of the least significant bit.
4 When the specified number of bits are all input in the Receive shift register, the contents of the
Receive shift register are transferred to the Receive buffer register (RB). ✽2, ✽3
5 After 1/2 cycle of the shift clock after a start of stop bit reception, the receive buffer full flag
(bit 1) of the Serial I/O status register (SIOSTS) is set to “1”✽4 and a receive interrupt request
is generated.
6 Error flag detection is started concurrently with the occurrence of the receive interrupt request.
✽ 1: Status in which the register for receive operation has been completed. Refer to the “[UART
receive setting method]” which will be described later.
✽ 2: When the data bit length is 7 bits, the contents of the Receive buffer register consist of receive
data of bits 0 to 6 and “0” of bit 7 (MSB).
✽ 3: If receive data is further input to the Receive shift register when data remains (when the
receive buffer full flag is “1”) without reading out the contents of the Receive buffer register, the
overrun error flag of the Serial I/O status register is set to “1.” At this time, the data of the
Receive shift register is not transferred to the Receive buffer register and the original data of
the Receive buffer register is held.
✽ 4: The receive buffer full flag is cleared to “0” by reading out the Receive buffer register.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-123
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
● Receive interrupt operation (valid when the Serial I/O is selected)
When receive data is transferred from the Receive shift register to the Receive buffer register after
one-byte data is all input to the Receive shift register, an interrupt request is generated.
* In case of the UART, an interrupt operation is performed in the same way as when the synchronous
clock is selected.
Figure 1.13B.11 shows a receive operation of UART and Figure 1.13B.12 shows a receive timing
of UART.
1
5
Synchronous clock
Synchronous clock
RxD (noise)
“H” level detected
→ judge as noise
RxD (ST)
“L” level detected
→ judge as start bit
2
D0
P14/RxD
3
1
b1
0
(Address 00FC 16)
1
b5
6
Synchronous clock
D3 D2 D1 D0
P14/RxD
Interrupt request register 1
Receive shift register
b0
Serial I/O status register
(Address 00E1 16)
Receive shift register
Synchronous clock
Receive shift register D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D 0
Receive data transfer
0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1
b6 b5 b4 b3
b3(OE)=“1” when the overrun error occurs.
b4(PE)=“1” when the parity error occurs.
b5(FE)=“1” when the framing error occurs.
b6(SE)=“1” when OE U PE U FE=1.
(Address 00E0 16) Receive buffer register
Fig. 1.13B.11 Receive operation of UART
1-124
0
Serial I/O status register
(Address 00E1 16)
Synchronous clock
b0
4
RxD (SP)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
Synchronous clock
Receive started
by falling of ST
RXD pin
Test that level of ST
is “L”
ST
D0
D1
D2
D6
PAR
SP
Read into Receive shift register
Receive buffer register
read out signal
Receive buffer full flag
Receive interrupt request bit
A
Receive enable bit
A : • Clearing by writing “0” to the receive interrupt request bit.
• Clearing by accepting the receive interrupt.
Fig. 1.13B.12 Receive timing chart of UART
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-125
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
[UART receive setting method]
1 Clear the Serial I/O receive interrupt enable bit (bit 5 of Interrupt control register 1) to “0.”
2 When selecting the internal clock, set the BRG value.
3 Set the Serial I/O control register according to Table 1.13B.7.
4 Set the data format according to Table 1.13B.6.
5 When using a Serial I/O receive interrupt
[1] Clear the Serial I/O receive interrupt request bit (bit 5 of Interrupt request register 1) to “0.”
Note: When the ordinary port is switched over to the Serial I/O port, the Serial I/O receive
interrupt request may be set to “1.” Clear the Serial I/O receive interrupt request bit
to “0” after one instruction or more after switching the ordinary port over to the Serial
I/O port.
[2] Set the Serial I/O receive interrupt enable bit to “1.”
6 In the full-duplex data communication, set transmit data in the Transmit buffer register (TB).
Table 1.13B.7 UART receive setting
Serial I/O control register
(SIOCON: Address 00E2 16)
Item
bit
setting value
f (X IN)/4 or f(X CIN)/4
0
b0
BRG count source selection
f (X IN)/16 or f(X CIN)/16
1
BRG output divided by 16
0
b1
Synchronous clock selection
External clock input divided by 16
1
(Note
1)
b2
SRDY signal output selection
0
Transmit buffer empty
b3
Transmit interrupt request selection
When the transmit shift operation is completed
1
Disable (Half-duplex data communication)
0
b4
Transmit enable selection
Enable (Full-duplex data communication)
1
Receive enable
1
b5
Receive enable selection
Clock asynchronous
0
b6
Clock asynchronous selection
P14 to P17 function as serial I/O pins (Note 2)
1
b7
Serial I/O enable selection
Notes 1: When the UART is selected, this bit does not function.
2: When the internal clock is selected, the P1 6/SCLK pin can be used as port P1 6.
Register to be used
1-126
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
1.13B.2 Pins
The 7477/7478 group uses 4 pins for data transmit, data receive, shift clock transmit/receive and serial
I/O transfer ready signal output. All these pins are used in common with P1. A function selection is made
by the serial I/O enable bit (bit 7) and the S RDY output enable bit (bit 2) of the Serial I/O control register.
The function of each pin is explained below.
(1) Data transmit pin[TxD]
Transmit data is output bit by bit. This pin is used in common with P15 . When the transfer enable
bit and the serial I/O enable bit of the Serial I/O control register is set to “1,” this pin becomes a serial
I/O data output pin.
(2) Data receive pin [RxD]
Data is input bit by bit. This pin is used in common with P14. When the receive enable bit and the
serial I/O enable bit of serial I/O control register are set to “1,” this pin becomes a serial I/O data
input pin.
(3) Shift clock transmit/receive pin [SCLK ]
2 Clock synchronous
This pin inputs (receives from the outside) or outputs (supplies to the outside) the synchronous
clock for data transmit/receive.
When the serial I/O synchronous clock selection bit (bit 1) of the Serial I/O control register is
cleared to “0” (use of internal clock), the synchronous clock is output.
When the same bit is set to “1” (use of internal clock), the synchronous clock is input from the
outside.
2 Clock asynchronous (UART)
When the serial I/O synchronous clock selection bit (bit 1) of the Serial I/O control register is set
to “1” (use of external clock), the synchronous clock is supplied from the outside.
When the same bit is cleared to “0” (use of internal clock), this pin does not function.
Note: When the internal clock is selected, SCLK pin can be used as port P1 6.
(4) Serial transfer enable signal output pin [SRDY]
This pin informs the outside of a receive enable state in the clock synchronous serial I/O.
In case of the UART, this pin does not function.
● SRDY signal output enable bit (bit 2) of Serial I/O control register is set to “1.”
● Transmit enable bit (bit 4) of Serial I/O control register is set to “1.”
When the above 2 conditions are satisfied, the level of the pin changes from “H” to “L” at the timing
at which data was written into the Transmit buffer register, informing the outside of a serial I/O transfer
enable state.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-127
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
1.13B.3 Notes on use
(1) Notes on external clock selection
In the 7477/7478 group, either the internal clock or external clock can be selected as the synchronous
clock. When the external clock is selected as the synchronous clock, take the following points into
consideration.
2 Clock synchronous serial I/O
1 During data transmission, when setting the transmit enable bit to “1” or writing data into the
Transmit buffer register, perform a write operation while the synchronous clock is at “H.”
2 The transmission or the shift operation of the Receive shift register is continued while the
synchronous clock is input to the serial I/O circuit. When the external clock is selected, stop the
synchronous clock at the end of 8 cycles. When the internal clock is selected, the synchronous
clock stops automatically at the end of 8 cycles.
3 When the external clock is selected, set the “H” and “L” widths (TWH , TWL) of the pulse used
as the external clock source to TWH , TWL [s] Q 8/(f(X IN) [Hz]). For example, when f(X IN) is 8
MHz, use a clock of 500 kHz or less (duty ratio 50 %).
2 UART
Set the “H” and “L” widths (T WH, T WL) of the pulse used as the external clock source to T WH,
T WL [s] Q 2/(f(XIN ) [Hz]). For example, when f(X IN ) is 8 MHz, use a clock of 2 MHz or
less (duty ratio 50 %).
(2) When the S RDY output is performed in the clock synchronous serial I/O
When the receive side using the external clock performs an S RDY output, set the receive enable bit,
the SRDY output enable and the transmit enable bit to “1” (transmit enable).
(3) When a serial I/O transmit interrupt or a serial I/O receive interrupt is caused
2 When using a serial I/O transmit interrupt
1 Clear the serial I/O transmit interrupt request bit (bit 6 of IR1) to “0” after one instruction or
more after setting a value in the Serial I/O control register.
2 After setting in 1, set the serial I/O transmit interrupt enable bit (bit 6 of IE1) to “1.”
2 When using a serial I/O receive interrupt
1 Clear the serial I/O receive interrupt request bit (bit 5 of IR1) to “0” after one instruction or more
after setting a value in the Serial I/O control register.
2 After setting in 1, set the serial I/O receive interrupt enable bit (bit 5 of IE1) to “1.”
(4) Transmit interrupt request in the transmit enable state
After the transmit enable bit is set to “1,” the transmit buffer empty flag and the transmit shift
completion flag are set to “1.” Accordingly, even if a transmit buffer empty state is selected or a
termination of shift operation of the Transmit shift register is selected as a transmit interrupt source,
an interrupt request is generated and the transmit interrupt request bit is set to “1.”
For this reason, when using a transmit interrupt, set the transmit enable bit to “1,” clear the transmit
interrupt request bit to “0,” and then set the transmit interrupt enable bit to “1” (enable state).
1-128
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
(5) Disabling transmission after transmission of 1-byte data
In the 7477/7478 group, it is possible to make reference to the transmit shift register completion flag
(TSC flag) to know that data has been transmitted.
The TSC flag is “0” during data transmission, and becomes “1” after data has been transmitted.
Accordingly, if data transmission is disabled at the time of confirmation of a change of the TSC flag
from “0” to “1,” data transmission can be terminated after 1-byte data is transmitted. However, the
TSC flag is also set to “1” when the serial I/O is enabled and does not become “0” until a synchronous
clock is generated and transmitted. For this reason, if data transmission is disabled by making
reference to the TSC flag at this time, data is not transmitted. Make reference to the TSC flag after
a start of data transmission.
The change of the TSC flag from “1” to “0” has a delay of 0.5 to 1.5 cycles of the synchronous clock.
(6) Re-setting the Serial I/O control register (SIOCON)
Re-set the Serial I/O control register after setting both transmit enable bit and receive enable bit to
“0” to re-set the transmit circuit and the receive circuit.
1 Clear both transmit enable bit (TE) and receive enable bit (RE) to “0.”
2 Set the bit 0 to bit 3 and bit 6 of the Serial I/O control register.
3 Set both transmit enable bit (TE) and receive enable bit (RE) to “1.”
(It is possible to set 2 and 3 simultaneously with the LDM instruction.)
(7) Stopping data transmit/receive
2 In the following cases, clear the transmit enable bit to “0” (transmit disable).
● To stop the transmit operation when data is transmitted in the clock synchronous serial I/O
● To stop the transmit operation when UART data is transmitted
● To stop only the transmit operation when UART data is transferred
2 In the following cases, clear receive enable bit (receive disable) or serial I/O enable bit to “0”
(serial I/O disable).
● To stop the receive operation when data is received in the clock synchronous serial I/O
2 In the following cases, clear the receive enable bit to “0.”
● To stop the receive operation when UART data is received.
● To stop only the receive operation when UART data is transferred.
2 In the following cases, clear both transmit enable bit and receive enable bit to “0” (transfer
disable) simultaneously.
● To stop the transmit operation and the receive operation when data is transferred in the clock
synchronous serial I/O
Note: When data is transferred in the clock synchronous serial I/O, it is impossible to stop only
the transmit operation or the receive operation.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-129
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
(8) Processing upon occurrence of errors
2 When a parity error, a framing error or a summing error occurs
When a parity error, a framing error or a summing error occurs, the flag corresponding to each
error in the Serial I/O status register is set to “1.” These flags are not cleared to “0” automatically.
Clear them to “0” by software.
The parity error flag, the framing error flag and the summing error flag can be cleared to “0” by
one of the following two methods.
● Clear the receive enable bit to “0.”
● Write arbitrary dummy data into the Serial I/O status register.
2 Processing upon occurrence of overrun error
An overrun error occurs when data has all been input to the Receive shift register while data is
stored in the Receive buffer register.
When an overrun error occurs, the data of the Receive shift register is not transferred to the
Receive buffer register and the data of the Receive buffer register is held. At this time, even if
the data of the Receive buffer register is read out, the data of the Receive shift register is not
transferred. Accordingly, the data of the Receive buffer register can be read out but the data of
the Receive shift register cannot be read out and becomes invalid.
When an overrun error occurs, clear the overrun error flag of the Serial I/O status register to “0”
and then make preparations for receiving data again.
The overrun error flag can be cleared by one of the following methods.
● Clear the serial I/O enable bit to “0.”
● Clear the receive enable bit to “0.”
● Write arbitrary dummy data into the Serial I/O status register.
1-130
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
1.13B.4 Related registers
(1) Transmit/receive buffer register (TB/RB: Address 00E0 16)
The Transmit/receive buffer register is written serial I/O (used in common with the clock synchronous
serial I/O and the UART) transmit data and is read out serial I/O receive data.
● To transmit data, write this transmit data into this register.
● Receive data can be obtained by reading this register.
Figure 1.13B.13 shows a structure of the Transmit/receive buffer register.
Transmit/receive buffer register (7477/7478 group)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Transmit/receive buffer register (TB/RB) [Address 00E016]
B
Function
A
value
of “00 16” to “FF 16” can be
0 At transmit:
set as transmit data.
to
The transmit data is transferred
7
automatically by writing the transmit
data into the Transmit shift register.
At receive: When all receive data has been input
into the Receive shift register, the
receive data is automatically transferred to the receive buffer register.
At reset
R W
?
Fig. 1.13B.13 Structure of Transmit/receive buffer register
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-131
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
(2) Serial I/O status register (SIOSTS: Address 00E116 )
The Serial I/O status register consists of flags for representing the buffer/register state to be used
for data transfer, and error flags.
● This register is a read-only type.
● Bit 7 is unused and “1” at a read operation.
Figure 1.13B.14 shows a structure of the Serial I/O status register.
Serial I/O status register (7477/7478 group)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
1
Serial I/O status register (SIOSTS) [Address 00E1 16]
B
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Name
Transmit buffer
empty flag (TBE)
Receive buffer full
flag (RBF)
Transmit shift
completion flag (TSC)
Overrun error flag
(OE)
Parity error flag
(PE)
Framing error flag
(FE)
Summing error
flag (SE)
Function
0 : Buffer full
1 : Buffer empty
0 : Buffer empty
1 : Buffer full
0 : Transmit shift in progress
1 : Transmit shift completed
0 : No error
1 : Overrun error
0 : No error
1 : Parity error
0 : No error
1 : Framing error
0 : (OE) U (PE) U (FE) = 0
1 : (OE) U (PE) U (FE) = 1
Nothing is allocated for this bit. This is a write
disabled bit. When this bit is read out, the value
is “1.”
Fig. 1.13B.14 Structure of Serial I/O status register
1-132
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
At reset
R W
0
✕
0
✕
0
✕
0
✕
0
✕
0
✕
0
✕
1
1 ✕
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
Each bit of the Serial I/O status register is described below.
2 Transmit buffer empty flag (TBE, bit 0)
This flag indicates the state of the Transmit buffer register.
This bit is set to “1” after the data written in the Transmit buffer register is transferred to the
Transmit shift register, and cleared to “0” after data is written into the Transmit buffer register.
This flag is valid in both clock synchronous serial I/O and UART.
2 Receive buffer full flag (RBF, bit 1)
This flag indicates the state of the Receive buffer register.
When 1-byte data has been all input to the Receive shift register and then the receive data has
been transferred from the Receive shift register to the Receive buffer register, this flag is automatically
set to “1.” When the transferred data has been read out from the Receive buffer register, the flag
is automatically cleared to “0.”
If receive data is further input to the Receive shift register when the receive buffer full flag is “1”
(without reading out the contents of the Receive buffer register), the overrun error flag is set to
“1.”
The receive buffer full flag is valid in both clock synchronous serial I/O and UART.
2 Transmit shift completion flag (TSC, bit 2)
This flag indicates the state of the transmit shift operation.
When transmit data has been transferred to the Transmit shift register and then a shift operation
has been started with the synchronous clock (transmission of the 1st bit of the transmit data), this
flag is cleared to “0.” When the shift operation has been completed (completion of transmission
the last bit of the transmit data), the flag is set to “1.”
This flag is valid in both clock synchronous serial I/O and UART.
2 Overrun error flag (OE, bit 3)
This flag indicates the receive data read state.
If receive data is further input to the Receive shift register when the receive buffer full flag is “1”
(without reading out the contents of the Receive buffer register), the overrun error flag is set to
“1.”
This flag is cleared to “0” by any operation shown in Table 1.13B.8.
This flag is valid in both clock synchronous Serial I/O and UART.
2 Parity error flag (PE, bit 4)
This flag indicates a hardware check result on the even parity or odd parity in the UART.
If there is a difference between the parity of received data and the set parity, the flag is set to
“1.”
This flag is cleared to “0” by any operation shown in Table 1.13B.8.
This flag is valid in the parity enable state in UART.
2 Framing error flag (FE, bit 5)
This flag judges a frame synchronization error in UART.
When the stop bit of receive data cannot be received at the set timing, the flag is set to “1.”
At stop bit detection, only the 1st stop bit is detected but the 2nd stop bit is not checked.
This flag is cleared by any operation shown in Table 1.13B.8.
This flag is valid in UART only.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-133
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
2 Summing error flag (SE, bit 6)
This flag judges a serial I/O error.
If one of an overrun error, a parity error and a framing error occurs, the flag is set to “1.”
This flag is cleared by any operation shown in Table 1.13B.8.
This flag is valid in both clock synchronous serial I/O and UART.
[Error flag clear method]
The error flags (bit 3 to bit 6) in the Serial I/O status register can be cleared to “0” by the error
flag clear methods shown in Table 1.13B.8.
Table 1.13B.8 Error flag clear method
Clear the serial I/O inter- Clear the receive enable bit Write dummy data into the
Error flag
rupt enable bit to “0.”
to “0.”
SIOSTS.
Overrun error flag
,
,
,
Parity error flag
×
,
,
Framing error flag
×
,
,
Summing error flag
×
,
,
1-134
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
(3) Serial I/O control register (SIOCON: Address 00E216 )
The Serial I/O control register exerts various types of control over the serial I/O, for example, transfer
mode, clocks and pin function selection. All the bits of this register can be read and written by
software.
Figure 1.13B.15 shows a structure of the Serial I/O control register.
Serial I/O control register (7477/7478 group)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Serial I/O control register (SIOCON) [Address 00E2 16]
B
0
1
Name
BRG count source
selection bit (CSS)
Function
0 : f(X IN)/4 or f(X CIN)/4
1 : f(X IN)/16 or f(X CIN)/16
Serial I/O
synchronous clock
selection bit (SCS)
•In clock synchronous mode
0 : BRG output divided by 4
1 : External clock input
•In UART mode
0 : BRG output divided by 16
1 : External clock input
divided by 16
2 SRDY output enable
bit (SRDY)
✽In the UART mode,
this bit is invalid.
3
4
5
6
Transmit interrupt
source selection
bit (TIC)
R W
0
0
0 : P1 7/SRDY pin operates
as ordinary I/O pin
1 : P1 7/SRDY pin operates
as S RDY output pin
0
0 : When transmit buffer
has emptied
1 : When transmit shift
operation is completed
0
Transmit enable bit (TE) 0 : Transmit disabled
1 : Transmit enabled
Receive enable bit (RE) 0 : Receive disabled
1 : Receive enabled
Serial I/O mode
0 : Clock asynchronous
selection bit (SIOM)
serial I/O (UART)
1 : Clock synchronous
7 Serial I/O enable
bit (SIOE)
At reset
0
0
0
0 : Serial I/O disabled
(pins operates as ordinary
I/O pins P1 4–P17)
0
1 : Serial I/O enabled
(pins operates as serial
I/O pins R XD - S RDY)
(Note)
Note: Port P1 4–P17 are operates as the serial I/O pin only when
the serial I/O enable bit is “1” (enable state).
At this time, Port P1 7 is also used as an ordinary I/O port.
In the UART mode, port P1 6 is used as an ordinary I/O port
when the internal clock is selected.
Fig. 1.13B.15 Structure of Serial I/O control register
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-135
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
Each bit of the Serial I/O control register is described below.
2 BRG count source selection bit (CSS, bit 0)
This bit selects a count source to be input to the BRG.
• “0”: f(X IN)/4
• “1”: f(XIN )/16
2 Serial I/O synchronous clock selection bit (SCS, bit 1)
This bit selects a synchronous clock to be used for the serial I/O.
● In the clock synchronous serial I/O
• “0”: The BRG output divided by 4 becomes a shift clock.
• “1”: The external clock (P16/SCLK pin input) becomes a synchronous clock.
● In the UART
• “0”: The BRG output divided by 16 becomes a shift clock.
• “1”: The external clock (P16/SCLK pin input) divided by 16 becomes a synchronous clock.
2 S RDY output enable bit (SRDY , bit 2)
This bit selects whether the P1 7/ SRDY pin is used as P1 7 or as serial I/O pin S RDY or SRDY output
disable.
● In the clock synchronous serial I/O
• “0”: S RDY pin output disable (used as port P17 )
• “1”: S RDY pin output enable (used as serial I/O pin SRDY)
● In the UART
The P17/ SRDY pin is used as P1 7 regardless of the value of this bit.
2 Transmit interrupt request selection bit (TIC, bit 3)
This bit determines a source for generating a transmit interrupt request.
• “0”: When the contents of the Transmit buffer register are transferred to the Transmit shift
register, a transmit interrupt request is generated.
• “1”: When the shift operation of the Transmit shift register terminates, a transmit interrupt
request is generated.
2 Transmit enable bit (TE, bit 4)
This bit controls a transmit operation.
● When the serial I/O enable bit (bit 7) is “0” (serial I/O disable)
The transmit enable bit is invalid.
● When the serial I/O enable bit (bit 7) is “1” (serial I/O disable)
The control shown in Table 1.13B.9 is exerted.
Table 1.13B.9 Transmit enable bit function
Transmit enable bit
P15 /TXD pin function
0
Port P15
1
Serial I/O data transmit pin TXD
∗1: Bit 0 of Serial I/O status register
∗2: Bit 2 of Serial I/O status register
1-136
Transmit buffer
empty flag ∗1
Cleared to “0”
Flag function is valid.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Transmit shift
completion flag∗2
Cleared to “0”
Flag function is valid.
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
2 Receive enable bit (bit 5)
This bit controls the receive operation.
● When the serial I/O enable bit (bit 7) is “1” (serial I/O enable), the control shown in Table
1.13B.10 is exerted.
● When the serial I/O enable bit (bit 7) is “0” (serial I/O disable), this bit is invalid.
Table 1.13B.10 Receive enable bit function
Receive enable bit
P1 4/R XD pin function
0
Port P14
1
Serial I/O data transmit pin RXD
∗1: Bit 1 of Serial I/O status register
∗2: Bit 3,4,5 and 6 of Serial I/O status register
Receive buffer full flag ∗1
Each error flag∗2
Cleared to “0”
Flag function is valid.
Cleared to “0”
Flag function is valid.
2 Serial I/O mode selection bit (bit 6)
This bit selects the clock synchronous serial I/O or the UART.
• “0”: UART
• “1”: Clock synchronous serial I/O
2 Serial I/O enable bit (bit 7)
This bit selects whether each of the P14 /RxD, P15 /TxD, P16/SCLK and P1 7/ SRDY pins is used as
a port or a serial I/O pin.
When using the serial I/O, set this bit to “1.”
• “0”: The respective pins become P14 to P1 7.
• “1”: The respective pins become serial I/O pins, R XD, TxD, SCLK , SRDY.
Note: In the UART, when the internal clock is selected, the P16/SCLK pin can be used as port P1 6.
However, for the P1 7/S RDY pin, take the following points into consideration.
2 In the clock asynchronous serial I/O
When using the P17 /S RDY pin as serial I/O pin S RDY, set the S RDY output enable bit (bit 2) to “1.”
2 In the UART
The P17 /SRDY pin is used as P1 7 regardless of the value of the serial I/O enable bit.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-137
HARDWARE
1.13 Serial I/O
(4) UART control register (UARTCON: Address 00E316 )
The UART control register controls the UART transfer data format and the P15/TxD pin output type.
Figure 1.13B.16 shows a structure of UART control register.
UART control register (7477/7478 group)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
1 1 1 1
UART control register (UARTCON) [Address 00E3 16]
B
Name
Function
0: 8 bits
0 Character length
selection bit (CHAS) 1: 7 bits
0: Parity checking disabled
1 Parity enable bit
1: Parity checking enabled
(PARE)
0: Even parity
2 Parity selection bit
(PARS)
1: Odd parity
3 Stop bit length
0: 1 stop bit
selection bit (STPS) 1: 2 stop bits
4 Nothing is allocated for these bits. These are write
to disabled bits. When these bits are read out, the
7 values are “1.”
Fig. 1.13B.16 Structure of UART control register
Each bit of the UART control register is described below.
2 Character length selection bit (CHAS, bit 0)
This bit selects a data bit length of the UART transfer data format.
• “0”: 8-bit length
• “1”: 7-bit length
2 Parity enable bit (PARE, bit 1)
This bit selects whether a parity check is made.
• “0”: No parity check (Parity error flag is invalid.)
• “1”: Parity check (Parity error flag is valid.)
2 Parity selection bit (PARS, bit 2)
This bit selects a parity type of the UART transfer data format.
• “0”: Even
• “1”: Odd
2 Stop bit length selection bit (STPS, bit 3)
This bit selects a stop bit length of the UART transfer data format.
• “0”: 1-stop bit
• “1”: 2-stop bit
1-138
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
At reset
R W
0
0
0
0
1
1 ✕
HARDWARE
1.14 A-D converter
1.14 A-D converter
In the 7470/7471/7477/7478 group, the following A-D converter is incorporated.
● Analog input pins…… 7470/7477 group: 4 channels (in common with Port P2)
7471/7478 group: 8 channels (in common with Port P2)
● Conversion method … Successive approximation comparison
In the 7470/7471 group, when the A-D converter is not used, power dissipation can be suppressed by the
V REF switch. (The 7477/7478 group is not provided with this function.)
Figure 1.14.1 shows a block diagram of the A-D converter.
Data bus
b4
b0
(Note 2)
A-D control register
(Address 00D9 16)
P20/IN0
A-D control circuit
A-D conversion
interrupt request
P22/IN2
P23/IN3
P24/IN4
P25/IN5
Channel selector
P21/IN1
Comparator
A-D conversion register
(Address 00DA 16)
Switch tree
P26/IN6
Resistor ladder
P27/IN7
(Note 1)
VREF switch (Note 2)
V SS
VREF
Notes 1. The 7470/7477 group is not provided with the P24 /IN4–P2 7/IN7 pins.
2. The 7477/7478 group is not provided with the VREF switch and the VREF connection selection bit
(bit 4) of the A-D control register.
Fig. 1.14.1 A-D converter block diagram
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-139
HARDWARE
1.14 A-D converter
1.14.1 A-D conversion method
The A-D conversion method is of successive approximation comparison.
The reference voltage Vref generated internally is compared with the analog input voltage V IN which is
input from the analog input pin (P20 /IN0–P27 /IN7), and its result is stored into each bit of the A-D conversion
register (address 00DA16 ) successively to obtain a digital value.
[Internal operation]
After A-D conversion is started, the following operations are automatically performed.
1 The contents of the A-D conversion register is set to “0016 .”
2 The most significant bit (bit 7) of the A-D conversion register is set to “1.”
3 The reference voltage Vref is input to the comparator. The reference voltage Vref is specified by
the contents n of the A-D conversion register and the reference voltage VREF input from the VREF
pin.
An expression for the reference voltage V ref is shown below.
Relational expression between Vref and VREF
When n = 0
V ref = 0
When n = 1 to 255
V ref = VREF /256 × (n – 0.5)
n: The values of A-D conversion register (decimal notation)
4 The reference voltage Vref and the analog input voltage V IN are compared with 8 times. Upon
completion of each comparison, the comparison result is stored into the A-D conversion register.
As the A-D conversion register changes, the reference voltage V ref changes.
[1] Determination of the most significant bit (bit 7) of the A-D conversion register (in the 1st
comparison)
The reference voltage V ref and the analog input voltage VIN are compared. Bit 7 is determined
according to its result as follows.
If V ref < V IN , then bit 7 = “1.”
If V ref > VIN , then bit 7 = “0.”
[2] Determination of the bit 0 - 6 of the A-D conversion register (after the 2nd comparison).
First, bit 6 of the A-D conversion register is set to “1.” Next, the reference voltage V ref is
compared with the analog input voltage VIN . Bit 6 is determined according to its result as
follows.
If Vref < V IN , then bit 6 = “1.”
If Vref > VIN , then bit 6 = “0.”
1-140
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.14 A-D converter
Likewise, bit 5 to bit 0 are determined according to comparison results of the 3rd to 8th
comparisons.
A digital value (contents of the A-D conversion register) corresponding to the analog input
voltage VIN is determined bit by bit by these operations.
Figure 1.14.2 shows the changes of the contents of the A-D conversion register and the reference
voltage during A-D conversion.
5 After completion of A-D conversion, bit 3 of the A-D control register is set to “1” and an interrupt
request is generated concurrently with the completion of A-D conversion.
Notes 1: An A-D conversion result can be obtained by reading the A-D conversion register after
bit 3 of the A-D control register is set to “1.”
2: The A-D conversion result is held in the A-D conversion register until bit 3 of the A-D
control register is set to “1” again after completion of the next A-D conversion.
Contents of A-D conversion register
A-D conversion start
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1st comparison start
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2nd comparison start
1
3rd comparison start
8th comparison start
1 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 2 1 0 0 0 0 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1
Reference voltage (V ref) [V]
0
VREF
2
VREF
2
VREF
2
– VREF
±
VREF
2
± VREF ± VREF ± .....
±
512
VREF
4
VREF
4
±
4
.......
A-D conversion completion
(8th comparison completion)
– VREF
±
512
VREF
8
8
VREF
256
– VREF
512
– VREF
512
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Digital value corresponding
to analog input voltage
m by m th (m=1 to 8) result
m : Value determined
Fig 1.14.2 Contents of A-D conversion register and reference voltage during A-D conversion
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-141
HARDWARE
1.14 A-D converter
2 Conversion time
● After a start of A-D conversion, this A-D conversion terminates after 50 cycles (12.5 µ s at f(XIN)
= 8 MHz).
● Main clock input oscillation frequency f(X IN)/2 is used as an operating clock for the A-D converter,
so the A-D conversion time can be basically obtained by the following expression.
A-D conversion time =
2
× conversion cycle (50: cycles)
f(X IN)
Note: Because the comparator is configurated by capacity coupling, use the A-D converter in the
following condition.
f(XIN) > 1 MHz
Accordingly, use the A-D converter in the condition that bit 7 of the CPU mode register
(address 00FB16 ) is “0” (ordinary mode).
[Setting method]
In the 7470/7471 group
1 Clear the bit of the Port P2 direction register corresponding to the used analog input pin to “0”
(input mode).
2 Clear the port pull-up control bit corresponding to the used analog input pin to “0” (no pull-up).
3 Clear the A-D conversion interrupt request bit of the Interrupt request register 1 to “0.”
Note: After A-D conversion is started, the A-D conversion interrupt request bit is not cleared to “0”
automatically.
4 When using an A-D conversion interrupt, set the A-D conversion interrupt enable bit to “1” to
provide an interrupt enable state.
5 Set the A-D control register as follows.
● Select an analog input pin by the analog input pin selection bit.
● Set the VREF connection selection bit to “1” and connect VREF to a ladder resistor.
6 Wait for 1.0 µs or more as VREF stabilizing time.
7 Clear the A-D conversion end bit of the A-D control register to “0.” (With this setting, A-D conversion
is started.)
In the 7477/7478 group
1 Clear the A-D conversion interrupt request bit of the Interrupt request register 1 to “0.”
Note: After A-D conversion is started, the A-D conversion interrupt request bit is not cleared to “0”
automatically.
2 When using an A-D conversion interrupt, set the A-D conversion interrupt enable bit to “1” to
provide an interrupt enable state.
3 Set the A-D control register as follows.
● Select an analog input pin by the analog input pin selection bit.
● Clear the A-D conversion end bit to “0.” (With this setting, A-D conversion is started.)
Don't read the contents of the A-D conversion register during A-D conversion.
For register setting, refer to “Table 1.14.1 Setting at A-D Conversion.”
1-142
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.14 A-D converter
Processing after conversion
1 A termination of conversion can be verified by any of the following operations.
● State of A-D conversion end bit.
● State of A-D conversion interrupt request bit.
● Branch to A-D conversion interrupt routine.
2 Read the A-D conversion register to obtain a conversion result.
Notes 1: Be sure to connect V REF to a ladder resistor during A-D conversion (7470/7471 group).
2: A-D conversion is restarted at the time when the A-D conversion end bit (bit 3) of the
A-D control register is cleared to “0” during A-D conversion.
2 Port P1-P4 pull-up control register (7470 group)
Port P1-P5 pull-up control register (7471 group)
(Address 00D116)
3 Interrupt request register 1 (IR1: Address 00FC16)
4 Interrupt control register 1 (IE1: Address 00FE16 )
5 A-D conversion control register
(ADCON: Address 00D916 )
Value
Clear the bit corresponding to the used analog input pin (one of pins P2 0 /IN0 to P27 /
b7
IN 7) to “0” (input mode).
Note: In the 7470 group, only pins P20 /IN0
to P23 /IN3 are available.
b2
0: P2 0 to P2 3 are not pulled up.
Note: When one of pins P20/IN 0 to P23 /IN3
is used as an analog input pin
b3
0: P2 4 to P2 7 are not pulled up.
Note: When one of pins P24/IN 4 to P27 /IN7
is used as an analog input pin
(7471 group)
b7
0: A-D conversion interrupt disabled
b7
1: A-D conversion interrupt enabled
b2, b1, b0 • 000: P20 /IN0
• 001: P21 /IN1
• 010: P22 /IN2
• 011: P23 /IN3
• 100: P24 /IN4
• 101: P25 /IN5
• 110: P26 /IN6
• 111: P27 /IN7
Set the value corresponding to the used analog input pin.
Note: In the 7470/7477 group, only pins P20 /
IN0 to P2 3 /IN3 are available.
b3
0: During conversion (A-D conversion is started.)
b4
1: V REF connection (7470/7471 group)
b7
Fix this bit to “0.”
Bit
b0
~
Table 1.14.1 Setting at A-D conversion
Register
1 Port P2 direction register(P2D: Address 00C516)
(7470/7471 group)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-143
HARDWARE
1.14 A-D converter
1.14.2 Pins
The pins used in the A-D converter are described below.
(1) Analog input pin (P20 /IN0 to P27/IN 7) (P20/IN 0 to P23/IN 3 in the 7470/7477 group)
● The analog input pin is an input pin for analog voltage.
● Apply a voltage of VSS (AVSS ) - VREF to this pin.
● This pin is used in common with P20 to P2 7 (P20 to P2 3 in the 7470/7477 group).
When using the A-D converter, select a pin to be used as an analog input pin by bit 2 to bit 0 of
the A-D control register (ADCON: address 00D916 ).
Use the A-D converter in the following condition in the 7470/7471 group.
• When the bit of the Port P2 direction register, which corresponds to the used analog input pin,
is “0” (input mode)
• When the bit of the Pull-up control register, which corresponds to the used analog input pin, is
“0” (no pull-up)
(2) Reference voltage input pin (VREF )
● The reference voltage input pin is an input pin for reference voltage.
● In the 7470/7471 group: Input a voltage of V CC/2 (>2) - VCC [V].
In the 7477/7478 group: Input a voltage of 2 - V CC [V].
(3) Analog power source input pin (AVSS )
● Analog power source input pin is an input pin for GND.
● Apply the same potential as the VSS pin to this pin.
● This pin is dedicated to the 56P6N-A package product of the 7471/7478 group.
1.14.3 Notes on use
When using the A-D converter, take the following points into consideration.
2 The comparator is configured by capacity coupling, so the charge is lost if the clock input oscillation
frequency is low.
● Set f(XIN) at 1 MHz or more during A-D conversion.
● Don’t execute the STP instruction during A-D conversion.
2 Apply a voltage of VCC/2 (>2) - VCC [V] to the reference voltage input pin VREF .
Note that if the reference voltage is lowered below the above valve, the A-D conversion precision will
be degraded.
2 Apply the same potential as that of the VSS pin to the analog power supply voltage input pin AV SS.
The AVSS pin is dedicated to the 56P6N-A package product of the 7471/7478 group.
2 In the 7470/7471 group, clear the bit of the Port P2 direction register which corresponds to the used
analog input pin to “0” (input mode).
2 In the 7470/7471 group, clear the bit of the Pull-up control register which corresponds to the used
analog input pin to “0” (no pull-up).
1-144
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.14 A-D converter
1.14.4 References
2 Definition of A-D conversion precision
The definition of A-D conversion precision is described.
Refer to the definition of A-D conversion precision shown in Figure 1.14.3.
(1) Relative precision
● Zero transition error (V OT)
Deviation of the input voltage, at which A-D conversion output data changes from “0” to “1,” from
the ideal A-D conversion characteristics between 0 and VREF
V OT = (VO –
1
V REF
× 256 )/1LSB [LSB]
2
● Full-scale transition error (V FST )
Deviation of the ideal A-D conversion characteristics between 0 and VREF of the input voltage
when the A-D conversion output data changes from “255” to “254”.
V FST = {(V REF –
3
V REF
×
) – V 254 }/1LSB [LSB]
2
256
● Non-linearity error
Deviation of the real A-D conversion characteristics from the ideal characteristics between V0 and V254
Non-linearity error = {V n – (1LSB × n + V O)}/1LSB [LSB]
● Differential non-linearity error
Deviation of the input voltage required to change output data by “1” from the ideal characteristics
between V0 and V254
Differential non-linearity error = {(Vn+1 – V n) – 1LSB}/1LSB [LSB]
(2) Absolute precision
● Absolute precision
Deviation of the real A-D conversion characteristic from the ideal characteristics between 0 and
V REF .
Absolute precision = {V n – 1LSB × (n +
1
)}/1LSB [LSB]
2
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-145
HARDWARE
1.14 A-D converter
Output data
Full-scale transition error
(VFST)
255
3
2 LSB
254
Differential non-linearity error
1LSB at relative accuracy
n+1
n
Ideal A-D conversion characteristics
between 0 and V REF
Actual A-D conversion characteristics
Non-linearity error
Absolute accuracy
1LSB at absolute
accuracy
1
2 LSB
Ideal A-D conversion
characteristics between
V0 and V254
Zero transition error (V OT)
1
0
V0
V1
Vn
Vn+1
V254
VREF
Analog voltage
Fig. 1.14.3 Definition of A-D conversion precision
V n: Analog input voltage when output data changes from “n” to “n + 1” (n = 0 – 254).
V 254 – V O
(V) → 1LSB at relative precision
254
V REF
(V) → 1LSB at absolute precision
• 1LSB =
256
• 1LSB =
1-146
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.14 A-D converter
1.14.5 Related registers
(1) A-D conversion register (AD: Address 00DA16)
The A-D conversion register stores A-D conversion results. This register is a read-only type.
Figure 1.14.4 shows a structure of the A-D conversion register.
A-D conversion register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
A-D conversion register (AD) [Address 00DA 16]
B
Function
0 This is a read-only register to store A-D
to conversion results.
7
At reset
?
R W
✕
Fig. 1.14.4 Structure of A-D conversion register
(2) A-D control register (ADCON: Address 00D916 )
The A-D control register consists of bits that exerts various types of control over the A-D converter.
Figure 1.14.5 shows a structure of the A-D control register.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-147
HARDWARE
1.14 A-D converter
A-D control register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0
A-D control register (ADCON) [Address 00D916]
B
0
Name
A-D input selection
bits
1
2
3
4
A-D conversion end
bit
(Note 2)
VREF connection
selection bit
Function
At reset
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0 : P2 0/IN0
1 : P2 1/IN1
0 : P2 2/IN2
1 : P2 3/IN3
0 : P2 4/IN4
1 : P2 5/IN5
0 : P2 6/IN6
1 : P2 7/IN7
0
0
(Note 1)
0 : Under conversion
1 : End conversion
0 : The VREF pin is
separated from the
comparison voltage
✽The 7477/7478 group is not
generator.
provided with this bit.
1 : The VREF pin is
This bit is undefined at
connected to
reset.
comparison voltage
generator.
Nothing is allocated for these bits.
5, 6 These are write disabled bits and are
undefined at reading.
7
R W
b2 b1 b0
Fix this bit to “0.”
0
1
0
?
? ✕
0
0 0
Notes 1: Since the 7470/7477 group is not provided with pins
P24–P27, do not set.
2: •A-D conversion is started by setting bit 3 to “0.”
•Writing “0” into bit 3 is valid. Even if “1” is written into
bit 3, this bit is not set to “1.” Accordingly, when writing a
value into the A-D control register without affecting bit 3,
set bit 3 to “1.”
Fig. 1.14.5 Structure of A-D control register
Each bit of the A-D control register is described below.
2 Analog input pin selection bit (Bit 2 to 0)
These bits select an analog input pin.
Pins that are not used as analog input pins of P2 function as programmable I/O ports (input ports
in the 7477/7478 group).
2 A-D conversion end bit (Bit 3)
This bit indicates the operation state of the A-D converter.
This bit is cleared to “0” during A-D conversion and set to “1” upon termination of A-D conversion.
A-D conversion is started by clearing this bit to “0.” (At the time when the bit is cleared to “0” during
A-D conversion, A-D conversion is restarted.)
2 V REF connect selection bit (Bit 4) (The 7477/7478 group is not provided with this bit.)
This bit connects the V REF pin to a ladder resistor.
When using the A-D converter, be sure to set this bit to “1.”
When the A-D converter is not used, power consumption can be reduced by clearing this bit to “0.”
1-148
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.15 Reset
1.15 Reset
The microcomputer is reset by applying the “L” level to the RESET pin for 2 µs or more when the power
source voltage is within the standard value range. After that, when the “H” level is applied to the RESET
pin, the reset state of the microcomputer is released, so that the program is run starting with the reset
vector address.
1.15.1 Operation description
Figure 1.15.1 shows an internal processing sequence after reset release.
VCC
XIN
Internal clock φ
2 µs or more
RESET
32768 counts of X IN pin input signal
Internal reset
Address bus
FFFE16 FFFF 16 AL,AH
Data bus
AL
AH
SYNC
Internal clock φ : CPU reference clock frequency
after reset release)
= f(XIN)/2 (ordinary mode immediately
AH, AL : Content of reset vector address
SYNC : CPU operation code fetch cycle
(This is a internal signal, so that it cannot be observed from the external unit.)
: Undefined
Fig. 1.15.1 Internal processing sequence after reset release
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-149
HARDWARE
1.15 Reset
When the “H” level is applied to the RESET pin at the reset state, the contents of timer 3 and timer 4 and
the count source are automatically set as shown in Table 1.15.1, so that the internal reset state is
released by an overflow of timer 4.
Table 1.15.1 Timer 3 and 4 at reset
Item
Timer 3
Setting value
FF 16
count source
f(XIN)/16
Timer 4
0716
overflow of
timer 3
After the “H” level is applied to the RESET pin, only the main clock oscillates regardless of the oscillation
state precedent to the reset state, so that the microcomputer starts to operate in the ordinary mode. The
X CIN pin and the XCOUT pin become P50 and P51, respectively.
After the reset state is released, the microcomputer runs the program starting with the high-order address
corresponding to the contents of address FFFF16 and the low-order address corresponding to the contents
of address FFFE16 .
Note: The 7470/7477 group is not provided with the XCIN and X COUT pins.
1-150
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.15 Reset
1.15.2 Internal status immediately after reset release
Figure 1.15.2 shows an internal register status immediately after reset release.
Address
(1)
Port P0 direction register (P0D)
(C1 16)•••
0016
(2)
Port P1 direction register (P1D)
(C3 16)•••
0016
Port P2 direction register (P2D)
(C5 16)•••
0016
(3)
(The 7477/7478 group is not provided.)
(4)
Port P4 direction register (P4D)
(C9 16)•••
(5)
Port P0 pull-up control register
(D0 16)•••
Port P1–P5 pull-up control register
(D1 16)•••
(6)
0 0 0 0
0016
0
(In the 7470/7477 group, port P1–P4 pull-up control register)
0 0 0 0 0
(7)
Edge polarity selection register (EG)
(D4 16)•••
(8)
A-D control register (ADCON)
(D9 16)•••
(9)
Serial I/O mode register (SM)
(DC 16)•••
0016
(E116)•••
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(E216)•••
0016
(E316)•••
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
(13) Timer 3 (T3)
(F216)•••
FF16
(14) Timer 4 (T4)
(F316)•••
0716
(13) Timer FF register (TF)
(F716)•••
(14) Timer 12 mode register (T12M)
(F816)•••
0016
(15) Timer 34 mode register (T34M)
(F916)•••
0016
(16) Timer mode register 2 (TM2)
(FA 16)•••
0 0
(17) CPU mode register (CPUM)
(FB 16)•••
0 0 0 0
(18) Interrupt request register 1 (IR1)
(FC 16)•••
0 0 0
(19) Interrupt request register 2 (IR2)
(FD 16)•••
(20) Interrupt control register 1 (IE1)
(FE 16)•••
(21) Interrupt control register 2 (IE2)
(FF16)•••
(The 7477/7478 group is not provided.)
(10) Serial I/O status register (SIOSTS)
(The 7470/7471 group is not provided.)
(11) Serial I/O control register (SIOCON)
0 0 0 0 0 0
0
(The 7470/7471 group is not provided.)
(12) UART control register (UARTCON)
(The 7470/7471 group is not provided.)
0 1 0 0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0
(22) Program counter (PC H)
Contents of address FFFF 16
(PCL)
Contents of address FFFE 16
(23) Processor status register (PS)
1
: The contents are undefined at reset release.
Note : The contents of all other registers and RAM are undefined at reset, so set their initial valves.
The bits are different depending on the product. Refer to the structure of each register.
Fig. 1.15.2 Internal status immediately after reset release
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-151
HARDWARE
1.15 Reset
1.15.3 Notes on use
1. The timer continues to perform a count operation after reset release.
2. After the reset state is released, the microcomputer runs the program starting with the high-order
address corresponding to the contents of address FFFF16 and the low-order address corresponding to
the contents of address FFFE16 .
3. After the “H” level is applied to the RESET pin, only the main clock oscillates regardless of the
oscillation state precedent to the reset state, so that the microcomputer starts to operate in the
ordinary mode. The XCIN pin and the X COUT pin become P5 0 and P51 , respectively.
(The 7470/7477 group is not provided with the XCIN and XCOUT pins.)
4. When the STP instruction is executed in the ordinary mode, I/O ports are held in the state just
precedent to a stop of system clock oscillation. After that, the I/O ports are put into the input mode
after a reset operation of the microcomputer is performed, so that they go to the high-impedance state.
1-152
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.16 Oscillation circuit
1.16 Oscillation circuit
The 7470/7471/7477/7478 group has the following circuits to obtain clocks required for operations.
• 7470/7477 group: Main clock oscillation circuit
• 7471/7478 group: Main clock oscillation circuit and sub-clock oscillation circuit
1.16.1 Oscillation circuit
(1) Clock generating circuit
The clock generating circuit controls the oscillation of the oscillation circuit and a generated clock
(internal clock φ) is supplied to the CPU and peripheral units.
Figure 1.16.1 shows a clock generating circuit block diagram.
Interrupt disable flag I
Interrupt request
Reset
Internal system clock selection bit (CM 7)
Main clock (X IN–XOUT) stop bit (CM 6)
S
STP instruction
Q
R
XIN
XCIN
XOUT
S
WIT instruction
Reset
1/2
R
S
STP
instruction
Q
R
XCOUT
Q
CNTR1
Timer 1 or timer 2
overflow signal
1/2
Internal system clock
selection bit (CM 7)
Timer 3 count
source
selection bits
1/8
T34M1
T34M2
Internal clock φ
Timer 3 count stop bit
(T34M0)
Timer 3
Timer 4 count stop bit
(T34M 3)
Timer 4 count source selection bits
T34M4
T34M5
.
Timer 4
Note : The 7470/7477 group is not provided with pins XCIN and XCOUT.
Fig. 1.16.1 Clock generating circuit block diagram
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-153
HARDWARE
1.16 Oscillation circuit
This oscillation circuit can stop and start oscillation.
• XIN-X OUT oscillation circuit ......................... Main clock f(XIN)
• X CIN -XCOUT oscillation circuit .................... Sub-clock f(XCIN)
There are two oscillation circuits (the main clock only in the 7470/7477 group) as shown above. The
clock obtained by dividing a signal input to the clock input pin X IN or XCIN becomes an internal clock
φ+ which is used as a reference for operations.
+: The internal clock φ varies with the operation modes of the microcomputer.
• Ordinary mode ................ Signal input to the XIN pin divided by 2
• Low-speed mode ............ Signal input to the XCIN pin divided by 2
(2) Oscillation circuit using a ceramic resonator or a crystal oscillator
An oscillation circuit can be formed by connecting a ceramic resonator or a crystal oscillator between
the X IN pin and the XOUT pin and between the X CIN pin and the XCOUT pin.
For a circuit example, refer to “Chapter 2 Application, 2.7 Oscillation Circuit.”
Please ask the oscillator maker for information on circuit constants and then set the value recommended
by the maker.
(3) External clock input circuit
It is also possible to supply a clock to the oscillation circuit from the outside.
As an external clock to be input to the XIN and X CIN pins, use a pulse signal with a duty ratio of 50 %.
At this time, make the X OUT and XCOUT pins open.
For a circuit example, refer to “Chapter 2 Application, 2.7 Oscillation Circuit.”
Note: Because the 7470/7477 group is not provided with the XCIN and XCOUT pins, the sub-clock f(XCIN)
is not available.
1-154
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.16 Oscillation circuit
1.16.2 Sub-clock oscillation circuit
In the 7471/7478 group, the sub-clock f(XCIN) is available when the P5 0/XCIN pin and the P51/XCOUT pin
are used as the X CIN pin and the X COUT pin.
The power supplied to the sub-clock oscillation circuit is given through a voltage reduction regulator to
reduce power dissipation in the sub-clock mode. That is, power is reduced by reducing the voltage applied
to the VCC pin by the voltage reduction regulator. The supply voltage to this oscillation circuit can be set
to one of the 2 stages of high power mode and low power mode in bit 5 of the CPU mode register.
Notes 1: When using the sub-clock, set f(XCIN) < 50 kHz < f(X IN)/3.
2: When using the sub-clock f(XCIN) in the 7471/7478 group, set the P50-P5 3 pull-up control bit (bit
6) of the P1-P5 pull-up control register to “0” and disconnect the pull-up transistor of the P50 /XCIN
pin and P51 /XCOUT pin.
3: When using the sub-clock as the internal clock φ, use it in one of the following states.
● Fix the X COUT drive capacity to the high power mode (set the X COUT drive capacity selection
bit of the CPU mode register to “1”).
● When fixing the X COUT drive capacity to the Low power mode (set the XCOUT drive capacity
selection bit of the CPU mode register to “0”), lower the value of the resistor Rd+ in the subclock oscillation circuit to a level at which the oscillation of f(X CIN) does not stop.
+ “Resistor Rd”: Refer to the circuit example in “Chapter 2 Application, 2.7 Oscillation circuit.”
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-155
HARDWARE
1.16 Oscillation circuit
1.16.3 Oscillation operation
(1) Oscillation operation
The microcomputer is put into the ordinary mode at reset release. At this time, only the main clock
oscillates and the P5 0/XCIN pin and the P51 /XCOUT pin function as input ports P5 0 and P51 .
Notes 1: The 7470/7477 group is not provided with XCIN and XCOUT pins.
2: When using the sub-clock f(XCIN) in the 7471/7478 group, set the P50 -P53 pull-up control bit
(bit 6) of the P1-P5 pull-up control register to “0” and disconnect the pull-up transistor of the
P50 /XCIN pin and P5 1/X COUT pin.
2 Ordinary mode
The clock resulting from dividing a signal input to the XIN pin by 2 becomes internal clock φ.
Changing the mode to the low-speed mode (7471/7478 group)
Execute the following procedure.
1 Set the P50 , P51/X CIN, XCOUT selection bit (bit 4) of the CPU mode register to “1” (XCIN, X COUT).
2 Set the XCOUT drive capacity selection bit (bit 5) of the CPU mode register to “1” (High power).
3 Generate oscillation stabilizing wait time of f(X CIN) by software.
4 Set the system clock selection bit (bit 7) of the CPU mode register to “1” f(XCIN). At that time,
set the XCOUT drive capacity selection bit to “0” (low power) as required.
2 Low-speed mode (7471/7478 group)
The clock resulting from dividing a signal input to the XCIN pin by 2 becomes internal clock φ.
In the low-speed mode, a low power dissipation operation can be attained by setting the main clock
(XIN-XOUT ) stop bit (bit 6) of the CPU mode register to “1.”
Changing the mode to the ordinary mode
Execute the following procedure.
1 Clear the main clock (X IN-XOUT) stop bit (bit 6) of the CPU mode register to “0” (oscillate).
2 Generate oscillation stabilizing wait time of f(X IN) by software.
3 Clear the system clock selection bit (bit 7) of the CPU mode register to “0” f(XIN).
Notes 1: Switch between the ordinary mode and the low-speed mode after the oscillation of the main clock
and the sub-clock becomes stable. For the oscillation stablizing time, ask the oscillator maker for
information.
2: Use the low-speed mode in one of the following states.
● Fix the X COUT drive capacity to the high power mode (set the X COUT drive capacity selection
bit of the CPU mode register to “1”).
● When fixing the X COUT drive capacity to the Low power mode (clear the XCOUT drive capacity
selection bit of the CPU mode register to “0”), lower the value of the resistor Rd+ in the subclock oscillation circuit to a level at which the oscillation of f(X CIN) does not stop.
+ Resister Rd: Refer to a example of circuit in “chapter 2 application, 2.7 Oscillation circuit.”
3: When using the sub-clock especially, it takes a long time until the oscillation becomes stable.
When the ordinary mode is changed to the stop mode while the sub-clock is in the oscillation
state and then the ordinary mode is restored from the stop mode, the oscillation of the sub-clock
is not stabilized even if the main clock becomes stable and the CPU is restored.
1-156
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.16 Oscillation circuit
(2) Oscillation operation in the stop mode
After the stop mode is provided by execution the STP instruction, all oscillation stops. After that,
when the previous mode is restored from the stop mode by inputting the reset signal or generating
a restoration interrupt request, the oscillation starts.
For the details of the stop mode, refer to “1.17.1 Stop mode.”
(3) Oscillation operation in the wait mode
When the wait mode is provided by execution the WIT instruction, the internal clock φ supplied to the
CPU stops.
When the previous mode is restored from the wait mode by inputting the reset signal or generating
an interrupt request, the supply of internal clock φ to the CPU starts.
For the details of the wait mode, refer to “1.17.2 Wait mode.”
(4) State transitions of internal clock
Refer to “1.18 State transitions.”
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-157
HARDWARE
1.16 Oscillation circuit
1.16.4 Oscillation stabilizing time
In the oscillation circuit using a ceramic resonator or a crystal oscillator, the oscillation becomes unstable
for a certain period at a start of oscillation of the oscillator. The time required for stabilization of oscillation
is called oscillation stabilizing time.
A proper oscillation stabilizing wait time fit for the used oscillation circuit is required. For the oscillation
stabilizing time, ask the oscillator maker for information.
(1) Oscillation stabilizing wait time at power on
In the 7470/7471/7477/7478 group, the oscillation stabilizing wait time for 32768 counts of the XIN
pin input signal is automatically generated in the period from power on to reset release.
Figure 1.16.2 shows a oscillation stabilizing wait time after power on.
2.7V
✽
VCC
2 µs or more
RESET
XIN
Oscillation stabilizing wait time
32768 counts of X IN pin input signal
Internal reset
Release internal reset state
✽ : At f(X IN) = (2.2 V CC – 2) MHz
Fig. 1.16.2 Oscillation stabilizing wait time after power on
(2) Oscillation stabilizing wait time at recovery from stop mode
In the stop mode, oscillation stops. When the previous mode is restored from the stop mode by
inputting a reset signal or generating an interrupt, the oscillation stabilizing wait time for 32768
counts of the X IN pin input signal or the XCIN pin input signal is automatically generated in the same
way as the power on time.
● At recovery by reset, f(XIN) becomes a count source that generates oscillation stabilizing wait time.
● At recovery by interrupt, the count source of timer 3 set immediately before execution of the STP
instruction becomes a count source that generates oscillation stabilizing wait time. Note that when
f(XIN) is the system clock, the oscillation of the f(X CIN) side may not be stabilized after the lapse
of this oscillation stabilizing wait time.
For the details of the stop mode, refer to “1.17.1 Stop mode.”
Note: In the 7470/7477 group, f(X CIN) is not available.
1-158
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.16 Oscillation circuit
1.16.5 Notes on use
1. When inputting the external clock to the XIN pin or the X CIN pin, use a pulse signal with a duty ratio
of 50 % as an input signal. At this time, make the X OUT pin and the X COUT pin open.
Refer to a example of circuit in “Chapter 2 application, 2.7 Oscillation circuit.”
2. When using the sub-clock f(X CIN) in the 7471/7478 group, set f(XCIN) < 50 kHz < f(X IN)/3.
3. In the 7471/7478 group, switch between the ordinary mode and the low-speed mode after the oscillation
of the main clock and the sub-clock becomes stable. For the oscillation stabilizing time, ask the
oscillator maker for information.
4. Use the low-speed mode in one of the following states.
• Fix the X COUT drive capacity to the high power mode (Set the XCOUT drive capacity selection bit
of the CPU mode register to “1”).
• When fixing the XCOUT drive capacity to the Low-power mode (clear the XCOUT drive capacity
selection bit of the CPU mode register to “0”), lower the value of the resistor Rd+ in the sub-clock
oscillation circuit to a level at which the oscillation of f(XCIN) does not stop.
+ Resister Rd: Refer to a example of circuit in “Chapter 2 application, 2.7 Oscillation circuit.”
5. When using the sub-clock f(XCIN) in the 7471/7478 group, it takes a long time until the oscillation
becomes stable.
When the ordinary mode is changed to the stop mode while the sub-clock is in the oscillation state and
then the ordinary mode is recovered from the stop mode, the oscillation of the sub-clock is not stabilized
even if the main clock becomes stable and the CPU is restored.
Note: In the 7470/7477 group, the sub-clock f(XCIN) is not available because neither XCIN pin nor X COUT
pin is provided.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-159
HARDWARE
1.17 Low-power dissipation function
1.17 Low-power dissipation function
The 7470/7471/7477/7478 group is provided with a function to put the CPU into a wait state with low-power
dissipation by stopping the CPU operation by softoware.
The low-power dissipation function has the following 2 modes.
● Stop mode by a STP instruction
● Wait mode by a WIT instruction
Figure 1.17.1 shows the operation states of the microcomputer at low-power dissipation and Figure 1.17.2
shows a state transition.
STP mode
WIT mode
Oscillation stops Oscillation is operating
Stop
Stop
A-D converter
Stop
Operating
Serial I/O
Note : When using an
external clock,
timer and serial
I/O are operating.
CPU
Peripheral device
Timer
External interrupt
Operating
Operating
Fig. 1.17.1 Operation states of the microcomputer at low-power dissipation
1-160
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.17 Low-power dissipation function
STP mode
Reset
WIT mode
Interrupt
Reset
Only RAM is held and the
other registers are reset.
Registers except timers
3, 4 and RAM are held.
Oscillation stabilizing wait time :
f(XIN )/16 is counted
Reset release
(Program execution
from reset vector)
Interrupt
Registers and RAM are
held.
Oscillation stabilizing wait time:
32768 counts of the specified
count source are counted
Interrupt processing
No oscillation stabilizing wait time
Proceed to the next
address of the STP or
WIT instruction
(Program is continued)
Fig. 1.17.2 State transition at low-power dissipation
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-161
HARDWARE
1.17 Low-power dissipation function
1.17.1 Stop mode
To switch to the stop mode, execute the STP instruction. In the stop mode, the oscillation of both f(XIN)
and f(XCIN ) stops and the internal clock φ stops.
Accordingly, the CPU stops and the peripheral units also stop. This leads to a reduction of power dissipation.
Note: In the 7470/7477 group, the f(XCIN) is not available.
(1) State of stop mode
Table 1.17.1 shows a state of stop mode.
Note: When the STP instruction is executed, “FF 16” and “07 16 ” are automatically set in timer 3 and
timer 4, respectively.
Table 1.17.1 State of stop mode
Item
State of stop mode
Oscillation
Stop
CPU
Stop
State at execution STP
I/O port P0 to P5
instruction is held.
When internal count source selected : Stop
Timer
When external count source selected : Operate
Internal clock mode: Stop
Serial I/O
External clock mode: Operate
Held
RAM
Held (except timer3, timer4)
SFR
Held
CPU register +
+ CPU register :
The following 6 registers are incorporated in the
CPU.
• Accumulator
• Index register X
• Index register Y
• Stack pointer
• Program counter
• Processor status register
1-162
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.17 Low-power dissipation function
(2) Releasion of stop mode
The stop mode is released by inputting a reset signal or generating an interrupt request. There is a
difference in restore processing from the stop mode between the use of reset input and the use of
interrupt.
2 Recovery by reset input
The microcomputer is reset by applying the "L" level to the RESET pin for 2 m s or more in the stop
mode, thereby releasing the stop mode.
After the stop mode is released, oscillator starts. (At this time, the inside is in the reset state.)
The reset state is released after 32768 counts of the X IN pin input after the “H” level is applied to
the RESET pin.
At a start of oscillation of the oscillator, the oscillation is unstable. It takes time before stabilization
of oscillation (oscillation stabilizing time). The oscillation stabilizing wait time is secured by the time
for holding this internal reset state.
For the details of the reset, Refer to “1.15 Reset.”
Note: When the stop mode is released, the contents of the RAM before reset are held. However,
the contents of the CPU register and the SFR cannot be held but are reset.
Figure 1.17.3 shows the oscillation stabilizing wait time at recovery from stop mode by reset input.
Stop mode
VCC
2 µs or more Oscillation stabilizing wait time : 32768 counts of X IN pin input signal
RESET
XIN
(Note)
Undefined
XIN: in high-impedance state
XOUT: “H”
Execute STP instruction
Recovered by reset input
Note: No waveform may be input to XIN (in low-speed mode).
Fig. 1.17.3 oscillation stabilizing wait time at recovery from stop mode by reset input
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-163
HARDWARE
1.17 Low-power dissipation function
2 Recovery by interrupt
When an interrupt request is generated in the stop mode, this stop mode is released and oscillation
is started. The interrupt sources that are available for recovery are shown below.
●
●
●
●
●
INT0 , INT1
CNTR0 , CNTR1
Serial I/O at using external clock
Timer (timer 1, timer 2) at using external clock
Key input (key on wake up)
However, when the above interrupt sources are used for recovery from the stop mode, perform the
following setting and then execute the STP instruction to permit an interrupt to be used.
[Register setting]
1 Clear the interrupt enable bit of timer 3 and timer 4 to “0.” (Disabled)
2 Set the count stop bit of timer 3 and timer 4 to “1.” (Stop)
3 Select a count source of timer 3 in consideration of the oscillation stabilizing time of the
oscillator.
Note: Re-set the previous count source at recovery.
4 Clear the interrupt request bit of the interrupt source to be used for recovery to “0.”
5 Set the interrupt enable bit of the interrupt source to be used for recovery to “1.”(Enabled)
6 Clear the count stop bit of timer 3 and timer 4 to “0.” (Count starts)
7 When using the sub-clock, set the XCOUT drive capacity to high power. (Refer to “1.16.2 Subclock oscillation circuit.”)
8 Clear the interrupt disable flag I to “0.” (Enabled)
Note: In the stop mode, A-D conversion operation stops. Accordingly, execute the STP instruction
after termination of the A-D conversion.
For the details of the Interrupt, refer to “1.11 Interrupts.”
At a start of oscillation of the oscillator, the oscillation is unstable. It takes time before stabilization
of oscillation (oscillation stabilizing time). At recovery by interrupt, the waiting time for the supply
of internal clock φ to the CPU by timer 3 and timer 4 +1 is automatically generated +2. The oscillation
stabilizing time of the system clock side is secured by this waiting time.
Figure 1.17.4 shows an example of restoration sequence from the stop mode by the INT0 interrupt.
+1: When the STP instruction is executed, “FF 16 ” and “07 16” are automatically set in the counter
and latch of timer 3 and the counter and latch of timer 4, respectively.
+2: The count source is supplied to timer 3 immediately after a start of oscillation, thereby starting
a count operation. The supply of internal clock φ to the CPU is started when timer 4 overflows.
1-164
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.17 Low-power dissipation function
●When recovering from stop mode by using INT 0 interrupt (rising edge selected)
Stop mode
XIN or XCIN
Oscillation stabilizing wait time
2048 counts of timer 3
count source (Note)
Undefined
XIN, XCIN ; in high-impedance stat
XOUT ; “H”
INT 0 pin
Count down
“FF16 ”
Timer 3
“0716 ”
Timer 4
INT 0 interrupt
request bit
Peripheral device
Operating
CPU
Operating
Stop
Operating
Stop
•STP instruction •INT0 interrupt
signal input
execution
(INT0 interrupt
request occurs)
•Oscillation start
•Timer 3 count start
Operating
•Timer 4 overflow
•Start supplying internal
clock φ to CPU
•Accept INT 0 interrupt
request
Note: The count source is a count source of timer 3 before execution of the STP instruction.
Fig. 1.17.4 Example of recovery sequence from stop mode by INT0 interrupt
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-165
HARDWARE
1.17 Low-power dissipation function
1.17.2 Wait mode
To switch to the wait mode, execute the WIT instruction. In the wait mode, oscillation is continued but the
internal clock φ stops. Accordingly, the CPU stops but the peripheral units operate since oscillation is
continued.
(1) State of wait mode
Table 1.17.2 shows a state of wait mode.
Table 1.17.2 State of wait mode
Item
State of wait mode
Oscillation
Operate
CPU
Stop
State at execution WIT instrucI/O port P0 to P5
tion is held.
Timer
Operate
Serial I/O
Operate
RAM
Held
SFR
Held
CPU register+
Held
+ CPU register :
The following 6 registers are incorporated in the
CPU.
• Accumulator
• Index register X
• Index register Y
• Stack pointer
• Program counter
• Processor status register
1-166
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.17 Low-power dissipation function
(2) Releasion of wait mode
The wait mode is released by inputting a reset signal or generating an interrupt request. There is a
difference in restore processing from the wait mode between the use of reset input and the use of
interrupt.
2 Recovery by reset input
The microcomputer is reset by applying the “L” level to the RESET pin for 2 ms or more in the wait
mode, thereby releasing the wait mode.
After the wait mode is released by inputting the reset signal, the supply of internal clock φ to the
CPU is started.
The reset state is released after 32768 counts of the X IN pin input signal after the “H” level is
applied to the RESET pin.
For the details of the reset, refer to “1.15 Reset.”
Note: When the wait mode is released, the contents of the RAM before reset are held. However,
the contents of the CPU register and the SFR cannot be held but are reset.
Figure 1.17.5 shows the reset input time.
Wait mode
VCC
2 µs or more Oscillation stabilizing wait time : 32768 counts of XIN pin input signal
RESET
XIN
(Note)
Execute WIT instruction
Recovered by reset input
Note: No waveform may be input to XIN (in low-speed mode).
Fig. 1.17.5 Reset input time
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-167
HARDWARE
1.17 Low-power dissipation function
2 Recovery by interrupt
In the wait mode, oscillation is continued. Accordingly, as soon as the wait mode is released, an
instruction is executed.
When an interrupt request is generated in the wait mode, this wait mode is released and the supply
of internal clock φ to the CPU is started. At the same time, the interrupt request used for recovery
is accepted, so that the interrupt processing routine is executed.
The interrupt sources that are available for recovery are shown below.
●
●
●
●
●
●
INT0 , INT1
CNTR0 , CNTR1
Serial I/O
A-D conversion
Timer 1 to timer 4
Key input (key on wake up)
However, when the above interrupt sources are used for recovery from the wait mode, perform the
following setting and then execute the WIT instruction to permit an interrupt to be used.
[Register setting]
1 Clear the interrupt request bit of the interrupt source to be used for recovery to “0.”(No request)
2 Set the interrupt enable bit of the interrupt source to be used for recovery to “1.”(Enabled)
3 Clear the interrupt disable flag I to “0.” (Enabled)
For the details of the Interrupt, refer to “1.11 Interrupts.”
1-168
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.17 Low-power dissipation function
1.17.3 Notes on use
[Notes on use of the stop mode]
2 Clock after recovery
After recovery from the stop mode by interrupt, the contents of the CPU mode register before
execution of the STP instruction are held. Accordingly, if both f(XIN) and f(X CIN) were oscillating
before execution of the STP instruction, the oscillation of both f(X IN) and f(X CIN) is restarted after
recovery by interrupt.
In the above case, if f(XIN) is set as the system clock, the oscillation stabilizing wait time for 32768
counts of the X IN pin input signal is secured at recovery from the stop mode.
Note that the f(X CIN) clock may not be stabilized even after the lapse of the f(XIN) oscillation
stabilizing wait time.
Note: In the 7470/7477 group, the f(XCIN) is not available.
2 Interrupt processing after recovery
After recovery from the stop mode, the interrupt request bit of timer 3 and timer 4 is “1.” Clear
it to “0” if necessary. The interrupt request bit of timer 1 and timer 2 may also be set to “1.” Clear
it to “0” as required.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-169
HARDWARE
1.17 Low-power dissipation function
1.17.4 Related register
(1) CPU mode register (Address 00FB16 )
The CPU mode register consists of a stack page selection bit+1 and system clock control bits +2.
+1: In series having a RAM capacity of 192 bytes or less, this bit is not used because no RAM is
located on page 1. (Be sure to set this bit to “0.”)
+2: In the 7470/7477 group, which is not provided with a sub-clock generating circuit, this bit is not
used. (Be sure to set this bit to “0.”)
Figure 1.17.6 shows a structure of CPU mode register.
CPU mode register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 0
CPU mode register (CPUM) [Address 00FB16]
B
Name
0, 1 Fix these bits to “0.”
Function
At reset R W
0
0: In page 0 area
1: In page 1 area
(Note 1)
2
Stack page selection
bit
3
Nothing is allocated for this bit. This is write
enabled bit and is undefined at reading.
?
4
P50, P5 1/XCIN,XCOUT
selection bit
0: P50, P5 1
1: XCIN , XCOUT (Note 2)
0
5
XCOUT drive capacity
selection bit
0: Low
1: High
0
0
? ✕
(Note 2)
6 Main clock (X IN–XOUT) 0: Oscillates
stop bit
1: Stops
0
(Note 2)
7
Internal system clock
selection bit
0: XIN–XOUT selected
(Ordinary mode)
1: XCIN –XCOUT selected
(Low speed mode)
(Note 2)
0
Notes 1: In the products having a RAM capacity of 192 bytes or
less, set this bit to “0.”
2: Since the 7470/7477 group is not provided with the
sub-clock generating circuit, f(XCIN) cannot be used.
Fix these bits to “0.”
Fig. 1.17.6 Structure of CPU mode register
1-170
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.18 State transitions
1.18 State transitions
The operation modes of the 7470/7471/7477/7478 group are classified as follows.
●
●
●
●
●
●
Reset
Oridinary mode
Low-speed mode (7471/7478 group)
Sub-clock mode (7471/7478 group)
Stop mode
Wait mode
Figure 1.18.1 shows a state transitions.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-171
HARDWARE
1.18 State transitions
Reset
Wait mode
State E
Internal clock φ: Stopped
f(XIN): Oscillating
f(XCIN): Stopped
Stop mode
Ordinary mode
State F
WIT
State A STP
b7 b6 b5 b4
instruction
instruction
CPUM 0 0 0 0
Internal clock φ: Stopped
f(XIN): Stopped
Internal clock φ: f(XIN)/2
Interrupt
WIT
instruction
Internal clock φ: Stopped
f(XIN): Oscillating
f(XCIN): Oscillating
Interrupt
f(XIN): Oscillating
f(XCIN ): Stopped
f(XIN): Oscillating
f(XCIN): Oscillating
f(XCIN): Stopped
Interrupt (Note 1)
(Note 3)
Low-speed mode
WIT
(Note 4)
State C
instruction
b7 b6 b5 b4
CPUM 1 0 — 1
f(XIN): Oscillating
f(XCIN): Oscillating
Interrupt (Note 1)
Ordinary mode
State B STP
b7 b6 b5 b4
instruction
CPUM 0 0 — 1
Internal clock φ: Stopped
f(XIN): Stopped
Internal clock φ: f(XIN)/2
(Note 2)
Internal clock φ: Stopped
f(XCIN): Stopped
STP
instruction
Internal clock φ: Stopped
f(XIN): Stopped
f(XCIN): Stopped
Internal clock φ: f(XCIN)/2
Interrupt
f(XIN): Oscillating
f(XCIN): Oscillating
Interrupt (Note 1)
(Note 3)
Sub-clock mode
State G
Internal clock φ: Stopped
Low-speed mode
WIT
(Note 4)
State D
b7 b6 b5 b4
instruction
CPUM 1 1 — 1
f(XIN): Stopped
f(XCIN): Oscillating
STP
instruction
Internal clock φ: Stopped
f(XIN): Stopped
f(XCIN): Stopped
Internal clock φ: f(XCIN)/2
Interrupt
f(XIN): Stopped
f(XCIN): Oscillating
Interrupt (Note 1)
Fig. 1.18.1 State transitions
1-172
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.18 State transitions
Notes 1: When changing from the stop mode to another mode, oscillation stabilizing wait time is generated
automatically by connecting timer 3 and timer 4.
2: In the 7471/7478 group, where oscillating the stopped clock and switching the system clock, it
is necessary to wait at software until oscillation is stabilized. At this time, set the bit 5 of the CPU
mode register to “1” and set the XCOUT drive capacity to the high power mode. After the oscillation of sub-clock f(XCIN) becomes stable, clear the bit to “0” (low power mode) as required.
3: In the 7471/7478 group, when returning from the low-speed mode to the ordinary mode, use the
main clock f(XIN) as a count source of the internal clock φ (state B). After that, clear bit 4 of the
CPU mode register to “0” to stop the oscillation of f(XCIN) if necessary.
4: When using the low-speed mode in the 7471/7478 group, use it in one of the following states.
● Fix the X COUT drive capacity to the high power mode (set the X COUT drive capacity selection bit
of the CPU register to “1.”)
● When fixing the X COUT drive capacity to the low power mode (clear the XCOUT drive capacity
selection bit of the CPU mode register to “0”), lower the value of the resistor Rd+ in the subclock oscillation circuit to a level at which the oscillation of f(XCIN ) does not stop.
+ “Resistor Rd”: Refer to the circuit example in “Chapter 2 Application, 2.7 Oscillation circuit.”
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-173
HARDWARE
1.18 State transitions
2 Reset → Ordinary mode (State A)
Immediately after reset, the main clock divided by 2 (f(XIN)/2) is selected as an internal clock φ and
the I/O pins XCIN and XCOUT of the sub-clock f(XCIN) become ordinary ports. “FF16 ” and “07 16” are
set in timer 3 and timer 4 respectively, and also the main clock divided by 16 (f(XIN)/16) is selected
as a count source of timer 3 and the overflow signal of timer 3 is selected as a count source of
timer 4. Then a down-count is started.
When timer 4 overflows, the internal reset is released and the program starts from the address
specified by reset vector.
2 Low-speed mode (Stae C and state D)
To the low-speed mode (state C and state D) using the sub-clock divided by 2 (f(XCIN )/2) as an
internal clock φ, a transition is made by way of the ordinary mode (state A) → state B ( → state
C).
In the 7470/7477 group, which is not provided with a sub-clock oscillation circuit, this mode is not
provided.
2 Wait mode (State E)
In this mode, all the states of registers, I/O ports and internal RAMs are held. The internal clock
φ stops at “H” but the oscillator does not stop.
From any of state A, state B, state C and state D, a return is made to the wait mode by executing
the WIT instruction. When a return is made from the state D to the wait mode, the sub-clock mode
in which only the timer function operates is provided. (In the 7470/7477 group, which is not
provided with a sub-clock oscillation circuit, the sub-clock mode is not provided.)
Refer to “1.17.2 Wait mode.”
2 Stop mode (State F)
In this mode, all the states of registers, I/O ports and internal RAMs except timer 3 and timer 4
are held and the oscillation of both main sub-clock is stopped. From any of state A, B, C and D,
a return is made to the stop mode by executing the STP instruction.
Refer to “1.17.1 Stop mode.”
2 Sub-clock mode (State G)
Only the clock-function is made to operate by sub-clock mode at low-power dissipation.
The sub-clock mode (state G) is provided by executing the WIT instruction in the low-speed mode
(state D), and restoration from this state to the low-speed mode is attached by each interrupt.
In the 7470/7477 group, which is not provided with a sub-clock oscillation circuit, this mode is not
provided.
1-174
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.19 Built-in PROM version
1.19 Built-in PROM version
In contrast with the mask ROM version, a microcomputer incorporating a programmable ROM is called
built-in PROM version.
There are two types of built-in PROM version as shown below.
● One Time PROM version
Writing to the built-in PROM can be performed only once. Neither erase nor rewrite operations are
enabled.
● Built-in EPROM version
The built-in EPROM version is a programmable microcomputer with window and can perform write,
erase, and rewrite operations.
The built-in PROM version has the EPROM mode for writing to the built-in PROM in addition to the same
functions as those of the mask ROM version.
For an outline of performance, a pin configuration and a functional block diagram of the built-in PROM
version, refer to “1.3 Performance overview”, “1.4 Pin configuration”, and “1.6 Functional block
diagram”, respectively.
The 7470/7471/7477/7478 group supports the built-in PROM versions shown in Table 1.19.1.
Table 1.19.1 7470/7471/7477/7478 group built-in PROM version supporting products
Product name
M37470E4-XXXSP
M37470E8-XXXSP
M37471E4-XXXSP
M37471E4-XXXFP
M37471E8-XXXSP
M37471E8-XXXFP
M37471E8SS
M37477E8-XXXSP
M37477E8-XXXFP
M37477E8TXXXSP
M37477E8TXXXFP
M37478E8-XXXSP
M37478E8-XXXFP
M37478E8TXXXSP
M37478E8TXXXFP
M37478E8SS
(P)ROM size RAM size
(bytes)
(bytes)
8192
192
16384
384
8192
192
16384
16384
16384
384
384
384
I/O Ports
Package
I/O ports: 22
(Including 4 analog
32P4B
input pins.)
Input ports: 4
42P4B
I/O ports: 28
56P6N-A
(Including 8 analog
42P4B
input pins.)
56P6N-A
Input ports: 8
42S1B-A
32P4B
I/O ports: 18
Input ports: 8
32P2W-A
(Including 4 analog 32P4B
input pins.)
32P2W-A
42P4B
I/O ports: 20
56P6N-A
Input ports: 16
42P4B
(Including 8 analog
56P6N-A
input pins.)
42S1B-A
*: Extended operating temperature version.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Remarks
One Time PROM version
One Time PROM version
EPROM version
One Time PROM version
One Time PROM version*
One Time PROM version
One Time PROM version*
EPROM version
(As of July, 1996)
1-175
HARDWARE
1.19 Built-in PROM version
1.19.1 EPROM mode
The built-in PROM version has the EPROM mode in addition to the same operation modes as those of
the mask ROM version. The EPROM mode permits writing to the built-in PROM and reading from the builtin PROM. To the built-in PROM, writing, reading and erasing can be performed by the same operations
as those of the M5M27C256K.
Table 1.19.2 shows a pin function in EPROM mode and Figure 1.19.1 to 1.19.6 show a connections in
EPROM mode.
Table 1.19.2 Pin functions in EPROM mode
Built-in PROM version
V CC
P33
V SS
P1 1 to P17, P2 0 to P2 3,
Pin name
P3 0, P3 1 , P4 0, P4 1
P0 0 to P07
V REF
P32
M5M27C256K
V CC
V PP
V SS
A 0 to A 14
D0 to D7
CE
OE
(TOP VIEW)
A10
A9
A8
A7
A3
A2
A1
A0
CE
VSS
1
32
2
31
3
30
4
29
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
M37470E4-XXXSP
M37470E8-XXXSP
A6
A5
A4
P17/SRDY
P16/CLK
P15/SOUT
P14/SIN
P13/T1
P12/T0
P11
P10
P23/IN3
P22/IN2
P21/IN1
P20/IN0
VREF
XIN
XOUT
VSS
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
12
21
13
20
14
19
15
18
16
17
P07
P06
P05
P04
P03
P02
P01
P00
P41
P40
P33/CNTR 1
P32/CNTR 0
P31/INT1
P30/INT0
RESET
VCC
Outline 32P4B
: Same functions as M5M27C256K
Fig. 1.19.1 Pin connection in EPROM mode of 7470 group
1-176
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
A14
A13
VPP
OE
A12
A11
VCC
VSS
HARDWARE
1.19 Built-in PROM version
(TOP VIEW)
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
CE
VSS
1
42
2
41
3
40
4
39
5
38
6
37
7
36
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
M37471E4-XXXSP
M37471E8-XXXSP
M37471E8SS
A5
P53
P17/SRDY
P16/CLK
P15/SOUT
P14/SIN
P13/T1
P12/T0
P11
P10
P27/IN7
P26/IN6
P25/IN5
P24/IN4
P23/IN3
P22/IN2
P21/IN1
P20/IN0
VREF
XIN
XOUT
VSS
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
15
28
16
27
17
26
18
25
19
24
20
23
21
22
P52
P07
P06
P05
P04
P03
P02
P01
P00
P43
P42
P41
P40
P33/CNTR1
P32/CNTR0
P31/INT1
P30/INT0
RESET
P51/XCOUT
P50/XCIN
VCC
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
A14
A13
VPP
OE
A12
A11
VSS
VCC
Outline 42P4B (Note)
42S1B-A (M37471E8SS)
: Same functions as M5M27C256K
Note: The only difference between the 42P4B package product and the 56P6N-A package product
are package shape, absolute maximum ratings and the fact that the 56P6N-A package
product has an AV SS pin.
Fig. 1.19.2 Pin connection in EPROM mode of 7471 group (1)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-177
HARDWARE
1.19 Built-in PROM version
A11
OE
A12
VPP
A14
A13
D1
D0
D2
D4
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
47
26
48
25
49
24
M37471E4-XXXFP
M37471E8-XXXFP
50
51
23
22
VSS
VCC
VSS
16
15
14
13
RESET
NC
P51/XCOUT
P50/XCIN
NC
VCC
VSS
AVSS
NC
XOUT
XIN
NC
CE
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
NC
P14/SIN
P13/T1
P12/T0
P11
P10
P27/IN7
P26/IN6
P25/IN5
P24/IN4
P23/IN3
P22/IN2
P21/IN1
P20/IN0
VREF
NC
12
17
11
18
56
10
19
55
9
20
54
8
53
7
21
6
52
1
A9
A8
27
5
A10
28
46
4
VSS
45
3
D7
NC
P05
P06
P07
P52
NC
VSS
P53
P17/SRDY
P16/CLK
P15/SOUT
NC
2
D5
D6
43
44
NC
P04
P03
P02
P01
P00
P43
P42
P41
P40
NC
P33/CNTR1
P32/CNTR0
P31/INT1
P30/INT0
NC
D3
(TOP VIEW)
Outline 56P6N-A (Note)
NC: No connection
: Same functions as M5M27C256K
Note: The only difference between the 42P4B package product and the 56P6N-A package product
are package shape, absolute maximum ratings and the fact that the 56P6N-A package
product has an AV SS pin.
Fig. 1.19.3 Pin connection in EPROM mode of 7471 group (2)
1-178
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.19 Built-in PROM version
(TOP VIEW)
A10
A9
A8
A7
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
CE
VSS
1
32
2
31
3
30
4
29
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
M37477E8-XXXSP
M37477E8TXXXSP
A6
P17/SRDY
P16/SCLK
P15/TXD
P14/RXD
P13/T1
P12/T0
P11
P10
P23/IN3
P22/IN2
P21/IN1
P20/IN0
VREF
XIN
XOUT
VSS
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
13
20
14
19
15
18
16
17
P07
P06
P05
P04
P03
P02
P01
P00
P41
P40
P33/CNTR 1
P32/CNTR 0
P31/INT1
P30/INT0
RESET
VCC
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
A14
A13
VPP
OE
A12
A11
VCC
VSS
Outline 32P4B (Note)
A10
A9
A8
A7
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
CE
VSS
1
32
2
31
3
30
4
29
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
M37477E8-XXXFP
M37477E8TXXXFP
A6
P17/SRDY
P16/SCLK
P15/TXD
P14/RXD
P13/T1
P12/T0
P11
P10
P23/IN3
P22/IN2
P21/IN1
P20/IN0
VREF
XIN
XOUT
VSS
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
13
20
14
19
15
18
16
17
P07
P06
P05
P04
P03
P02
P01
P00
P41
P40
P33/CNTR 1
P32/CNTR 0
P31/INT1
P30/INT0
RESET
VCC
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
A14
A13
VPP
OE
A12
A11
VCC
VSS
Outline 32P2W-A (Note)
: Same functions as M5M27C256K
Note: The only difference between the 32P2W-A package product and the 32P4B package
product are package shape, absolute maximum ratings.
Fig. 1.19.4 Pin connection in EPROM mode of 7477 group
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-179
HARDWARE
1.19 Built-in PROM version
(TOP VIEW)
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
CE
VSS
1
42
2
41
3
40
4
39
5
38
6
37
7
36
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
M37478E8-XXXSP
M37478E8TXXXSP
M37478E8SS
A5
P53
P17/SRDY
P16/SCLK
P15/TXD
P14/RXD
P13/T1
P12/T0
P11
P10
P27/IN7
P26/IN6
P25/IN5
P24/IN4
P23/IN3
P22/IN2
P21/IN1
P20/IN0
VREF
XIN
XOUT
VSS
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
15
28
16
27
17
26
18
25
19
24
20
23
21
22
P52
P07
P06
P05
P04
P03
P02
P01
P00
P43
P42
P41
P40
P33/CNTR1
P32/CNTR0
P31/INT1
P30/INT0
RESET
P51/XCOUT
P50/XCIN
VCC
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
A14
A13
VPP
OE
A12
A11
VSS
VCC
Outline 42P4B (Note)
42S1B-A (M37478E8SS)
NC: No connection
: Same functions as M5M27C256K
Note: The only difference between the 42P4B package product and the 56P6N-A package product
are package shape, absolute maximum ratings and the fact that the 56P6N-A package
product has an AV SS pin.
Fig. 1.19.5 Pin connection in EPROM mode of 7478 group (1)
1-180
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.19 Built-in PROM version
A11
OE
A12
VPP
A14
A13
D1
D0
D2
D4
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
47
26
48
25
49
24
M37478E8-XXXFP
M37478E8TXXXFP
50
51
23
22
VSS
VCC
VSS
16
15
14
13
RESET
NC
P51/XCOUT
P50/XCIN
NC
VCC
VSS
AVSS
NC
XOUT
XIN
NC
CE
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
NC
P14/RXD
P13/T1
P12/T0
P11
P10
P27/IN7
P26/IN6
P25/IN5
P24/IN4
P23/IN3
P22/IN2
P21/IN1
P20/IN0
VREF
NC
12
17
11
18
56
10
19
55
9
20
54
8
53
7
21
6
52
1
A9
A8
27
5
A10
28
46
4
VSS
45
3
D7
NC
P05
P06
P07
P52
NC
VSS
P53
P17/SRDY
P16/SCLK
P15/TXD
NC
2
D5
D6
43
44
NC
P04
P03
P02
P01
P00
P43
P42
P41
P40
NC
P33/CNTR1
P32/CNTR0
P31/INT 1
P30/INT0
NC
D3
(TOP VIEW)
Outline 56P6N-A (Note)
NC: No connection
: Same functions as M5M27C256K
Note: The only difference between the 42P4B package product and the 56P6N-A package product
are package shape, absolute maximum ratings and the fact that the 56P6N-A package
product has an AV SS pin.
Fig. 1.19.6 Pin connection in EPROM mode of 7478 group (2)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-181
HARDWARE
1.19 Built-in PROM version
1.19.2 Pin description
Table 1.19.3 to Table 1.19.5 show the description of pin functions in the ordinary mode and the EPROM
mode.
Table 1.19.3 Pin description (1)
Pin
Mode
Name
Input/
Output
V CC, V SS
Ordinary
/EPROM
Power source
AV SS
Ordinary
/EPROM
Analog power
source
V REF
Ordinary
Reference
voltage input
Input
RESET
EPROM
Ordinary
Mode input
Reset input
Input
Input
EPROM
Ordinary
/EPROM
Reset input
Clock input
Input
Input
X OUT
Ordinary
/EPROM
Clock output
Output
P0 0– P0 7
Ordinary
I/O port P0
Input/
output
EPROM
Data I/O D0– D7
Input/
output
X IN
1-182
Functions
• Apply the following voltage to the VCC pin:
2.7 V to 4.5 V (at f(XIN) = (2.2 VCC –2) MHz) or
4.5 V to 5.5 V (at f(XIN) = 8 MHz).
• Apply 0 V to the V SS pin.
• Ground level input pin for the A-D converter.
• Apply the same voltage as the VSS pin to the
AVSS pin.
Note: This pin is dedicated to 56P6N-A package
products among the 7471/7478 group.
• Reference voltage input pin for the A-D converter.
• When using the A-D converter, apply VCC/2 (Q2)
to V CC [V].
• When not using the A-D converter, connect to
V CC.
• VREF works as CE input.
• Reset input pin
• The microcomputer is put into a reset state by
keeping the RESET pin at “L” for 2 ms or more,
and the reset state is released by returning the
RESET pin to “H.”
• Connect to the V SS pin.
• An input pin and an output pin for the main
clock generating circuit.
• Connect a ceramic resonator or a quartz-crystal oscillator between pins XIN and XOUT .
• A feedback resistor is incorporated between the
X IN and the XOUT pins.
• To use an external clock input, connect the
clock oscillation source to the X IN pin and leave
the X OUT pin open.
• Port P0 is an 8-bit I/O port.
• The output structure is CMOS output.
• In input mode, a pull-up transistor is connectable in units of one bit.
• In input mode, a key-on wake up function is
provided.
• Port P0 works as data I/O (D0 – D 7)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.19 Built-in PROM version
Table 1.19.4 Pin description (2)
Pin
P1 0– P1 7
P2 0– P2 7
Mode
Name
Ordinary
I/O port P1
EPROM
Address input
A 4– A 10
I/O port P2
(7470/7471
group)
Ordinary
EPROM
Input/
Output
Input/
output
Input
Input/
output
Input port P2
(7477/7478
group)
Input
Address input
A 0–A 3
Input
Functions
• Port P1 is an 8-bit I/O port.
• The output structure is CMOS output.
• In input mode, pull-up transistor can be connected in units of 4-bit.
• Pins P1 2 and P13 are in common with timer
output pins T 0, T1 respectively.
• In the case of the 7470/7471 group, P14 – P1 7
are in common with serial I/O pins SIN, S OUT,
CLK, S RDY respectively.
• In the case of the 7470/7471 group, the outputs of pins SOUT and the SRDY can be N-channel
open drain outputs.
• In the case of the 7477/7478 group, pins
P1 4 – P17 are in common with serial I/O pins
RXD, TX D, SCLK , SRDY, respectively.
• The P1 1–P1 7 pins are address (A4 – A10 ) input
pins. Put P10 into the open state.
• Port P2 is an 8-bit I/O port.
• The output structure is CMOS output.
• In input mode, pull-up transistor can be connected in units of 4-bit.
• Pins P2 0–P2 7 are in common with analog input
pins IN0 –IN7 respectively.
Note: The 7470 group has only the 4 pins
P2 0–P2 3 (IN 0–IN 3).
• Port P2 is an 8-bit input port.
• It is impossible to connect a pull-up transistor.
• Pins P2 0–P2 7 are in common with analog input
pins IN0 –IN7 respectively.
Note: The 7477 group has only the 4 pins
P2 0–P2 3 (IN 0–IN3 ) are available.
• The P20 to P2 3 pins are address (A 0 –A3 ) input
pins.
• In the case of the 7471/7478 group, put the
P2 4–P2 7 pins into the open state.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-183
HARDWARE
1.19 Built-in PROM version
Table 1.19.5 Pin description (3)
Pin
P3 0– P3 3
P4 0– P4 3
P5 0– P5 3
1-184
Mode
Name
Input/
Output
Input
Ordinary
Input port P3
EPROM
Address input
A 11, A 12
Mode input
V PP input
Input
Ordinary
I/O port P4
Input/
output
EPROM
Address input
A 13, A 14
Input
Ordinary
Input port P5
Input
EPROM
Input port P5
Input
Functions
• Port P3 is a 4-bit input port.
• Pins P3 0, P3 1 are in common with external interrupt input pins INT0 , INT1 respectively.
• Pins P32 , P33 are in common with timer input
pins CNTR0 , CNTR1 respectively.
• The P30 and P31 pins are the address (A11,
A 12 ) input pins.
• The P32 pin becomes an OE input pin.
• The P33 pin is a VPP input pin and V PP is applied
to it when the VPP is input and the program is
verified.
• Port P4 is a 4-bit I/O port.
• The output structure is CMOS output.
• In input mode, pull-up transistor can be connected in units of 4-bit.
Note: The 7470/7477 group has only 2 pins P40
and P41 .
• The P4 0 to P4 1 pins are the address (A 13 , A14 )
input pins.
• In the case of the 7471/7478 group, put the
P4 2 and P43 pins into the open state.
• Port P5 is a 4-bit input port.
• Pull-up transistor can be connected in units of
4-bit.
• Pins P50 , P51 are in common with input/output
pins for sub-clock generating circuit XCIN , XCOUT
respectively.
• When using pins P5 0 and P5 1 as pins XCIN
and X COUT, connect a quartz-crystal oscillator
between pins XCIN and X COUT.
• When using pins P5 0 and P5 1 as pins XCIN
and XCOUT , a feedback resistor is connected
between pins XCIN and X COUT.
• To use an external clock input, connect the
clock oscillation source to the XCIN pin and leave
the X COUT pin open.
Note: Only the 7471/7478 group has pins P50
to P5 3.
• Put this port into the open state.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.19 Built-in PROM version
1.19.3 Writing, reading, and erasing to built-in PROM
The built-in PROM version is put into the EPROM mode by applying the “L” level to the RESET pin. Write,
read and erase operations to the built-in PROM in the EPROM mode are described below.
Table 1.19.6 shows input signals in each mode.
(1) Reading
● Apply 0 V to the RESET pin and 5 V to the V CC pin.
● When an address signal (A 0-A 14 ) is input and the CE pin and the OE pin are caused to go “L”, the
contents of the PROM appear to data I/O pins (D0 -D7 ).
● The data I/O pins (D 0-D 7) are put into a floating when either the CE pin or the OE pin is in the “H”
state.
(2) Writing
● Apply 0 V to the RESET pin and 5 V to the V CC pin.
● When the OE pin is caused to go to “H” and VPP is applied to the VPP pin, the program mode is
provided.
● Set an address to the address input pins (A0 -A14 ) and give write data to the data I/O pins (D0 -D7 )
in parallel.
● In the above condition, a write operation is performed by causing the CE pin to go to “L”.
When using a PROM programmer, specify an address into the following area.
● Address 600016 to address 7FFF16 (for the M3747xE4)
● Address 400016 to address 7FFF16 (for the M3747xE8)
(3) Erasing
● An erase operation is enabled only in the built-in EPROM version with window (M37471E8SS/
M37478E8SS).
● Data can be erased by irradiating ultraviolet rays having a wave length of 2537Å.
● The minimum amount of irradiation required for an erase operation is 15 W•s/cm2 .
Table 1.19.6 Input/Output signal on each mode
Pin
CE
OE
V PP
V CC
RESET
Mode
Reading
V IL
V IL
V CC
Output disable
V IL
V IH
V CC
Writing
V IL
V IH
V PP
V CC
0V
Writing verify
V IH
V IL
V PP
V IH
V IH
V PP
Writing disable
Note: V IL denotes an “L” input voltage and V IH denotes an “H” input voltage.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
D0 to D7
Output
Floating
Input
Output
Floating
1-185
HARDWARE
1.19 Built-in PROM version
1.19.4 Notes on use
The notes on using the built-in PROM version are shown below.
(1) All built-in PROM version products
■ Precautions at write operation
● Be careful not to apply an overvoltage to pins because a high voltage is used for a write
operation. Exercise special care when turning on the power supply.
● For writing the contents of the PROM, use a dedicated programming adapter. This permits using
a general-purpose PROM programmer for writing data. For details of dedicated programming
adapters, refer to the “DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT TOOLS FOR MICROCOMPUTERS” data
book.
■ Precautions at read operation
● When reading the contents of the PROM, use a dedicated programming adapter, so that reading
can be performed by a general-purpose PROM programmer. For details of dedicated programming
adapters, refer to the “DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT TOOLS FOR MICROCOMPUTERS” data
book.
1-186
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.19 Built-in PROM version
(2) One Time PROM version
■ Precautions before use
● The PROM of the One Time PROM version is
not tested or screened in the assembly process
and following processes. To ensure proper
operation after programming, the procedure
shown in Figure 1.19.7 is recommended to
verify programming.
Programming with PROM programmer
Screening (Caution)
(Leave at 150°C for 40 hours)
Verification with PROM programmer
Functional check in target device
Caution: The screening temperature is far higher
than the storage temperature. Never expose to
150°C exceeding 100 Hours.
Fig. 1.19.7 Programming and testing of One
Time PROM version
(3) Built-in EPROM version
■ Precautions on erasing
● Sunlight and fluorescent light include light that may erase the information written in the built-in
PROM. When using the built-in EPROM version in the read mode, be sure to cover the transparent
glass portion with a seal.
● This seal to cover the transparent glass portion is prepared on our side. Be careful not to bring
the seal into contact with the microcomputer lead wires when covering the portion with the seal
because this seal is made of metal (aluminum).
● Before erasing data, clean the transparent glass. If any finger stain or seal adhesive is stuck to
the transparent glass, this prevents ultraviolet rays from passing, thereby affecting the erase
characteristic adversely.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-187
HARDWARE
1.20 Emulator MCU
1.20 Emulator MCU
The M37471RSS and the M37478RSS are emulator MCUs for the 7470/7471/7477/7478 group software
development. When an emulator is connected to the socket on the top surface, user program debugging
can be performed efficiently by using a real-time trace function, etc.
It is possible to monitor every internal bus information through the emulator because 16 address bus
signals, two-way data bus signals and SYNC, RD, WR and f signals are output from the socket on the top
surface.
In the debug system using the M37471RSS and the M37478RSS, the MCU pins for emulator are directly
connected to the user system. This permits debugging in a condition similar to a real mounting condition.
For details of development support systems for the M37471RSS and the M37478RSS, refer to the
“DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT TOOLS FOR MICROCOMPUTER” data book.
Figure 1.20.1 shows a pin connection diagram of the M37471RSS and M37478RSS.
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
P53
P17/S RDY
P16/CLK
(Note 1) P15/SOUT
P14/SIN
P13/T1
P12/T0
P11
P10
P27/IN7
P26/IN6
P25/IN5
P24/IN4
(Note 2)
P23/IN3
P22/IN2
P21/IN1
P20/IN0
VREF
XIN
XOUT
VSS
1
42
2
41
3
40
4
39
5
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
10
6
11
7
12
8
13
9
14
10
15
11
16
12
17
13
18
14
CNV SS2
A12
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
D 0/RD
D 1/WR
D 2/SYNC
VSS2
VCC2
A14
A13
A8
A9
A11
φ
28
38
27
37
26
36
25
35
24
34
23
33
22
32
A10
S
D7
D6
D5
D4/A15
D3/A14
21
31
20
30
19
29
18
28
17
27
16
26
15
25
24
19
20
21
M37471RSS (Note 3)
M37478RSS
23
22
P52
P07
P06
P05
P04
P03
P02
P01
P00
P43
P42
P41
P40
P33/CNTR 1
P32/CNTR 0
P31/INT 1
P30/INT 0
RESET
P51/X COUT
P50/X CIN
VCC
Outline 42S1M
Notes 1: In the case of the M37478RSS, the pins CLK, SOUT, S IN shown in this
figure function as the pins SCLK , TxD, RxD respectively.
2: In the case of the M37478RSS, the pins P20 /IN0–P2 7/IN7 shown in this
figure function as the input pins.
3: The power source voltage of the M37471RSS and the M37478RSS is 5 V±5 %.
Fig. 1.20.1 Pin configuration of M37471RSS and M37478RSS
1-188
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER‘S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
1.21 Electrical characteristics
1.21.1 Electrical characteristics
(1) 7470 group electrical characteristics
Table 1.21.1 shows the absolute maximum ratings of the 7470 group. Table 1.21.2 shows the
recommended operating conditions. Table 1.21.3 shows the electrical characteristics.
Table 1.21.4 shows the A-D converter characteristics.
Table 1.21.1 Absolute maximum ratings (7470 group)
Symbol
V CC
VI
VO
Pd
Topr
Tstg
Parameter
Power source voltage
Input voltage
Output voltage
Power dissipation
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Conditions
All voltages are based on V SS.
Output transistors are cut-off.
Ta = 25 °C
Ratings
–0.3 to +7
–0.3 to VCC +0.3
–0.3 to VCC +0.3
1000
–20 to +85
–40 to +150
Unit
V
V
V
mW
°C
°C
Table 1.21.2 Recommended operating conditions (7470 group)
(VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 °C to +85 °C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
Parameter
f(X IN) = 8.0 MHz
f(X IN) = (2.2V CC–2.0 )MHz
V CC
Power source voltage
V SS
V IH
V IH
V IH
V IL
V IL
V IL
V IL
IOH (sum)
IOH (sum)
IOL(sum)
IOL(sum)
Power source voltage
“H” input voltage P0 0 to P0 7 , P10 to P1 7, P3 0 to P3 3
“H” input voltage P2 0 to P2 3 , P40 , P41
“H” input voltage XIN , RESET
“L” input voltage P0 0 to P07 , P10 to P1 7 , P30 to P3 3
“L” input voltage P20 to P2 3, P40 , P41
“L” input voltage X IN
“L” input voltage RESET
“H” sum output current of P00 to P0 7 and P4 0 and P4 1
“H” sum output current of P1 0 to P1 7 and P2 0 to P2 3
“L” sum output current of P0 0 to P07 , P40 and P4 1
“L” sum output current of P1 0 to P1 7 and P2 0 to P23
“H” peak output current
P0 0 to P0 7 , P10 to P1 7 , P20 to P2 3, P40 , P41
“L” peak output current
P0 0 to P0 7 , P10 to P1 7 , P20 to P2 3, P40 , P41
“H” average output current
P0 0 to P0 7 , P10 to P1 7 , P20 to P23 , P40 , P41 (Note 1)
“L” average output current
P0 0 to P0 7 , P10 to P1 7 , P20 to P23 , P40 , P41 (Note 1)
Timer input frequency
f(X IN) = 8 MHz
CNTR0 (P32 ),
f(X IN) = 4 MHz
CNTR1 (P3 3 ) (Note 2)
Serial I/O clock input frequency f(X IN) = 8 MHz
f(X IN) = 4 MHz
CLK (P1 6) (Note 2)
Clock input oscillation frequency V CC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V
V CC = 2.7 V to 4.5 V
(Note 2)
IOH (peak)
IOL(peak)
IOH (avg)
IOL(avg)
f(CNTR)
f(CLK)
f(XIN )
Notes
Min.
4.5
2.7
Limits
Typ.
5.0
Max.
5.5
4.5
V CC
V CC
V CC
0.2VCC
0.25VCC
0.16VCC
0.12VCC
–30
–30
60
60
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
mA
mA
mA
mA
–10
mA
20
mA
–5
mA
10
mA
2
MHz
1
2
1
8
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
0
0.8VCC
0.7VCC
0.8VCC
0
0
0
0
Unit
2.2V CC –2.0
1: The average output current IOH (avg) or I OL (avg) are the average value during a 100 ms.
2: The oscillation frequency is at 50 % duty cycle.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-189
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
Table 1.21.3 Electrical characteristics (7470 group)
(VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, V SS = 0 V, Ta = –20 °C to +85 °C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
V OH
V OL
V T+ – VT–
Parameter
“H” output voltage
P0 0 to P0 7, P1 0 to P1 7
P2 0 to P2 3 , P40, P4 1
“L” output voltage
P0 0 to P0 7, P1 0 to P1 7
P2 0 to P2 3 , P40, P4 1
Hysteresis P0 0 to P0 7
P3 0 to P3 3
V T+ – VT–
Hysteresis RESET
V T+ – VT–
Hysteresis P1 4 /SIN
P1 6 /CLK
IIL
“L” input current
P0 0 to P0 7, P1 0 to P1 7
P3 0 to P3 2 , P40, P4 1
IIL
“L” input current P33
IIL
“L” input current
P2 0 to P2 3
IIL
IIH
IIH
IIH
IIH
ICC
V RAM
1-190
“L” input current
X IN , RESET
“H” input current
P0 0 to P0 7, P1 0 to P1 7
P3 0 to P3 2 , P40, P4 1
“H” input current P3 3
“H” input current
P2 0 to P2 3
“H” input current
X IN , RESET
Power source current
RAM retention voltage
Test conditions
Min.
Limits
Typ.
Max.
Unit
V CC = 5 V, IOH = –5 mA
3.0
V
V CC = 3 V, IOH = –1.5 mA
2.0
V
2.0
V
1.0
V
–5
–3
–1.0
–0.35
–5
–3
–5
–3
–1.0
–0.35
–5
–3
V
V
V
V
V
V
µA
µA
mA
mA
µA
µA
µA
µA
mA
mA
µA
µA
V CC = 5 V
5
µA
V CC = 3 V
3
µA
5
3
5
3
5
3
14
7
3.6
15
8
4
4
2
1
1
10
5.5
µA
µA
µA
µA
µA
µA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
µA
µA
V
V CC = 5 V, IOL = 10 mA
V CC = 3 V, IOL = 3 mA
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
=
=
=
=
5
3
5
3
V
V
V
V
V CC
V CC
VI = 0 V
V CC
Not use pull-up transistor
V CC
VI = 0 V
V CC
Use pull-up transistor
V CC
V CC
VI = 0 V
V CC
VI = 0 V, not use pull-up tran- V CC
sistor, not use as analog input V CC
VI = 0 V, use pull-up transistor, V CC
not use as analog input
V CC
V CC
VI = 0 V
X IN is at stop mode
V CC
Use as SIN or CLK
V I = V CC
Not use pull-up transistor
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
5
3
5
3
5
3
5
3
5
3
5
3
5
3
V CC = 5
V CC = 3
VI = VCC , not use pull-up tran- V CC = 5
sistor, not use as analog input V CC = 3
V CC = 5
V I = V CC
V CC = 3
X IN is at stop mode
At system op- f(XIN ) = 8 MHz
V CC = 5
eration,
A-D conversion
is not executed f(XIN ) = 4 MHz
V CC = 3
At system op- f(XIN ) = 8 MHz
V CC = 5
eration,
A-D conversion
f(X
IN
)
=
4
MHz
is executed
V CC = 3
f(XIN ) = 8 MHz
V CC = 5
At wait mode
f(XIN ) = 4 MHz
V CC = 3
Ta = 25
At stop mode VCC = 5 V
Ta = 85
Stop all oscillation
V I = V CC
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
0.5
0.3
0.5
0.3
0.5
0.3
–0.25
–0.08
–0.5
–0.18
–0.25
–0.08
–0.5
–0.18
V
V
V
V
V
V
7
3.5
1.8
7.5
4
2
2
1
0.5
0.1
1
V
V
V
V
V
V
°C
°C
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2.0
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
Table 1.21.4 A-D converter characteristics (7470 group)
(V CC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 °C to +85 °C, f(X IN) = 4 MHz, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
Parameter
—
—
—
Resolution
Non-linearity error
Differential non-linearity error
V OT
Zero transition error
V FST
Full scale transition error
T CONV
Conversion time
V REF
Reference input voltage
R LADDER
V IA
Ladder resistance value
Analog supply voltage
Test conditions
V CC = V REF = 5.12 V, I OL(sum) = 0
V CC = VREF = 3.072 V, I OL (sum) = 0
V CC = V REF = 5.12 V
V CC = V REF = 3.072 V
f(XIN ) =
f(XIN ) =
Min.
Limits
Typ.
mA
mA
8 MHz
4 MHz
0.5VCC
(Note)
2
0
5
Unit
Max.
8
±2
±0.9
2
3
4
7
12.5
25
bits
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
µs
µs
V CC
V
10
V REF
kΩ
V
Note: Set the V REF voltage to 0.5 V CC or more and 2 V or more. When using no A-D converter, connect
it to V CC.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-191
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
(2) 7471 group electrical characteristics
Table 1.21.5 shows the absolute maximum ratings of the 7471 group. Table 1.21.6 shows the
recommended operating conditions. Table 1.21.7 shows the electrical characteristics.
Table 1.21.8 shows the A-D converter characteristics.
Table 1.21.5 Absolute maximum ratings (7471 group)
Symbol
V CC
VI
VO
Pd
Topr
Tstg
Parameter
Power source voltage
Input voltage
Output voltage
Power dissipation
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Conditions
All voltages are based on V SS.
Output transistors are cut-off.
Ta = 25 °C
Ratings
–0.3 to +7
–0.3 to V CC +0.3
–0.3 to V CC +0.3
1000 (Note)
–20 to +85
–40 to +150
Unit
V
V
V
mW
°C
°C
Note: The rating is 500 mW for the 56P6N-A package product.
Table 1.21.6 Recommended operating conditions (7471 group)
(V CC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, V SS = AV SS = 0 V, Ta = –20 °C to +85 °C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
Parameter
f(X IN ) = 8.0 MHz
f(X IN ) = (2.2VCC –2.0) MHz
V CC
Power source voltage
V SS
AV SS
V IH
V IH
V IH
V IL
V IL
V IL
V IL
IOH (sum)
IOH (sum)
IOL (sum)
IOL (sum)
Power source voltage
Analog supply voltage
“H” input voltage P0 0 to P0 7, P10 to P1 7 , P30 to P3 3
“H” input voltage P2 0 to P2 7, P40 to P4 3 , P50 to P53 (Note 1)
“H” input voltage X IN , RESET
“L” input voltage P0 0 to P0 7, P1 0 to P1 7 , P30 to P3 3
“L” input voltage P2 0 to P2 7, P4 0 to P4 3 , P50 to P5 3 (Note 1)
“L” input voltage X IN
“L” input voltage RESET
“H” sum output current of P0 0 to P0 7 and P4 0 to P43
“H” sum output current of P1 0 to P1 7 and P2 0 to P2 7
“L” sum output current of P0 0 to P0 7 and P4 0 to P4 3
“L” sum output current of P1 0 to P1 7 and P2 0 to P2 7
“H” peak output current
P0 0 to P0 7, P1 0 to P1 7 , P20 to P2 7, P4 0 to P4 3
“L” peak output current
P0 0 to P0 7, P1 0 to P1 7 , P20 to P2 7, P4 0 to P4 3
“H” average output current
P0 0 to P0 7, P1 0 to P1 7 , P20 to P2 7, P4 0 to P4 3 (Note 2)
“L” average output current
P0 0 to P0 7, P1 0 to P1 7 , P20 to P2 7, P4 0 to P4 3 (Note 2)
Timer input frequency
f(X IN ) = 8 MHz
CNTR 0 (P3 2)
f(X IN ) = 4 MHz
CNTR 1 (P3 3) (Note 3)
IOH (peak)
IOL (peak)
IOH (avg)
IOL (avg)
f(CNTR)
f(CLK)
f(X IN )
f(X CIN)
Notes 1:
2:
3:
4:
1-192
Min.
4.5
2.7
Limits
Typ.
5.0
Max.
5.5
4.5
V CC
V CC
V CC
0.2VCC
0.25VCC
0.16VCC
0.12VCC
–30
–30
60
60
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
mA
mA
mA
mA
–10
mA
20
mA
–5
mA
10
mA
2
MHz
1
MHz
2
1
8
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
kHz
0
0
0.8VCC
0.7VCC
0.8VCC
0
0
0
0
Serial I/O clock input frequency f(X IN ) = 8 MHz
CLK (P1 6 ) (Note 3)
f(X IN ) = 4 MHz
Clock input oscillation frequency V CC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V
(Note 3)
V CC = 2.7 V to 4.5 V
Sub-clock input oscillation frequency (Note 3, 4)
32
Unit
2.2VCC –2.0
50
Except when P5 0 is used as XCIN.
The average output current I OH(avg) or IOL (avg) are the average value during a 100 ms.
The oscillation frequency is at 50 % duty cycle.
Set f(X CIN) < f(XIN)/3 when the sub-clock is used.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
Table 1.21.7 Electrical characteristics (7471 group)
(VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = AV SS = 0 V, Ta = –20 °C to +85 °C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
V OH
V OL
V T+ – V T–
V T+ – V T–
Parameter
“H” output voltage
P0 0 to P0 7 , P10 to P1 7
P2 0 to P2 7 , P40 to P4 3
“L” output voltage
P0 0 to P0 7 , P10 to P1 7
P2 0 to P2 7 , P40 to P4 3
Hysteresis P0 0 to P0 7
P3 0 to P3 3
Hysteresis RESET
Test conditions
V CC = 3 V, IOH = –1.5 mA
2.0
V
=
=
=
=
5
3
5
3
IIL
IIH
IIH
ICC
V RAM
“H” input current P33
“H” input current
P2 0 to P2 7
“H” input current
X IN , RESET
Power source current
RAM retention voltage
1.0
V
–5
–3
–1.0
–0.35
–5
–3
–5
–3
–1.0
–0.35
–5
–3
V
V
V
V
V
V
µA
µA
mA
mA
µA
µA
µA
µA
mA
mA
µA
µA
V CC = 5 V
5
µA
V CC = 3 V
3
µA
V
7
3.5
1.8
7.5
4
2
5
3
5
3
5
3
14
7
3.6
15
8
4
µA
µA
µA
µA
µA
µA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
V
30
80
µA
V
15
40
µA
V
2
1
0.5
4
2
1
mA
mA
mA
V
3
12
µA
V
2
8
µA
°C
°C
0.1
1
1
10
5.5
µA
µA
V
V
V
V
V
“L” input current
P2 0 to P2 7
IIH
V
V CC = 3 V, IOL = 3 mA
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V I = 0V
IIH
2.0
V CC = 5 V, IOL = 10 mA
“L” input current P33
“L” input current
X IN , RESET
“H” input current
P0 0 to P0 7 , P10 to P1 7
P3 0 to P3 2 , P40 to P4 3
P5 0 to P5 3
Unit
V
IIL
IIL
Max.
3.0
VI = 0 V
Not use pull-up transistor
VI = 0 V
Use pull-up transistor
IIL
Limits
Typ.
V CC = 5 V, IOH = –5 mA
Hysteresis P1 4 /SIN
P1 6 /CLK
“L” input current
P0 0 to P0 7 , P10 to P1 7
P3 0 to P3 2 , P40 to P4 3
P5 0 to P5 3
V T+ – V T–
Min.
When used as S IN or CLK
V I = 0 V, not use pull-up transistor, not use as analog input
V I = 0 V, use pull-up transistor, not use as analog input
VI = 0 V
X IN is at stop mode
V I = V CC
Not use pull-up transistor
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
5
3
5
3
5
3
5
3
5
3
5
3
5
3
V CC = 5
V CC = 3
V I = VCC , not use pull-up tran- V CC = 5
sistor, not use as analog input V CC = 3
V CC = 5
V I = V CC
V CC = 3
X IN is at stop mode
At system op- f(X IN ) = 8 MHz
eration,
V CC = 5
A-D conversion
is not executed f(X IN ) = 4 MHz
V CC = 3
At system op- f(X IN ) = 8 MHz
V CC = 5
eration,
A-D conversion
f(X IN ) = 4 MHz
is executed
V CC = 3
In low-speed mode, Ta = 25°C, low-power mode V CC = 5
f(X CIN) = 32 kHz
At A-D conversion is not executed V CC = 3
f(X IN ) = 8 MHz
V CC = 5
At wait mode
f(X IN ) = 4 MHz
V CC = 3
At wait mode, Ta = 25°C, V CC = 5
low-power mode, f(X CIN) =
V CC = 3
32 kHz
Ta = 25
At stop mode, VCC = 5 V
Ta = 85
Stop all oscillation
V I = V CC
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
0.5
0.3
0.5
0.3
0.5
0.3
–0.25
–0.08
–0.5
–0.18
–0.25
–0.08
–0.5
–0.18
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2.0
1-193
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
Table 1.21.8 A-D converter characteristics (7471 group)
(VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, V SS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 °C to +85 °C, f(X IN ) = 4 MHz, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
Parameter
—
—
—
Resolution
Non-linearity error
Differential non-linearity error
V OT
Zero transition error
V FST
Full scale transition error
T CONV
Conversion time
V REF
Reference input voltage
R LADDER
V IA
Ladder resistance value
Analog input voltage
Test conditions
VCC = V REF = 5.12 V, I OL (sum) = 0
VCC = V REF = 3.072 V, I OL (sum) = 0
V = VREF = 5.12 V
V CC = V REF = 3.072 V
f(XIN ) =
f(XIN ) =
Min.
Limits
Typ.
mA
mA
8 MHz
4 MHz
0.5VCC
(Note)
2
0
5
Unit
Max.
8
±2
±0.9
2
3
4
7
12.5
25
bits
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
µs
µs
V CC
V
10
V REF
kΩ
V
Note: Set the VREF voltage to 0.5 VCC or more and 2 V or more. When using no A-D converter, connect
it to VCC.
1-194
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
(3) 7477 group electrical characteristics
Table 1.21.9 shows the absolute maximum ratings of the 7477 group. Table 1.21.10 shows the
recommended operating conditions. Table 1.21.11 shows the electrical characteristics.
Table 1.21.12 shows the A-D converter characteristics.
Table 1.21.9 Absolute maximum ratings (7477group)
Symbol
V CC
VI
VO
Pd
Topr
Tstg
Parameter
Power source voltage
Input voltage
Output voltage
Power dissipation
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Conditions
All voltages are based on V SS.
Output transistors are cut-off.
Ta = 25 °C
Ratings
–0.3 to +7
–0.3 to VCC +0.3
–0.3 to VCC +0.3
1000 (Note 1)
–20 to +85 (Note 2)
–40 to +150 (Note 3)
Unit
V
V
V
mW
°C
°C
Notes 1: The rating is 500 mW for the 32P2W-A package product.
2: –40 °C to +85 °C for extended operating temperature version.
3: –65 °C to +150 °C for extended operating temperature version.
Table 1.21.10 Recommended operating conditions (7477 group)
(V CC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 °C to +85 °C(Note 1), unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
Parameter
f(X IN) = 8.0 MHz
f(X IN) = (2.2V CC–2.0) MHz
V CC
Power source voltage
V SS
V IH
V IH
V IH
V IL
V IL
V IL
V IL
IOH (sum)
IOH (sum)
IOL(sum)
IOL(sum)
Power source voltage
“H” input voltage P0 0 to P0 7 , P10 to P1 7, P3 0 to P3 3
“H” input voltage P2 0 to P2 3 , P40 , P41
“H” input voltage XIN , RESET
“L” input voltage P0 0 to P07 , P10 to P1 7 , P30 to P3 3
“L” input voltage P20 to P2 3, P40 , P41
“L” input voltage X IN
“L” input voltage RESET
“H” sum output current P00 to P0 7 , P40 and P41
“H” sum output current P10 to P1 7
“L” sum output current P00 to P0 7 , P40 and P4 1
“L” sum output current P1 0 to P1 7
“H” peak output current
P0 0 to P0 7 , P10 to P1 7 , P40 , P41
“L” peak output current
P0 0 to P0 7 , P10 to P1 7 , P40 , P41
“H” average output current
P0 0 to P0 7 , P10 to P1 7 , P40 , P41 (Note 2)
“L” average output current
P0 0 to P0 7 , P10 to P1 7 , P40 , P41 (Note 2)
Timer input frequency
f(X IN) = 8 MHz
CNTR0 (P3 2), CNTR1 (P3 3) (Note 3) f(X IN) = 4 MHz
Use as clock synchro- f(X IN )
Serial I/O clock input frequency nous serial I/O mode f(X IN )
S CLK (P1 6 ) (Note 3)
Use as UART f(X IN )
mode
f(X IN )
Clock input oscillation frequency V CC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V
(Note 3)
V CC = 2.7 V to 4.5 V
IOH (peak)
IOL(peak)
IOH (avg)
IOL(avg)
f(CNTR)
f(SCLK )
f(XIN )
Min.
4.5
2.7
Limits
Typ.
5.0
Max.
5.5
4.5
V CC
V CC
V CC
0.2VCC
0.25VCC
0.16VCC
0.12VCC
–30
–30
60
60
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
mA
mA
mA
mA
–10
mA
20
mA
–5
mA
10
mA
2
1
500
250
2
1
8
2.2V CC –2.0
MHz
MHz
kHz
kHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
0
0.8VCC
0.7VCC
0.8VCC
0
0
0
0
=
=
=
=
8
4
8
4
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
Unit
Notes 1: –40 °C to +85 °C for extended operating temperature version.
2: The average output current I OH (avg) or IOL (avg) are the average value during a 100 ms.
3: The oscillation frequency is at 50 % duty cycle.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-195
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
Table 1.21.11 Electrical characteristics (7477 group)
(V CC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 °C to +85 °C(Note), unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
V OH
V OL
V T+ – VT–
Parameter
“H” output voltage
P0 0 to P0 7, P1 0 to P1 7
P4 0 , P41
“L” output voltage
P0 0 to P0 7, P1 0 to P1 7
P4 0 , P41
Hysteresis P0 0 to P0 7
P3 0 to P3 3
Test conditions
V CC = 3 V, IOH = –1.5 mA
2.0
V
=
=
=
=
5
3
5
3
IIL
VI = 0 V
Not use pull-up transistor
VI = 0 V
Use pull-up transistor
IIL
“L” input current P33
V I = 0V
“L” input current
P2 0 to P2 3
“L” input current
X IN , RESET
“H” input current
P0 0 to P0 7, P1 0 to P1 7
P3 0 to P3 2 , P40, P4 1
V I = 0 V,
Not use as analog input
VI = 0 V
X IN is at stop mode
“H” input current P3 3
V I = V CC
“H” input current
P2 0 to P2 3
“H” input current
X IN , RESET
V I = V CC
Not use as analog input
V I = V CC
X IN is at stop mode
At system op- f(XIN ) = 8 MHz
eration,
V I = V CC
Not use pull-up transistor
A-D conversion
is not executed
ICC
Power source current
At system operation,
A-D conversion
is executed
f(XIN ) = 4 MHz
f(XIN ) = 8 MHz
f(XIN ) = 4 MHz
f(XIN ) = 8 MHz
At wait mode
f(XIN ) = 4 MHz
At stop mode, V CC = 5 V
V RAM
RAM retention voltage
1.0
V
–5
–3
–1.0
–0.35
–5
–3
–5
–3
–5
–3
V
V
V
V
V
V
µA
µA
mA
mA
µA
µA
µA
µA
µA
µA
V CC = 5 V
5
µA
V CC = 3 V
3
µA
5
3
5
3
5
3
14
7
3.6
15
8
4
4
2
1
1
10
5.5
µA
µA
µA
µA
µA
µA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
µA
µA
V
0.5
0.3
0.5
0.3
0.5
0.3
V
V
V
V
“L” input current
P0 0 to P0 7, P1 0 to P1 7
P3 0 to P3 2 , P40, P4 1
IIH
V
V CC = 3 V, IOL = 3 mA
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
When used as RxD or SCLK
IIH
2.0
V CC = 5 V, IOL = 10 mA
Hysteresis P1 4 /RxD
P1 6 /SCLK
IIH
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
5
3
5
3
5
3
5
3
5
3
5
3
5
3
5
3
5
3
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
–0.25
–0.08
–0.5
–0.18
V
V
V
V
V
V
7
3.5
1.8
7.5
4
2
2
1
0.5
0.1
1
V CC = 5 V
V CC = 3 V
V CC = 5 V
V CC = 3 V
V CC = 5 V
V CC = 3 V
Ta = 25 °C
Ta = 85 °C
Stop all oscillation
Note: –40 °C to +85 °C for extended operating temperature version.
1-196
Unit
V
V T+ – VT–
IIH
Max.
3.0
Hysteresis RESET
IIL
Limits
Typ.
V CC = 5 V, IOH = –5 mA
V T+ – VT–
IIL
Min.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2.0
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
Table 1.21.12 A-D converter characteristics (7477 group)
(V CC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 °C to +85 °C(Note 1), unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
—
—
Parameter
Test conditions
Min.
Limits
Typ.
Resolution
Absolute accuracy
T CONV
Conversion time
V REF
Reference input voltage
R LADDER
V IA
Ladder resistance value
Analog input voltage
V CC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, f(X IN) = 8 MHz
V CC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, f(X IN) = 4 MHz
0.5V CC
(Note 2)
2
0
5
Unit
Max.
8
±3
12.5
25
bits
LSB
µs
µs
V CC
V
10
V REF
kΩ
V
Notes 1: –40 °C to +85 °C for extended operating temperature version.
2: Set the V REF voltage to 0.5 V CC or more and 2 V or more. When using no A-D converter, connect
it to VCC.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-197
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
(4) 7478 group electrical characteristics
Table 1.21.13 shows the absolute maximum ratings of the 7478 group. Table 1.21.14 shows the
recommended operating conditions. Table 1.21.15 shows the electrical characteristics.
Table 1.21.16 shows the A-D converter characteristics.
Table 1.21.13 Absolute maximum ratings (7478 group)
Symbol
V CC
VI
VO
Pd
Topr
Tstg
Parameter
Power source voltage
Input voltage
Output voltage
Power dissipation
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Conditions
All voltages are based on V SS.
Output transistors are cut-off.
Ta = 25 °C
Ratings
–0.3 to +7
–0.3 to V CC +0.3
–0.3 to V CC +0.3
1000 (Note 1)
–20 to +85 (Note 2)
–40 to +150 (Note 3)
Unit
V
V
V
mW
°C
°C
Notes 1: The rating is 500 mW for the 56P6N-A package product.
2: –40 °C to +85 °C for extended operating temperature version.
3: –65 °C to +150 °C for extended operating temperature version.
Table 1.21.14 Recommended operating conditions (7478 group)
(V CC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = AV SS = 0 V, Ta = –20 °C to +85 °C(Note 1), unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
Parameter
f(X IN ) = 8.0 MHz
f(X IN ) =(2.2VCC –2.0) MHz
V CC
Power source voltage
V SS
AV SS
V IH
V IH
V IH
V IL
V IL
V IL
V IL
IOH (sum)
IOH (sum)
IOL (sum)
IOL (sum)
Power source voltage
Analog supply voltage
“H” input voltage P0 0 to P0 7, P10 to P1 7 , P30 to P3 3
“H” input voltage P2 0 to P2 7, P40 to P4 3 , P50 to P53 (Note 2)
“H” input voltage X IN , RESET
“L” input voltage P0 0 to P0 7, P1 0 to P1 7 , P30 to P3 3
“L” input voltage P2 0 to P2 7, P4 0 to P4 3 , P50 to P5 3 (Note 2)
“L” input voltage X IN
“L” input voltage RESET
“H” sum output current of P0 0 to P07 and P4 0 to P43
“H” sum output current of P1 0 to P1 7
“L” sum output current of P0 0 to P0 7 and P4 0 toP43
“L” sum output current of P1 0 to P1 7
“H” peak output current
P0 0 to P0 7, P1 0 to P1 7 , P40 to P4 3
“L” peak output current
P0 0 to P0 7, P1 0 to P1 7 , P40 to P4 3
“H” average output current
P0 0 to P0 7, P1 0 to P1 7 , P40 to P4 3 (Note 3)
“L” average output current
P0 0 to P0 7, P1 0 to P1 7 , P40 to P4 3 (Note 3)
Timer input frequency
f(X IN ) = 8 MHz
CNTR 0 (P32), CNTR 1 (P33) (Note 4) f(X IN ) = 4 MHz
Use as clock synchro- f(XIN ) = 8 MHz
Serial I/O clock input frequency nous serial I/O mode f(XIN ) = 4 MHz
S CLK (P1 6) (Note 4)
Use as UART f(XIN ) = 8 MHz
mode
f(XIN ) = 4 MHz
Clock input oscillation frequency V CC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V
(Note 4)
V CC = 2.7 V to 4.5 V
Sub-clock input oscillation frequency (Notes 4, 5)
IOH (peak)
IOL (peak)
IOH (avg)
IOL (avg)
f(CNTR)
f(S CLK)
f(X IN )
f(X CIN)
Notes 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
1-198
Min.
4.5
2.7
Limits
Typ.
5.0
Max.
5.5
4.5
V CC
V CC
V CC
0.2VCC
0.25VCC
0.16VCC
0.12VCC
–30
–30
60
60
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
mA
mA
mA
mA
–10
mA
20
mA
–5
mA
10
mA
2
1
500
250
2
1
8
2.2VCC –2.0
50
MHz
MHz
kHz
kHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
kHz
0
0
0.8VCC
0.7VCC
0.8VCC
0
0
0
0
32
Unit
–40 °C to +85 °C for extended operating temperature version.
Except when P5 0 is used as XCIN.
The average output current I OH (avg) and I OL (avg) are the average value during a 100 ms.
The oscillation frequency is at 50 % duty cycle.
Set f(X CIN) < f(XIN)/3 when the sub-clock is used.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
Table 1.21.15 Electrical characteristics (7478 group)
(VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 °C to +85 ° C(Note), unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
V OH
V OL
V T+ – V T–
V T+ – V T–
V T+ – V T–
IIL
IIL
IIL
IIL
IIH
IIH
IIH
IIH
Parameter
“H” output voltage
P0 0 to P0 7 , P10 to P1 7
P4 0 to P4 3
“L” output voltage
P0 0 to P0 7 , P10 to P1 7
P4 0 to P4 3
Hysteresis P0 0 to P0 7
P3 0 to P3 3
Hysteresis RESET
Hysteresis P1 4 /RxD
P1 6 /SCLK
“L” input current
P0 0 to P0 7 , P10 to P1 7
P3 0 to P3 2 , P40 to P4 3
P5 0 to P5 3
Test conditions
V CC = 3 V, IOH = –1.5 mA
2.0
V
2.0
V
1.0
V
–5
–3
–1.0
–0.35
–5
–3
–5
–3
–5
–3
V
V
V
V
V
V
µA
µA
mA
mA
µA
µA
µA
µA
µA
µA
V CC = 5 V
5
µA
V CC = 3 V
3
µA
= 3 V
7
3.5
1.8
7.5
4
2
5
3
5
3
5
3
14
7
3.6
15
8
4
µA
µA
µA
µA
µA
µA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
= 5 V
30
80
µA
= 3 V
15
40
µA
= 3 V
2
1
0.5
4
2
1
mA
mA
mA
= 5 V
3
12
µA
= 3 V
2
8
µA
0.1
1
1
10
5.5
µA
µA
V
V CC = 5 V, IOL = 10 mA
V CC = 3 V, IOL = 3 mA
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
=
=
=
=
5
3
5
3
0.5
0.3
0.5
0.3
0.5
0.3
V
V
V
V
When used as RxD or S CLK
VI = 0 V
Not use pull-up transistor
VI = 0 V
Use pull-up transistor
V I = 0V
“L” input current
P2 0 to P2 7
“L” input current
X IN , RESET
“H” input current
P0 0 to P0 7 , P10 to P1 7
P3 0 to P3 2 , P40 to P4 3
P5 0 to P5 3
VI = 0 V
Not use as analog input
VI = 0 V
X IN is at stop mode
V I = V CC ,
Not use pull-up transistor
“H” input current P33
V I = V CC
“H” input current
P2 0 to P2 7
“H” input current
X IN , RESET
V I = V CC
Not use as analog input
V I = V CC
X IN is at stop mode
At system op- f(X IN ) = 8 MHz
eration,
f(X IN ) = 4 MHz
f(X IN ) = 8 MHz
f(X IN ) = 4 MHz
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
V CC
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
5
3
5
3
5
3
5
3
5
3
5
3
5
3
5
3
5
3
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
–0.25
–0.08
–0.5
–0.18
V
V
V
V
V
V
V CC = 5 V
V CC = 3 V
V CC = 5 V
V CC
At low-speed mode, Ta = 25°C, low- V CC
power mode, f (XCIN ) = 32 kHz, A-D
V CC
conversion is not executed
f(X IN ) = 8 MHz
V CC
At wait mode
f(X IN ) = 4 MHz
V CC
At wait mode, T a = 25°C, low- V CC
power mode, f (X CIN ) = 32
V CC
kHz
At stop mode, V CC = 5 V
RAM retention voltage
Unit
V
At system operation,
A-D conversion
is executed
V RAM
Max.
3.0
“L” input current P33
Power source current
Limits
Typ.
V CC = 5 V, IOH = –5 mA
A-D conversion
is not executed
ICC
Min.
= 5 V
Ta = 25 °C
Ta = 85 °C
Stop all oscillation
2.0
Note: –40 °C to +85 °C for extended operating temperature version.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-199
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
Table 1.21.16 A-D converter characteristics (7478 group)
(VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = AV SS = 0 V, Ta = –20 °C to +85 °C(Note 1), unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
—
—
Parameter
Test conditions
Min.
Limits
Typ.
Resolution
Absolute accuracy
T CONV
Conversion time
V REF
Reference input voltage
R LADDER
V IA
Ladder resistance value
Analog input voltage
V CC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, f(X IN ) = 8 MHz
V CC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, f(X IN ) = 4 MHz
0.5VCC
(Note 2)
2
0
5
Unit
Max.
8
±3
12.5
25
bits
LSB
µs
µs
V CC
V
10
V REF
kΩ
V
Notes 1: –40 °C to +85 °C for extended operating temperature version.
2: Set the VREF voltage to 0.5 V or more and 2 V or more. When using no A-D converter, connect
it to V CC.
1-200
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
1.21.2 Timing requirements, switching characteristics
(1) 7470/7471 group timing requirements, switching characteristics
Table 1.21.17 shows the timing requirements and switching characteristics of the 7470/7471 group.
Figure 1.21.1 shows the timing chart.
Table 1.21.17 Timing requirements and switching characteristics (7470/7471 group)
(V CC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, V SS = 0V, Ta = –20 °C to +85 °C, f(XIN) = 4 MHz)
Parameter
Symbol
tc(CLK)
tWH (CLK)
tWL (CLK)
tsu (SIN –CLK)
th (CLK-SIN )
td (CLK-SOUT )
Serial
Serial
Serial
Serial
Serial
Serial
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
Min.
1000
400
400
200
200
clock input cycle time
clock input “H” pulse width
clock input “L” pulse width
input set up time
input hold time
output delay time
Limits
Typ.
Max.
150
Unit
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
tc(CLK)
tWL(CLK)
tWH(CLK)
0.8VCC
CLK
0.8VCC
0.2VCC
0.8VCC
0.2VCC
tsu(SIN-CLK)
SIN
th(CLK-SIN)
0.8VCC
0.8VCC
0.2VCC
0.2VCC
td(CLK-S OUT)
SOUT
Fig. 1.21.1 Timing chart (7470/7471 group)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-201
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
(2) 7477/7478 group timing requirements, switching characteristics
Table 1.21.18 shows the timing requirements and switching characteristics of the 7477/7478 group.
Figure 1.21.2 shows the timing chart.
Table 1.21.18 Timing requirements and switching characteristics (7477/7478 group)
(VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, V SS = 0V, Ta = –20 °C to +85 °C(Note), f(XIN ) = 8 MHz)
Clock asynchronous
Clock synchronous
Symbol
Parameter
tc(SCLK )
tWH (SCLK )
tWL (SCLK)
tsu (RXD–S CLK )
th (SCLK -RXD)
td (SCLK -TXD)
tc(SCLK )
tWH (SCLK )
tWL (SCLK)
Serial
Serial
Serial
Serial
Serial
Serial
Serial
Serial
Serial
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
Min.
2000
880
880
160
80
clock input cycle time
clock input “H” pulse width
clock input “L” pulse width
input set up time
input hold time
output delay time
clock input cycle time
clock input “H” pulse width
clock input “L” pulse width
tc(SCLK)
tWL(SCLK)
tWH(S CLK)
0.8VCC
0.8VCC
0.2VCC
0.8VCC
0.2VCC
tsu(RXD-SCLK)
RXD
th(SCLK-RXD)
0.8VCC
0.8VCC
0.2VCC
0.2VCC
td(SCLK-TXD)
TXD
Fig. 1.21.2 Timing chart (7477/7478 group)
1-202
Max.
100
500
220
220
Note: –40 °C to +85 °C for extended operating temperature version.
SCLK
Limits
Typ.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Unit
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
1.21.3 Power source current standard characteristics
The power source current standard characteristics described in this section are mentioned as an characteristic
example of the 7470/7471/7477/7478 group but not guaranteed by us. For standard values, refer to
“1.21.1 Electrical characteristics.”
Figure 1.21.3 shows the power source current standard characteristics measuring circuit.
1
In ordinary mode (f(XIN ) = 8 MHz, 4 MHz)
2 In low-speed mode (f(XCIN ) = 32 kHz, 7471/7478 group)
M3747x
M3747x
ICC
ICC
VCC
VCC
VSS
A
0 V to 5.5 V
XIN
VSS
A
XOUT
XCIN XCOUT
0 V to 5.5 V
Fig. 1.21.3 Power source current standard characteristics measuring circuit
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-203
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
(1) 7470/7471 group power source current standard characteristics
Figure 1.21.4 to Figure 1.21.6 show the I CC - VCC characteristics of the 7470/7471 group.
[Measuring condition : 25 °C, f(X IN) = 8 MHz]
9.0
8.0
Power source current I CC [mA]
In ordinary mode
7.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
In wait mode
1.0
In stop mode
0.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
Power source voltage V CC [V]
Fig. 1.21.4 I CC – V CC characteristics (f(X IN ) = 8 MHz, 7470/7471 group)
Power source current I CC [mA]
[Measuring condition : 25 °C, f(XIN) = 4 MHz]
5.0
In ordinary mode
4.0
3.0
2.0
In wait mode
1.0
In stop mode
0.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
Power source voltage VCC [V]
Fig. 1.21.5 I CC – V CC characteristics (f(X IN ) = 4 MHz, 7470/7471 group)
1-204
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
6.0
7.0
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
[Measuring condition : 25 °C, f(XCIN) = 32 kHz]
Power source current I CC [µA]
40.0
In low-speed mode
30.0
20.0
10.0
In wait mode
In stop mode
0.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
Power source voltage VCC [V]
Fig. 1.21.6 I CC – V CC characteristics (f(X CIN) = 32 kHz, 7471 group)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-205
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
(2) 7477/7478 group power source current standard characteristics
Figure 1.21.7 to Figure 1.21.9 show the I CC - VCC characteristics of the 7477/7478 group.
[Measuring condition : 25 °C, f(X IN) = 8 MHz]
8.0
In ordinary mode
Power source current I CC [mA]
7.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
In wait mode
1.0
In stop mode
0.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
Power source voltage VCC [V]
Fig. 1.21.7 I CC – V CC characteristics (f(X IN ) = 8 MHz, 7477/7478 group)
[Measuring condition : 25 °C, f(X IN) = 4 kHz]
Power source current I CC [mA]
5.0
In ordinary mode
4.0
3.0
2.0
In wait mode
1.0
In stop mode
0.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
Power source voltage VCC [V]
Fig. 1.21.8 I CC – V CC characteristics (f(X IN ) = 4 MHz, 7477/7478 group)
1-206
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
6.0
7.0
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
[Measuring condition : 25 °C, f(XCIN ) = 32 kHz]
Power source current I CC [µA]
30.0
In low-speed mode
20.0
10.0
In wait mode
In stop mode
0.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
Power source voltage VCC [V]
Fig. 1.21.9 I CC – V CC characteristics (f(X CIN) = 32 kHz, 7478 group)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-207
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
1.21.4 Port standard characteristic
The port standard characteristics described in this section are mentioned as a characteristic example of
the 7470/7471/7477/7478 group but not guaranteed by us. For standard values, refer to “1.21.1 Electrical
characteristics.”
Figure 1.21.10 shows the port standard characteristic measuring circuits.
1 IOH–VOH characteristic
measuring circuit
2 IOL–VOL characteristic
M3747x
A
measuring circuit
M3747x
VCC
0 V to 5.5 V
3 IIL–VIL characteristic
measuring circuit
VCC
M3747x
A
IOL
P00
P00
IOH
P00
IIL
A
VSS
0 V to 5.5 V
VSS
Fig. 1.21.10 Port standard characteristic measuring circuits
1-208
VCC
0 V to 5.5 V
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
VSS
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
(1) 7470/7471 group port standard characteristic
Figure 1.21.11 to Figure 1.21.13 show the port standard characteristics of the 7470/7471 group.
[Measuring condition : Port P0 0, 25 °C]
–60.0
“H” output current I OH [mA]
–50.0
–40.0
VCC = 5 V
–30.0
–20.0
VCC = 3 V
–10.0
0.0
–5.0
–4.0
–3.0
–2.0
–1.0
0.0
“H” output voltage VOH –VCC [V]
Fig. 1.21.11 I OH – V OH characteristics of programmable I/O port (CMOS output)
P-channel side (7470/7471 group)
[Measuring condition : Port P0 0, 25 °C]
60.0
VCC = 5 V
“L” output current I OL [mA]
50.0
40.0
30.0
VCC = 3 V
20.0
10.0
0.0
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
“L” output voltage VOL [V]
Fig. 1.21.12 I OL – V OL characteristics of programmable I/O port (CMOS output)
N-channel side (7470/7471 group)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-209
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
[Measuring condition : Port P0 0, 25 °C]
–0.7
Supply current I IL [mA]
0.07/div
VCC = 5 V
VCC = 3 V
0.0
–5.0
–4.0
–3.0
–2.0
–1.0
Supply voltage VIL –VCC [V]
Fig. 1.21.13 I IL – VIL characteristics of programmable I/O port (CMOS output)
pull-up transistor (7470/7471 group)
1-210
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
0.0
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
(2) 7477/7478 group port standard characteristic
Figure 1.21.14 to Figure 1.21.16 show the port standard characteristics of the 7477/7478 group.
[Measuring condition : Port P0 0, 25 °C]
–60.0
“H” output current I OH [mA]
–50.0
VCC = 5 V
–40.0
–30.0
–20.0
VCC = 3 V
–10.0
0.0
–5.0
–4.0
–3.0
–2.0
–1.0
0.0
“H” output voltage VOH –VCC [V]
Fig. 1.21.14 I OH – V OH characteristics of programmable I/O port (CMOS output)
P-channel side (7477/7478 group)
[Measuring condition : Port P0 0, 25 °C]
60.0
VCC = 5 V
“L” output current I OL [mA]
50.0
40.0
30.0
20.0
VCC = 3 V
10.0
0.0
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
“L” output voltage VOL [V]
Fig. 1.21.15 I OL – V OL characteristics of programmable I/O port (CMOS)
N-channel side (7477/7478 group)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-211
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
[Measuring condition : Port P0 0, 25 °C]
–0.6
Supply current I IL [mA]
0.12/div
VCC = 5 V
VCC = 3 V
0.0
–5.0
–4.0
–3.0
–2.0
–1.0
Supply voltage VIL –VCC [V]
Fig. 1.21.16 I IL – VIL characteristics of programmable I/O port (CMOS output)
pull-up transistor (7477/7478 group)
1-212
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
0.0
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
1.21.5 A-D conversion standard characteristic
(1) Relative precision (7470/7471 group)
Figure 1.21.17 to Figure 1.21.18 show the A-D conversion standard characteristics on the relative
precision of the 7470/7471 group.
In the graph, the lower line indicates a deviation from the ideal value at the point where the output
code changes, namely, relative precision error (ERROR). For example, in Figure 1.21.17, the change
of “3F 16 to 4016 ” of the output code occurs ideally at the point of IN0 = 757.32 mV. However, since
the relative precision error is -3.567 mV, “757.32 - 3.567 = 753.753 mV” represents a measuring
change point.
In the graph, the upper line indicates an input voltage width (1 LSB WIDTH) in which the output code
is the same. For example, in Figure 1.21.17, since the measured value of input voltage width, when
the output code is “3F16 ”, is 10.701 mV, the differential nonlinear error on the relative precision
represents “10.701 -11.89 = -1.189 mV (-0.1 LSB)”.
Fig. 1.21.17 A-D conversion standard characteristics, relative precision error (1)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-213
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
Fig. 1.21.18 A-D conversion standard characteristics, relative precision error (2)
1-214
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
(2) Absolute precision
Figure 1.21.19 to Figure 1.21.23 show the A-D conversion standard characteristics on the absolute
precision of the 7470/7471/7477/7478 group.
In the graph, the lower line indicates a deviation from the ideal value at the point where the output
code changes, namely, absolute precision error (ERROR). For example, in Figure 1.21.17, the change
of “3F16 to 40 16 ” of the output code occurs ideally at the point of IN0 = 762 mV. However, since the
absolute precision error is -8.4 mV, “762 - 8.4 = 753.6 mV” represents the measuring change point.
In the graph, the upper line indicates an input voltage with (1 LSB WIDTH) in which the output code
is the same. For example, since the measured value of input voltage width, when the output code
is “3F16 ”, is 10.8 mV, the differential nonlinear error represents “10.8 - 12 = -1.2 mV (-0.1 LSB)”.
Fig. 1.21.19 A-D conversion standard characteristics, absolute precision error (1)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-215
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
Fig. 1.21.20 A-D conversion standared characteristics, absolute precision error (2)
1-216
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
Fig. 1.21.21 A-D conversion standard characteristics, absolute precision error (3)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-217
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
Fig. 1.21.22 A-D conversion standard characteristics, absolute precision error (4)
1-218
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
HARDWARE
1.21 Electrical characteristics
Fig. 1.21.23 A-D conversion standard characteristics, absolute precision error (5)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-219
CHAPTER 2
APPLICATION
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
I/O pins
Interrupts
Timers
Serial I/O
A-D converter
Reset
Oscillation circuit
Low-power
dissipation function
Countermeasures
against noise
Notes on programming
Differences between
7470/7471 group and
7477/7478 group
Example of application
circuit
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
2.1 I/O pins
7470
7471
7477
7478
2.1.1 I/O port
(1) Port register
Table 2.1.1 shows a memory allocation of port register corresponding to each port.
Table 2.1.1 Port register memory allocation
Address of port register
Port
7470 group 7471 group 7477 group 7478 group
P0
00C016 00C0 16 00C016 00C0 16
P1
00C216 00C2 16 00C216 00C2 16
P2
00C416 00C4 16 00C416 00C4 16
P3
00C616 00C6 16 00C616 00C6 16
P4
00C816 00C8 16 00C816 00C8 16
P5
–
00CA 16
–
00CA 16
Note: In the 7470/7477 group, P2 is 4 bits of b0
- b3 and P4 is 2 bits of b0 and b1.
In the 7471/7478 group, P5 is 4 bits of b0 b3.
In Chapter 2, each page describes the corresponding products by using the following table.
M37470Mx/Ex-XXXSP
M37471Mx/Ex-XXXSP/FP
M37477Mx/E8-XXXSP/FP, M37477Mx/E8TXXXSP/FP
M37478Mx/E8-XXXSP/FP, M37478Mx/E8TXXXSP/FP
7470
7471
7477
7478
✕
✕
Non-corresponding products
Corresponding products
2-2
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
(2) Port Pi direction register (i = 0 to 5)
7470
7471
7477
7478
Switching between input and output for programmable I/O ports is performed by the port direction
register corresponding to each port. Table 2.1.2 shows a memory allocation of the port direction
register corresponding to each port and Figure 2.1.1 shows an example of port direction register
setting.
Table 2.1.2 Port direction register memory
allocation
Address of port direction register
Port
7470 group 7471 group 7477 group 7478 group
P0
00C1 16 00C116 00C1 16 00C116
P1
00C3 16 00C316 00C3 16 00C316
P2
00C5 16 00C516
–
–
P3
–
–
–
–
P4
00C9 16 00C916 00C9 16 00C916
P5
–
–
–
–
Note: In the 7470 group, P2 is 4 bits of b0 - b3
and P4 is 2 bits of b0 and b1.
In the 7477 group, P4 is 2 bits of b0 and
b1.
b7
When “6A 16” (
b0
0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 ) is set in the Port P0 direction register
Port P0 I/O direction
P07
P06
P05
P04
P03
P02
P01
P00
Input Output Output Input Output Input Output Input
Fig. 2.1.1 Example of port direction register setting
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2-3
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
(3) Pull-up control register
7470
7471
7477
7478
The ports shown in Table 2.1.3 can be pulled up by software. A pull-up operation can be performed
by the P0 pull-up control register (address 00D0 16 ) and P1-P5 pull-up control register (address
00D1 16).
Table 2.1.3 I/O ports that permit pull-up by software
Register
Port P0 pull-up control register
Port P1-P5 pull-up control register*
Device
Control by 1-bit unit
Control by 4-bit unit
7470 group
P0
P1, P2, P4
7471 group
P0
P1, P2, P4, P5
7477 group
P0
P1, P4
7478 group
P0
P1, P4, P5
* : In the 7470/7477 group, the P1-P4 pull-up control register is arranged.
Note: In the 7470 group, P2 is 4 bits of b0 - b3 and P4 is 2 bits of b0 and b4.
In the 7477 group, P4 is 2 bits of b0 and b1.
In the 7471/7478 group, P5 is 4 bits of b0 - b3.
2-4
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
2.1.2 Notes on use
7470
7471
7477
7478
When using I/O pins, take the following points into consideration.
(1) Double function ports
Table 2.1.4 shows double function ports. For setting, refer to a structure of each register.
Table 2.1.4 Double function port and control register
Control register
Double function port
Pin
7470/7471 group 7477/7478 group
7477/7478 group
7470/7471 group
Timer 12 mode register (T12M: Address 00F8 16 )
T0
P1 2
T1
Timer 34 mode register (T34M: Address 00F9 16 )
P1 3
Serial I/O control register
Serial I/O mode register
S IN
RX D
P1 4
(SIOSTS: Address 00E216 )
(SM: Address 00DC 16 )
S OUT
T XD
Serial I/O mode register
Serial I/O control register
P1 5
CLK
S CLK
Serial I/O mode register
Serial I/O control register
P1 6
Serial
I/O
mode
register
Serial I/O control register
P1 7
S RDY
A-D control register (ADCON: Address 00D9 16 )
IN0
P2 0
IN1
A-D control register
P2 1
IN2
A-D control register
P2 2
IN3
A-D control register
P2 3
IN4
A-D control register
P2 4
IN5
A-D control register
P2 5
IN6
A-D control register
P2 6
IN7
A-D control register
P2 7
INT0
Edge polarity selection register (EG: Address 00D4 16 )
P3 0
INT1
Edge polarity selection register
P3 1
CNTR0
Edge polarity selection register, Timer 12 mode register
P3 2
CNTR1
Edge polarity selection register, Timer 34 mode register
P3 3
X CIN
CPU mode register (CPUM: Address 00FB 16 )
P5 0
X COUT
CPU mode register
P5 1
Note: In the 7470/7477 group, P2 is 4 bits of b0 to b3. The 7470/7477 group is not provided with P5.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2-5
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
(2)Description of Pull-up control
7470
7471
7477
7478
,
,
,
,
When pulling up a port by software, take the following points into consideration.
● When P1 is used in the serial I/O mode, the pull-up settings corresponding to P14 to P17 are
invalidated. (Pull-up is impossible.)
● Pull-up control is exerted in the following bit units.
P0
: 1-bit unit
P1 to P5 : 4-bit unit
When using an external pull-up resistor and software pull-up control for the same port in combined
form, use P0, which can be controlled in bit units.
(3)Notes on external circuit design for I/O ports
1 When designing an external circuit for I/O ports, be sure to set the following items within the
standard value range.
● Sum output current
● Peak output current
● Average output current
Figure 2.1.2 shows the example of external circuit design for I/O port.
VCC=5 V
M3747x
P00
IOL0=12 mA
P01
IOL1=12 mA
P02
IOL2=12 mA
“L” sum output current Maximum standard value
< 60 mA
IOL0+IOL1+IOL2=36 mA
R0=250 Ω
✽
R1=250 Ω
✽
R2=250 Ω
✽
✽: LED (V F= 2 V) used
“L” peak output current
IOL0=IOL1=IOL2=12 mA
< 20 mA
“L” average output current (within 100 ms)
12 mA✕10 ms✕5
= 6 mA < 10 mA
100 ms
Ports P0 0 – P02
Timing of LED on
(duty ratio: 50 %)
10 ms
10 ms
Fig. 2.1.2 Example of external circuit design for I/O port
2 When performing multiple key-in operations by forming a key matrix, design in consideration of
the port input current for multiple key-in operations.
For other notes, refer to “1.10 I/O Pins.”
2-6
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
2.2 Interrupts
7470
7471
7477
7478
2.2.1 Memory allocation
Figure 2.2.1 shows a memory map of interrupt related registers.
Address
00D4 16
Edge polarity selection register (EG)
00FC 16
Interrupt request register 1 (IR1)
00FD 16
Interrupt request register 2 (IR2)
00FE 16
Interrupt control register 1 (IE1)
00FF 16
Interrupt control register 2 (IE2)
Fig. 2.2.1 Memory map of interrupt related registers
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2-7
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
2.2.2. Processor status register (PS)
7470
7471
7477
7478
The Processor status register consists of 8 bits.
Figure 2.2.2 shows the structure of the Processor status register. Bit 2 related to interrupts is described
below.
2 Interrupt disable flag: b2
The interrupt disable flag controls the acceptance of interrupt requests other than the BRK instruction.
When this flag is “1,” the acceptance of interrupt requests is disabled. When the flag is “0,” the
acceptance of interrupt requests is enabled. The instruction to set this flag to “1” is the SEI instruction
and the instruction to set this flag to “0” is the CLI instruction.
At a branch to an interrupt processing routine, this flag is automatically set to “1,” thereby multiple
interrupts are disabled. To use multiple interrupt, set this flag to “0” by using the CLI instruction in
the interrupt processing routine.
Processor status register
b7
b2
Undefined
1
b0
Undefined
Processor status register (PS)
b
b7
The value in
Flag name
0
C : Carry flag
1
Z : Zero flag
2
I : Interrupt disable flag
3
D : Decimal mode flag
4
B : Break flag
5
T : Index X mode flag
6
V : Overflow flag
7
N : Negative flag
b0
denotes the initial value immediately after reset release.
Fig. 2.2.2 Structure of Processor status register
2-8
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
2.2.3 Application example
7470
7471
7477
7478
(1)External event detection by CNTR
To detect a rising edge or a falling edge of the level of an input pin by using a pin other than the
INT0 pin and the INT 1 pin, it is possible to use the CNTR pin. Examples of use are shown below.
● When the CNTR 0 pin is used
<Interrupt source>
CNTR interrupt +1
<Setting>
1 Set the edge polarity selection register.
• Select a CNTR 0 edge polarity.
• Select CNTR0 as an interrupt source.
2 Clear the CNTR interrupt request bit to “0.”
3 Execute the NOP instruction.
4 Set the CNTR interrupt enable bit to “1.”
● When the CNTR 1 pin is used
<Interrupt source>
Timer 3 interrupt +1,+2
<Setting>
1 Stop the count operation of timer 3.
2 Select CNTR1 as a count source of timer 3.
3 Select a CNTR1 edge polarity by the Edge polarity selection register.
4 Set timer 3 to “0.”
5 Clear the timer 3 interrupt request bit to “0.”
6 Set the timer 3 interrupt enable bit to “1.”
7 Start the count operation of timer 3.
+1: It is possible to use the CNTR 0 pin for a timer interrupt and the CNTR 1 pin for a CNTR interrupt.
+2: It is possible to use timer 4 as an interrupt source.
2.2.4 Notes on use
For notes on use, refer to “1.11 Interrupts.”
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2-9
APPLICATION
2.3 Timers
2.3 Timers
2.3.1 Memory allocation
Figure 2.3.1 shows a memory map of timer related registers.
Address
00D416
00D516
00D616
Edge polarity selection register (EG)
00F016
00F116
00F216
00F316
Timer 1 (T1)
Timer 2 (T2)
Timer 3 (T3)
Timer 4 (T4)
00F716
00F816
00F916
00FA16
00FB16
00FC16
00FD16
00FE16
00FF16
Timer FF register (TF)
Timer 12 mode register (T12M)
Timer 34 mode register (T34M)
Timer mode register 2 (TM2)
CPU mode register (CPUM)
Interrupt request register 1 (IR1)
Input latch register (ILR)
Interrupt request register 2 (IR2)
Interrupt control register 1 (IE1)
Interrupt control register 2 (IE2)
Fig. 2.3.1 Memory map of timer related registers
2-10
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
7470
7471
7477
7478
,
,
,
,
APPLICATION
2.3 Timers
2.3.2 Application example
7470
7471
7477
7478
,
,
,
,
(1) Each mode of timer
For timers 1, 2, 3 and 4, the following 5 operation modes are available. For each timer mode and
the details of it, refer to “1.12 Timers.”
1
2
3
4
5
Timer mode
Event counter mode
Pulse output mode
External pulse width measurement mode
PWM mode
Each timer mode has relation to the T0, T 1, CNTR 0 and CNTR 1 pins as shown in Table 2.3.1. There
are some modes that cannot be used for some combinations of timer and pin. Consider this when
designing timers.
Table 2.3.1 Relation between timer-used pins and modes
Pin
T0
T1
CNTR0
Timer
Pulse output
×
Event counter mode
Timer 1
mode
Timer 2
×
Timer 3
×
Timer 4
×
×
PWM
mode
Pulse output
mode
CNTR1
×
×
×
×
Event counter mode
Event counter mode
External pulse width
measurement mode External pulse width
measurement mode
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2-11
APPLICATION
2.3 Timers
(2) Example of use of each mode
7470
7471
7477
7478
×
,
×
,
An example of use of each mode is shown below.
1 Timer mode: One-second measurement (timer function)
Outline: Divide the clock by the timer. Count one second by a timer 1 interrupt that is generated
at an internal of 0.4 ms. Cause the timer to count up at each second.
Specifications: Divide f(X CIN) = 32 kHz by timer 1 to generate an interrupt. Check the value of
the counter that counts with an timer 1 interrupt by the main routine. If one
second has elapsed, execute timer count-up processing.
Figure 2.3.2 shows an example of control procedure.
2-12
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timers
7470
7471
7477
7478
×
,
×
,
RESET
Initialization
Set the interrupt disable flag (each interrupt disabled)
Clear the timer 1 interrupt enable bit
(timer 1 interrupt disabled)
Set the timer 12 mode register
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 1 0 1 T12M (Address 00F8 16)
Timer 1 count stop
Timer 1 count source ← Internal clock
Timer 1 internal clock count source
← f(XCIN)
Set the CPU mode register
✕ ✕ 1 1 ✕ ✕ 0 0 CPUM (Address 00FB 16)
Fixed to “0”
Select X CIN, XCOUT
XCOUT drive capacity ← High power
● For concrete time, ask the oscillator manufacture for information.
7F16
=
Wait the f(X CIN) oscillation stabilizing time
Set the Timer 1 to “7F 16”
● 1 second = 1/32 kHz ✕ (127+1) ✕ 250
Dividing ratio
Count by interrupt processing
Set the Timer 12 mode register
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 1 0 0 T12M (Address 00F8 16)
Timer 1 count start
Clear the timer 1 interrupt request bit
Set the timer 1 interrupt enable bit
(Timer 1 interrupt enabled)
Interrupt at every 0.4 ms
Timer 1 interrupt
Clear the interrupt disable flag (each interrupt enabled)
1 second counter + 1
Clock stop ?
Y
RTI
N
1 second has elapsed ?
(1 second counter = 250 ?)
N
Y
Clear 1 second counter
Clock count up (second–year)
✽
Processing for timer
set is completed ?
N
Y
Set the Timer 1 to “7F 16”
● When re-starting the clock from zero second
after completing to set the clock, set timers again.
Clear the Timer 1 interrupt request bit
Clear 1 second counter
● Set the timer so that every processing within the loop marked ✽ may
be executed in a period of 1 second or less.
Fig. 2.3.2 Example of control procedure [Clock function]
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2-13
APPLICATION
2.3 Timers
2 Event counter mode: Frequency measurement
7470
7471
7477
7478
,
,
,
,
Outline: The frequency of the pulse input to the CNTR 0 pin (“H” active) is measured by the
number of events in a certain period.
Specifications: A count operation is started specifying the count source of timer 1 as CNTR0.
Timer 2 (count source: f(XIN)/64) detects 1 ms and the frequency of the pulse
input to CNTR 0 is calculated from the number of events counted within 1 ms.
Note: The number of events of an input pulse is specified as 255 or less within 1 ms.
Figure 2.3.3 shows an example of measurement method of frequency and Figure 2.3.4 shows an
example of control procedure.
Timer 2 interrupt request bit
1 ms has elapsed
Count start
Count stop
CNTR 0
Count start
X times
Count stop
● Pulse frequency of CNTR 0 input = X times
1 ms kHz
Fig. 2.3.3 Example of measurement method of frequency
2-14
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timers
7470
7471
7477
7478
,
,
,
,
Frequency measurement routine
Clear the timer 2 interrupt enable bit
(Timer 2 interrupt disabled)
Set the Timer 12 mode register
✕ ✕ ✕ 1 ✕ ✕ ✕ 1 T12M (Address 00F8 16)
Timer 1 count stop
Timer 2 count stop
Set the Edge polarity selection register
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 1 ✕ ✕ EG (Address 00D4 16)
CNTR 0 rising edge selected
Set the Timer 12 mode register
0 1 0 1 ✕ ✕ 1 1 T12M (Address 00F8 16)
Timer 1 count source ← CNTR 0
Timer 2 count source ← Internal clock
Timer 2 internal clock count source
←f(XIN)/64
Set the Timer 1 to “FF 16”
Set the Timer 2 to “7C 16”
Clear the timer 2 interrupt request bit
✽ According to required accuracy, the event count
value within 1 ms is detected repeatedly, and its
results are averaged.
Set the timer 2 interrupt enable bit
(Timer 2 interrupt enabled)
Set the Timer 12 mode register
0 1 0 0 ✕ ✕ 1 0 T12M (Address 00F8 16)
Timer 1 count start
Timer 2 count start
Timer 2 interrupt
Set the Timer 12 mode register
0 1 0 1 ✕ ✕ 1 1 T12M (Address 00F8 16)
Timer 1 count stop
Timer 2 count stop
Read timer 1
(Timer 1 set value FF 16) – (Timer 1 read value)
← Event count value within 1 ms
RTS
RTI
Fig. 2.3.4 Example of control procedure [Frequency measurement]
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2-15
APPLICATION
2.3 Timers
3 Pulse output mode: Piezoelectric buzzer output
7470
7471
7477
7478
,
,
,
,
Outline: The pulse output function of the timer is applied for a piezoelectric buzzer output.
Specifications: A square wave obtained by dividing the clock f(XIN) = 8 MHz into about 2 kHz is
output from the T 0 pin. While the buzzer output stops, the level of the T0 pin is
fixed at “H.”
Figure 2.3.5 shows an example of a peripheral circuit. Figure 2.3.6 shows a connection of the timer
and setting of the division ratio. Figure 2.3.7 shows an example of control procedure.
While the piezoelectric buzzer output stops, the “H” level is output.
M3747x
T0
250 µs 250 µs
Set the division ratio so that the underflow period of
timer 1 may be equal to this value.
Fig. 2.3.5 Example of a peripheral circuit [Pulse output mode]
f(XIN)
8MHz
Fix
Timer 1
1/16
1/125
1/2
Fig. 2.3.6 Connection of timer and setting of division ratio
2-16
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
T0
APPLICATION
2.3 Timers
7470
7471
7477
7478
,
,
,
,
RESET
Initialization
Set the interrupt disable flag (each interrupt disabled)
Clear the timer 1 interrupt enable bit
(Timer 1 interrupt disabled)
Set the Timer 12 mode register
✻ A piezoelectric buzzer output stops.
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 1 0 0 1 T12M (Address 00F8 16)
Timer 1 count stop
Timer 1 count source ← Internal clock
Timer 1 internal clock count source
← f(XIN)/16
T0 output selected
Set the Timer mode register 2
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 1 TM2 (Address 00FA 16)
Timer 1 division flip flop set enabled
Set the Timer FF register
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 0 TF (Address 00F7 16)
Timer 1 division flip flop initial value 0
Set the port P1 2 as an output
Port P1 2 ← “H”
Set the Timer 1 to “7C 16”
8 MHz
16 ✕ (124+1) ✕ 2
=
Set the Timer 1 interrupt enable bit
(Timer 1 interrupt enabled)
✻ 2 kHz =
Timer 1 overflow divided by 2
7C16
Count by interrupt processing
Fixed dividion ratio
Clear the interrupt disable flag (each interrupt enabled)
Main processing
✻ A piezoelectric buzzer request generated in the
main processing is processed in the output unit.
Output unit
A piezoeletric buzzer is requested ?
N (= No request)
✻ Buzzer output stop
Set the Timer 12 mode register
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 1 0 0 1 T12M (Address 00F8 16)
Timer 1 count stop
Port P1 2 ← “H”
Y (= 0 Request)
N
Immediately after no request?
Y
✻ Buzzer output start
Set the Timer 1 to “7C 16”
Set the Timer 12 mode register
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 1 0 0 0 T12M (Address 00F8 16)
Timer 1 count start
Fig. 2.3.7 Example of control procedure [Piezoelectric buzzer output]
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2-17
APPLICATION
2.3 Timers
4 Pulse width measurement mode: Feedback control of phase control
signal
7470
7471
7477
7478
,
,
,
,
Outline: The phase control signal is adjusted by using the pulse width measurement mode.
Specifications: The M3747x controls a load by phase control. At this time, the width of the pulse
output from the load as a feedback signal is measured. With this result, the control
over the load is compensated.
Figure 2.3.8 shows an example of peripheral circuit and Figure 2.3.9 shows an example of control
procedure.
M3747x
CNTR0
Load
Port
VAC
Fig. 2.3.8 Example of peripheral circuit [Pulse width measurement mode]
2-18
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timers
7470
7471
7477
7478
,
,
,
,
Pulse width measurement routine
Set the Timer 34 mode register
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 1 ✕ ✕ ✕ T34M (Address 00F9 16)
Timer 4 count stop
Set the Edge polarity selection register
✕ ✕ ✕ 0 ✕ 0 ✕ ✕ EG (Address 00D4 16)
Select the measurement of CNTR 0 “H” width
Interrupt ← CNTR 0 selected
Set the Timer 34 mode register
✕ 1 ✕ ✕ 1 ✕ ✕ ✕ T34M (Address 00F9 16)
Timer 4 count source
← select according to an input pulse
External pulse width
measurement mode selected
Set the Timer 4 to “FF 16”
Clear the CNTR interrupt request bit
Set the Timer 34 mode register
✕ 1 ✕ ✕ 0 ✕ ✕ ✕ T34M (Address 00F9 16)
Timer 4 count start
CNTR interrupt request ?
Y
N
✻ Measurement completed
Set the Timer 34 mode register
✕ 1 ✕ ✕ 1 ✕ ✕ ✕ T34M (Address 00F9 16)
Timer 4 count stop
Read Timer 4
(Timer 4 set value FF 16) – (Timer 4 read value)
← Input pulse “H” width measurement value
RTS
Fig. 2.3.9 Example of control procedure [Pulse width measurement mode]
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2-19
APPLICATION
2.3 Timers
5 PWM mode: Analog output
7470
7471
7477
7478
,
,
,
,
Outline: An analog output is performed by using the PWM function of the timer.
Specifications: A count source of Timer 3 and Timer 4 is selected and a PWM waveform is output
from the T 1 pin. The PWM waveform is converted into an analog voltage by the
external circuit of the T 1 pin, and then this voltage is output.
Note: The analog voltage to be output varies depending on the duty of the PWM waveform.
Figure 2.3.10 shows an example of peripheral circuit and Figure 2.3.11 shows an example of
control procedure.
M3747x
3:2
5V
T1
0
Fig. 2.3.10 Example of peripheral circuit [PWM mode]
2-20
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timers
7470
7471
7477
7478
,
,
,
,
Analog output routine
Set the Timer 34 mode register
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 1 ✕ ✕ 1 T34M (Address 00F9 16)
Timer 3 count stop
Timer 4 count stop
Set port P13 as an output
Set the Timer 34 mode register
1 ✕ ✕ ✕ 1 ✕ ✕ 1 T34M (Address 00F9 16)
Select timer 3 count source
Select timer 4 count source
Select T 1 output
Set the Timer 3
Set the Timer 4
Set the Timer mode register 2
1 ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ TM2 (Address 00FA 16)
Select PWM mode
Set the Timer 34 mode register
1 ✕ ✕ ✕ 0 ✕ ✕ 0 T34M (Address 00F9 16)
Timer 3 count start
Timer 4 count start
RTS
Fig. 2.3.11 Example of control procedure [PWM mode]
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2-21
APPLICATION
2.3 Timers
2.3.3 Notes on use
7470
7471
7477
7478
,
,
,
,
2 When using a 16-bit counter by using two timers, take the following points into consideration
according to “1.12.5 Notes on use (2).”
●The timing at which the timer value and the read value change, when two 8-bit timers are
connected in series, is shown in Figure 2.3.12, taking the case where timer 1 and timer 2 are
connected as an example (When Timer 1 and Timer 2 are connected and the set value of the
Timer 1 is 2 16 and the set value of the Timer 2 is 1 16).
The count source of timer 2 is the overflow signal of timer 1. In this case, the read value of timer
2 changes at the fall of the count source. When Timer 1 and Timer 2 are read continuously as
a 16-bit counter, the count source of timer 2 changes at the falling edge of the count source of
timer 1, so the A section can not be distinguished from the B section. Likewise, the C section
cannot be distinguished from the D section.
Timer 1 count source
Timer 1 value
Timer 1 read value
Timer 1 interrupt request
1
2
0
FF
1
0
1
FF
0
1
FF
0
1
FF
0
1
FF
0
1
FF
0
1
0
Writing to timer 1
Timer 2 count source
Timer 2 value
0
FF
A
Timer 2 read value
Timer 2 interrupt request
1
0
B C
0
FF
D
FF
0
Writing to timer 2
Fig. 2.3.12 Timing at which timer value and read value change in the case where two timers are
connected in series
2 For other notes on use, refer to “1.12 timers.”
2-22
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.4 Serial I/O
2.4 Serial I/O
7470
7471
7477
7478
×
×
2.4.1 7470/7471 group memory allocation
Figure 2.4.1 shows a memory map of serial I/O related registers in the 7470/7471 group.
Address
00DC16
00DD16
00DE16
Serial I/O mode register (SM)
Serial I/O register (SIO)
Serial I/O counter
Byte counter
00FC16
00FD16
00FE16
00FF16
Interrupt request register 1 (IR1)
)
Interrupt control register 1 (IE1)
Fig. 2.4.1 Memory map of serial I/O related registers in 7470/7471 group
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2-23
APPLICATION
2.4 Serial I/O
2.4.2 Application example
7470
7471
7477
7478
×
×
(1) Clock synchronous serial I/O mode
Outline: Clock synchronous communication is performed among the 7470/7471 group.
Specifications: M3747x 1 ……Transmit side in half-duplex communication
• Synchronous clock: f(X IN)/16
• Port P1 7 is used as an S RDY signal input pin.
M3747x 2 ……Receive side in half-duplex communication
• Synchronous clock: External clock
• SRDY signal output
Figure 2.4.2 shows an example of connections and Figure 2.4.3 shows an example of control
procedure.
Use
→ Full-duplex communication
No use → Half-duplex communication
M3747x 1
M3747x 2
P17
SRDY
CLK
CLK
SOUT
SIN
SIN
SOUT
Fig. 2.4.2 Example of connections [Clock synchronous serial I/O mode, 7470/7471 group]
2-24
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.4 Serial I/O
7470
M3747x 1
7471
7477
7478
×
×
M3747x 2
Clear the serial I/O interrupt enable bit
(Serial I/O interrupt disabled)
Clear the serial I/O interrupt enable bit
(Serial I/O interrupt disabled)
Set port P1 7 to input
Set port P1 4 to input
Set the Serial I/O mode register
0 0 ✕ 0 1 1 0 1
Set the Serial I/O mode register
SM (Address 00DC 16)
Internal clock ← f(XIN)/16
Synchronous clock ← Internal clock
Select S OUT, CLK
Select port P1 7
–
Mode ← Ordinary mode
CMOS output
0 0 0 1 1 0 ✕ ✕ SM (Address 00DC 16)
–
Synchronous clock ← External clock
Select S OUT, CLK
SRDY signal output
Select S RDY signal
Mode ← Ordinary mode
CMOS output
Clear the serial I/O interrupt request bit
Clear the serial I/O interrupt request bit
Set the serial I/O interrupt enable bit
(Serial I/O interrupt enabled)
Set the serial I/O interrupt enable bit
(Serial I/O interrupt enabled)
Port P1 7 = “L” ?
N
Write the transmit data into the Serial I/O register
(Write the dummy data in the half-duplex communication)
Y
Write the transmit data into the Serial I/O register
Serial I/O interrupt
Serial I/O interrupt
Fig. 2.4.3 Example of control procedure [Clock synchronous serial I/O mode, 7470/7471 group]
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2-25
APPLICATION
2.4 Serial I/O
(2)Byte specification mode
7470
7471
7477
7478
×
×
Outline: Among the 7470/7471 group, transfer is performed for two or more microcomputers by
using the clock synchronous byte specification mode.
Specifications: Transmit side M3747x 1
• Synchronous clock: f(XIN)/32
• Port P1 7 is used as an S RDY signal input pin.
• Port P10 is used as an transmit preparation command signal output pin.
Receive side M3747x 2 , M3747x 3 , M3747x 4
• Synchronous clock: External clock
• SARDY signal output
• Port P10 is used as an transmit preparation command signal output pin.
Figure 2.4.4 shows an example of connections and Figure 2.4.5 and 2.4.6 show an example of
control procedure.
Transmit side (M3747x 1 )
Serial I/O mode register
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
• Set port P1 7 as an input
• Connect a pull-up transistor to port P1 7
• Set port P1 0 as an output
(Port P1 0: Transmit preparation
command signal)
P17
CLK
SOUT
P10
SARDY
CLK
Serial data
Transmit/receive preparation command signal
SRDY(SARDY) CLK
SIN
P10
• Set port P1 0 as an input
(Port P1 0: Transmit/receive preparation
command signal)
• Set port P1 4 as an input
SRDY(SA RDY) CLK
Serial I/O mode register
1
1
1
1
1
0
P10
SIN
• Set port P1 0 as an input
(Port P1 0: Transmit/receive preparation
command signal)
• Set port P1 4 as an input
SRDY(SARDY) CLK
Serial I/O mode register
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
SIN
Serial I/O mode register
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
Byte counter (Initial value) = 0
Byte counter (Initial value) = 1
Byte counter (Initial value) = 2
Receive side 1 (M3747x 2 )
Receive side 2 (M3747x 3 )
Receive side 3 (M3747x 4 )
Fig. 2.4.4 Example of connections [Byte specification mode, 7470/7471 group]
2-26
P10
• Set port P1 0 as an input
(Port P1 0: Transmit/receive preparation
command signal)
• Set port P1 4 as an input
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.4 Serial I/O
7470
Transmit side (M3747x 1 )
7471
7478
×
×
Receive side 1 (M3747x 2 )
Clear the serial I/O interrupt enable bit
(Serial I/O interrupt disabled)
Clear the serial I/O interrupt enable bit
(Serial I/O interrupt disabled)
Set port P1 7 as an input
Set port P1 4 as an input
Connect a pull-up transistor to port P17
Set port P1 0 as an input
Set the Serial I/O mode register
Set port P1 0 as an output
1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
Set the serial I/O mode register
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
7477
SM (Address 00DC 16)
Internal clock ← f(XIN)/32
Synchronous clock ← Internal clock
Select S OUT, CLK
Select port P1 7
–
Mode ← Ordinary mode
CMOS output
SM (Address 00DC 16)
–
Synchronous clock ← External clock
Select S OUT, CLK
Select S RDY signal output pin.
Select SA RDY signal
Mode ← Byte specify mode
N-channel open-drain output
Clear the serial I/O interrupt request bit
Set the serial I/O interrupt enable bit
(Serial I/O interrupt enabled)
Clear the serial I/O interrupt request bit
Set the serial I/O interrupt enable bit
(Serial I/O interrupt enabled)
Transmit preparation
signal port P1 0 ← “L” ?
Transmit preparation signal port P10 ← “L”
N
Y
Port P1 7 = “H” ?
N
Set the initial
value of “0” of the receive side 1 in the byte counter
ÉoÉCÉgÉJÉEÉìÉ^Ç…éÛêMë§ÇPÇÃèâä˙ílÇOÇÉZÉbÉg
Write the dummy data into the Serial I/O register
Y
Transmit preparation signal port P10 ← “H”
Write the transmit data to receive side 1
into the Serial I/O register
Serial I/O interrupt
Serial I/O interrupt
Write the transmit data to receive side 2
into the Serial I/O register
Serial I/O interrupt
Write the transmit data to receive side 3
into the Serial I/O register
Serial I/O interrupt
Fig. 2.4.5 Example of control procedure (1) [Byte specification mode, 7470/7471 group]
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2-27
APPLICATION
2.4 Serial I/O
7470
7471
7478
×
×
Receive side 3 (M3747x 4 )
Receive side 2 (M3747x 3 )
Clear the serial I/O interrupt enable bit
(Serial I/O interrupt disabled)
Clear the serial I/O interrupt enable bit
(Serial I/O interrupt disabled)
Set port P1 4 as an input
Set port P1 4 as an input
Set port P1 0 as an input
Set port P1 0 as an input
Set the Serial I/O mode register
Set the Serial I/O mode register
1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
7477
SM (Address 00DC 16)
–
Synchronous clock ← External clock
Select S OUT, CLK
Select S RDY signal output pin.
Select SA RDY signal
Mode ← Byte specify mode
N-channel open-drain output
1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
SM (Address 00DC 16)
–
Synchronous clock ← External clock
Select S OUT, CLK
Select S RDY signal output pin
Select SA RDY signal
Mode ← Byte specify mode
N-channel open-drain output
Clear the serial I/O interrupt request bit
Clear the serial I/O interrupt request bit
Set the serial I/O interrupt enable bit
(Serial I/O interrupt enabled)
Set the serial I/O interrupt enable bit
(Serial I/O interrupt enabled)
Transmit preparation
signal port P1 0 ← “L” ?
N
Transmit preparation
signal port P1 0 ← “L” ?
N
Y
Y
Set the initial
value of “1” of the receive side 2 in the Byte counter
ÉoÉCÉgÉJÉEÉìÉ^Ç…éÛêMë§ÇPÇÃèâä˙ílÇOÇÉZÉbÉg
Set the initial value of “2” of the receive side 3 in the Byte counter
Write the dummy data into the Serial I/O register
Write the dummy data into the Serial I/O register
Serial I/O interrupt
Serial I/O interrupt
Fig. 2.4.6 Example of control procedure (2) [Byte specification mode, 7470/7471 group]
2-28
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.4 Serial I/O
2.4.3 7477/7478 group memory allocation
7470
7471
×
×
7477
7478
Figure 2.4.7 shows a memory map of serial I/O related registers in the 7477/7478 group.
Address
00E016
00E116
00E216
00E316
00E416
Transmit/receive buffer register (TB/RB)
Serial I/O status register (SIOSTS)
Serial I/O control register (SIOCON)
UART control register (UARTCON)
Baud rate generator (BRG)
00FC16 Interrupt request register 1 (IR1)
00FD16
00FE16 Interrupt control register 1 (IE1)
00FF16
Fig. 2.4.7 Memory map of serial I/O related registers in 7477/7478 group
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2-29
APPLICATION
2.4 Serial I/O
2.4.4 Application examples
7470
7471
×
×
7477
7478
(1) Clock synchronous serial I/O mode
Outline: Clock synchronous communication is performed among the 7477/7478 group.
Specifications: M3747x 1 ……Transmit side in half-duplex communication.
• Synchronous clock: BRG output (f(XIN)/4 or f(X IN)/16)/4.
• Port P17 is used as an S RDY signal input pin.
M3747x 2 ……Receive side in half-duplex communication
• Synchronous clock: External clock
• SRDY signal output
Figure 2.4.8 shows an example of connections and Figure 2.4.9 shows an example of control
procedure.
Use → Full-duplex communication
No use → Half-duplex communication
M3747x 1
M3747x 2
P17
SRDY
SCLK
SCLK
TxD
RxD
RxD
TxD
Fig. 2.4.8 Example of connections [Clock synchronous serial I/O mode, 7477/7478 group]
2-30
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.4 Serial I/O
7470
7471
×
×
7477
7478
M3747x 2
M3747x 1
Clear the serial I/O transmit interrupt enable bit
(Serial I/O transmit interrupt disable)
Clear the serial I/O receive interrupt enable bit
(Serial I/O receive interrupt disable)
Clear the serial I/O transmit interrupt enable bit
(Serial I/O transmit interrupt disabled)
Clear the serial I/O receive interrupt enable bit
(Serial I/O receive interrupt disabled)
Set the Serial I/O control register
Set baud rate generator
Set port P1 7 as an input
Set the Serial I/O control register
1 1 1 1 ✕ 0 0 ✕ SIOCON (Address 00E2 16)
Select BRG count source
Synchronous clock ← BRG output divided by 4
SRDY output disabled
Select transmit interrupt source
Transmit enabled
Receive enabled
Clock synchronous serial I/O selected
Serial I/O enabled
NOP
Clear the serial I/O transmit interrupt request bit
Clear the serial I/O receive interrupt request bit
Set the serial I/O transmit interrupt enable bit
(Serial I/O transmit interrupt enable)
Set the serial I/O receive interrupt enable bit
(Serial I/O receive interrupt enable)
1 1 1 1 ✕ 1 1 ✕ SIOCON (Address 00E2 16)
Select BRG count source
Synchronous clock ← External clock
SRDY output enabled
Select transmit interrupt source
Transmit enabled
Receive enabled
Clock synchronous serial I/O selected
Serial I/O enabled
NOP
Clear the serial I/O transmit interrupt request bit
Clear the serial I/O receive interrupt request bit
Set the serial I/O transmit interrupt enable bit
(Serial I/O transmit interrupt enabled)
Set the serial I/O receive interrupt enable bit
(Serial I/O receive interrupt enabled)
Write the transmit data into the Transmit buffer register
(Write the dummy data in the half-duplex communication)
N
Port P17 = “L” ?
Y
Write the transmit data into the Transmit buffer register
Serial I/O transmit interrupt
Serial I/O receive interrupt
Serial I/O transmit interrupt
Serial I/O receive interrupt
Fig. 2.4.9 Example of control procedure [Clock synchronous serial I/O mode, 7477/7478 group]
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2-31
APPLICATION
2.4 Serial I/O
(2)Clock asynchronous serial I/O mode
7470
7471
×
×
7477
7478
Outline: Clock asynchronous communication is performed among the 7477/7478 groups.
Specifications: M3747x 1 ……Transmit side in half-duplex communication
f(X IN)
• Baud rate:
bps
4 × (XX 16 + 1) × 16
M3747x 2 …… Receive side in half-duplex communication
f(X IN)
• Baud rate:
bps
4 × (XX 16 + 1) × 16
“XX 16 ” is a set value of the baud rate generator.
Figure 2.4.10 shows an example of connections and Figure 2.4.11 shows an example of control
procedure.
Use → Full-duplex communication
No use → Half-duplex communication
M3747x 1
M3747x 2
TxD
RxD
RxD
TxD
Fig. 2.4.10 Example of connections [Clock asynchronous serial I/O mode, 7477/7478 group]
2-32
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.4 Serial I/O
M3747x 1
7470
7471
×
×
7477
7478
M3747x 2
Clear the serial I/O transmit interrupt enable bit
(Serial I/O transmit interrupt disabled)
Clear the serial I/O receive interrupt enable bit
(Serial I/O receive interrupt disabled)
Set baud rate generator
(Set “✕✕16” to BRG)
Set the Serial I/O control register
1 0 1 1 ✕✕0 0
Clear the serial I/O transmit interrupt enable bit
(Serial I/O transmit interrupt disabled)
Clear the serial I/O receive interrupt enable bit
(Serial I/O receive interrupt disabled)
Set baud rate generator
(Set “✕✕16” to BRG)
Set the Serial I/O control register
SIOCON (Address 00E2 16)
BRG count source ← f(XIN)/4
Synchronous clock ← BRG output divided by 16
–
Select transmit interrupt source
Transmit enabled
Receive enabled
Clock asynchronous serial I/O selected
Serial I/O enabled
1 0 1 1 ✕✕0 0
SIOCON (Address 00E2 16)
BRG count source ← f(XIN)/4
Synchronous clock ← BRG output divided by 16
–
Select transmit interrupt source
Transmit enabled
Receive enabled
Clock asynchronous serial I/O selected
Serial I/O enabled
NOP
NOP
Clear the serial I/O transmit interrupt request bit
Clear the serial I/O receive interrupt request bit
Clear the serial I/O transmit interrupt request bit
Clear the serial I/O receive interrupt request bit
Set the serial I/O transmit interrupt enable bit
(Serial I/O transmit interrupt enabled)
Set the serial I/O receive interrupt enable bit
(Serial I/O receive interrupt enabled)
Set the serial I/O transmit interrupt enable bit
(Serial I/O transmit interrupt enabled)
Set the serial I/O receive interrupt enable bit
(Serial I/O receive interrupt enabled)
Write the transmit data into the Transmit buffer register
Write the transmit data to the Transmit buffer register
in the full-duplex communication
Serial I/O transmit interrupt
Serial I/O transmit interrupt
Serial I/O receive interrupt
Serial I/O receive interrupt
Fig. 2.4.11 Example of control procedure [Clock asynchronous serial I/O mode, 7477/7478 group]
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2-33
APPLICATION
2.4 Serial I/O
2.4.5 Notes on use
7470
For notes on use, refer to “1.13 Serial I/O.”
2-34
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
7471
7477
7478
APPLICATION
2.5 A-D converter
2.5 A-D converter
7470
7471
7477
7478
2.5.1 Memory allocation
Figure 2.5.1 shows a memory map of A-D conversion related registers.
Address
00D916
00DA16
A-D control register (ADCON)
00FC16
00FD16
00FE16
00FF16
Interrupt request register 1 (IR1)
A-D conversion register (AD)
Interrupt control register 1 (IE1)
Fig. 2.5.1 Memory map of A-D conversion related registers
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2-35
APPLICATION
2.5 A-D converter
2.5.2 Application examples
7470
7471
7477
7478
(1) A-D conversion value determination methods
For improvement of the accuracy of A-D conversion results, we recommend you perform sampling
several times to determine a value.
The following A-D conversion value sampling methods are available (m, n: Arbitrary values based on
the specification).
Example: 1 Sampling 2 n times
2 Moving sampling 2 n times
3 Sampling (2 n + 2) times
For value determination, the following methods are available.
Example: [1] The sum of sampling result is divided by sampling times.
[2] After execution of sampling (2 n + 2) times, the minimum value and the maximum
value are excluded and then the remaining values are added and then divided by 2 n
times.
[3] When updating the average value calculated by [1]or [2], this average value is not
updated if the difference from the previous value is ± m or more.
In “2.5.2 Application examples, (2) Example of A-D conversion setting,” an example of using the
sampling methods 2 + 3 and the determination method [3] is shown.
2-36
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 A-D converter
(2) Example of A-D conversion setting
7470
7471
7477
7478
An example of A-D conversion setting using the sampling methods 2 + 3 and the determination
method [3] described on the previous page is shown below.
Specifications: After execution of 6-time moving sampling the maximum value and the minimum
value are excluded and then the remaining values are added. This result is
divided by 4 (times). If the difference from the previous value is less than ±5, the
value is updated. If the same difference is ±5 or more, it is not updated.
Figure 2.5.2 shows an example of control procedure.
Maximum
value
Minimum
value
Sampling point
A-D conversion result
A616
A816
A916
A716
A816
AB16
A-D conversion routine
✻
Set the port P2 0 as an input
Clear the A-D conversion interrupt
request bit
N
A-D conversion completed ?
(Note 3)
Set the A-D control register
0 ✕ ✕ 1 1 0 0 0 ADCON (Address 00D9 16)
AD input pin ← P20/IN0
End conversion
VREF is connected (Note 1)
Fixed to “0”
Wait the V REF stabilizing time
(1.0 µs or more) (Note 2)
Set the A-D control register
0 ✕ ✕ 1 0 0 0 0 ADCON (Address 00D9 16)
Clear the A-D conversion
completion bit
Y
The contents of A-D conversion register is read
and stored into RAM.
(ADRAM) ← AB16
After execution of 6-time samplings to this time, the
minimum value and the maximum value are excluded and
then the remaining values are added.
A816+A916+A716+A816=2A0 16
Total of 4-time sampling
4
2A0 16
=A816
4
±5 or more
Compare with the previous fixed
value
✻
Notes 1: The 7477/7478 group is not provided with this bit.
2: Performs this operation only in the 7470/7471
group.
3: A termination of A-D conversion is verified by the
state of the A-D conversion completion bit, the
state of the A-D conversion completion interrupt
request bit and a branch to the A-D conversion
completion interrupt processing routine.
less than ±5
Renewal of fixed value
RTS
Fig. 2.5.2 Example of A-D conversion control procedure
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2-37
APPLICATION
2.5 A-D converter
2.5.3 Notes on use
7470
7471
7477
7478
The analog input internal equivalent circuit is shown in Figure 2.5.3. For correct A-D conversion,
it is necessary that the internal capacitor should be completely charged within the specified time.
The maximum value of output impedance of the analog input source required to terminate capacitor
charging within this time is shown below.
• At f(XIN) = 4 MHz, Approximately 10 kΩ
• At f(X IN) = 8 MHz, Approximately 2 kΩ
If the maximum value of output impedance exceeds the above value, take a proper measure, for
example, insert a capacitor (0.1 µ F to 1 µF) between analog input pin and VSS .
VCC
Port P2 i/INi
C1=10 pF
±50%
R=4 kΩ ±60%
(i=0 to 7)
C2=6 pF ±30%
SW1(Note 2)
SW2
VSS
VSS
Amplifier
(Note 1)
Reference voltage
generation circuit
Switch tree
Resistor ladder
VREF switch (Note 3)
VSS
VREF
Notes 1: This is a parasitic diode of the output transistor.
2: SW1 is turned on only when the analog input pin is selected.
3: The VREF switch is not provided in the 7477/7478 group.
Fig. 2.5.3 Analog input internal equivalent circuit
For other notes on use, refer to “1.14 A-D converter.”
2-38
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.6 Reset
2.6 Reset
7470
7471
7477
7478
2.6.1 Reset circuit
Figure 2.6.1 shows an example of reset circuit.
M3747x
RESET
M3747x
RESET
VCC
VCC
Supply voltage
detection circuit
RESET, V CC pin number
32P
42P
56P
RESET
18
25
28
VCC
17
22
23
Fig. 2.6.1 Example of reset circuit
2.6.2 Notes on use
For notes on use, refer to “1.15 Reset.”
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2-39
APPLICATION
2.7 Oscillation circuit
2.7 Oscillation circuit
7470
7471
7477
7478
(1) Oscillation circuit using a ceramic resonator
An oscillation circuit can be formed by connecting a ceramic resonator or a crystal oscillator between
the X IN pin and the XOUT pin and between the X CIN pin and the XCOUT pin.
Figure 2.7.1 shows an example of oscillation circuit using a ceramic resonator.
Regarding such circuit constants as R d, CIN and C OUT , ask the oscillator maker for information and
then set the recommended value.
7471/7478 group
7470/7477 group
XIN
14
XIN
XOUT
15
19
(18)
XCIN
20
(19)
23
(25)
C OUT
CIN
XCOUT
24
(26)
Rd
Rd
CIN
XOUT
Rd'
CCIN
C OUT
C COUT
Note: The number in parentheses denotes the case of a flat package.
Fig. 2.7.1 Example of Oscillation circuit using ceramic resonator
(2) External clock input
To the main clock and timer clock oscillation circuits, clocks can also be supplied from the outside.
Figure 2.7.2 shows an example of circuits in this case. At this time, make the X OUT (X COUT) pin open.
As an external clock to be input to the X IN (XCIN ) pin, use a pulse signal with a duty ratio of 50 %.
7471/7478 group
7470/7477 group
XOUT
XIN
14
15
XIN
19
(18)
Open
XOUT
20
(19)
Rd
XCIN
XCOUT
24
(26)
Open
External oscillation circuit
External oscillation circuit
23
(25)
VCC
VCC
CIN
COUT
VSS
Duty ratio 50%
VSS
Duty ratio 50%
Note: The number in parentheses denotes the case of a flat package.
Fig. 2.7.2 Example of external clock input circuit
Note: The X CIN and the XCOUT pin are not provided in the 7470/7477 group.
2-40
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.8 Low-power dissipation function
2.8 Low-power dissipation function
7470
7471
7477
7478
2.8.1 CPU mode register
The CPU mode register consists of a stack page selection bit+1 and internal system clock control
bits+2 .
+1: In the products having a RAM capacity of 192 bytes or less, a RAM is not arranged on page 1,
so this bit is not available. (Be sure to set this bit to “0.”)
+2: In the 7470/7477 group, which is not provided with a sub-clock (f(X CIN)) generating circuit, f(XCIN)
is not used. (Be sure to set this bit to “0.”)
Figure 2.8.1 shows a structure of CPU mode register.
CPU mode register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 0
CPU mode register (CPUM) [Address 00FB16]
B
Name
0, 1 Fix these bits to “0.”
Function
At reset R W
0
0: In page 0 area
1: In page 1 area
(Note 1)
2
Stack page selection
bit
3
Nothing is allocated for this bit. This is write
enabled bit and is undefined at reading.
?
4
P50, P5 1/XCIN,XCOUT
selection bit
0: P50, P5 1
1: XCIN , XCOUT (Note 2)
0
5
XCOUT drive capacity
selection bit
0: Low
1: High
0
0
? ✕
(Note 2)
6 Main clock (X IN–XOUT) 0: Oscillates
stop bit
1: Stops
0
(Note 2)
7
Internal system clock
selection bit
0: XIN–XOUT selected
(Ordinary mode)
1: XCIN –XCOUT selected
(Low speed mode)
(Note 2)
0
Notes 1: In the products having a RAM capacity of 192 bytes or
less, set this bit to “0.”
2: Since the 7470/7477 group is not provided with the
sub-clock generating circuit, f(XCIN) cannot be used.
Fix these bits to “0.”
Fig. 2.8.1 Structure of CPU mode register
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2-41
APPLICATION
2.8 Low-power dissipation function
2.8.2 Application examples
7470
7471
7477
7478
As examples of application, examples of setting between modes are shown below.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Ordinary mode → Stop mode
Ordinary mode → Wait mode
Ordinary mode → Low speed
Low speed mode → Ordinary
→ Ordinary mode
→ Ordinary mode
mode
mode
Note: In the 7470/7477 group, which is not provided with a sub-clock generating circuit, the lowspeed mode is not available.
2-42
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.8 Low-power dissipation function
(1) Ordinary mode → Stop mode → Ordinary mode
7470
7471
7477
7478
,
,
,
,
Specifications: The stop mode is executed by the STP instruction.
Restoration to the ordinary mode is attained by INT0 interrupt.
Figure 2.8.2 shows an example of control procedure.
Clear the timer 3 interrupt enable bit (timer 3 interrupt disabled)
Clear the timer 4 interrupt enable bit (timer 4 interrupt disabled)
Stop the timer 3 and timer 4 and select the timer 3 count
source
(Set the Timer 34 mode register)
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 1 ✕ ✕ 1 T34M (Address 00F9 16)
Select the timer 3 count source
Set the return interrupt source
Clear the INT 0 interrupt request bit
Execute the NOP instruction
Set the INT 0 interrupt enable bit
(INT 0 interrupt enabled)
Set the timer 3 and 4 count state
(Set the Timer 34 mode register)
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 0 ✕ ✕ 0 T34M (Address 00F9 16)
Timer 3 count
Timer 4 count
Clear the interrupt disable flag (each interrupt enabled)
Execute the STP instruction
INT0 interrupt
RTI
Set the interrupt disable flag (each interrupt disabled)
Re-set the timer 3 and 4
Timer 34 mode register
Timer 3 register
Timer 4 register
Clear the interrupt disable flag (each interrupt enabled)
Fig. 2.8.2 Example of control procedure [Ordinary mode → Stop mode → Ordinary mode]
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2-43
APPLICATION
2.8 Low-power dissipation function
(2) Ordinary mode → Wait mode → Ordinary mode
7470
7471
7477
Specifications: The wait mode is executed by the WIT instruction.
Restoration to the ordinary mode is attained by INT0 interrupt.
Figure 2.8.3 shows an example of control procedure.
Set the return interrupt source
Clear the INT 0 interrupt request bit
Execute the NOP instruction
Set the INT 0 interrupt enable bit
(INT 0 interrupt enable)
Clear the interrupt disable flag (each interrupt enable)
Execute the WIT instruction
INT0 interrupt
RTI
The next address of the WIT instruction
Fig. 2.8.3 Example of control procedure [Ordinary mode → Wait mode → Ordinary mode]
2-44
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
7478
APPLICATION
2.8 Low-power dissipation function
(3) Ordinary mode → Low speed mode
7470
×
7471
7477
7478
×
Specifications: The system clock is switched from the main clock (f(X IN) = 8 MHz) to the subclock (f(X CIN) = 32 kHz). The main clock is stopped.
Figure 2.8.4 shows an example of control procedure.
Set the CPU mode register
0 0 1 1 ✕ ✕ 0 0 CPUM (Address 00FB 16)
Fixed to “0”
XCIN, XCOUT selected
XCOUT drive capacity High power selected
Main clock oscillation
System clock Ordinary mode selected
Wait f(X CIN) oscillation stabilizing time
✻ For certain time, ask the oscillator manufacturer for
information.
Set the CPU mode register
1 1 1 1 ✕ ✕ 0 0 CPUM (Address 00FB 16)
Fixed to “0”
XCIN, XCOUT selected
XCOUT drive capacity High power selected
Main clock stop
System clock Low speed mode selected
Fig. 2.8.4 Example of control procedure [Ordinary mode → Low speed mode]
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2-45
APPLICATION
2.8 Low-power dissipation function
(4) Low speed mode → Ordinary mode
7470
×
7471
7477
7478
×
Specifications: The system clock is switched from the sub-clock (f(XCIN ) = 32 kHz) to the main
clock (f(X IN) = 8 MHz). The sub-clock is stopped.
Figure 2.8.5 shows an example of control procedure.
Set the CPU mode register
1 0 1 1 ✕ ✕ 0 0 CPUM (Address 00FB 16)
Fixed to “0”
XCIN, XCOUT selected
XCOUT drive capacity High power selected
Main clock oscillation
System clock Low-speed mode selected
Wait f(X IN) oscillation stabilizing time
✻ For certain time, ask the oscillator manufacturer.
Set the CPU mode register
0 0 ✕ 0 ✕ ✕ 0 0 CPUM (Address 00FB 16)
Fixed to “0”
P50, P51 selected
Main clock oscillation
System clock Ordinary mode selected
Fig. 2.8.5 Example of control procedure [Low speed mode → Ordinary mode]
2-46
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.8 Low-power dissipation function
2.8.3 Notes on use
7470
7471
7477
7478
2 For notes on use, refer to “1.17 Low-power dissipation function.”
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2-47
APPLICATION
2.9 Countermeasures against noise
2.9 Countermeasures against noise
7470
7471
7477
7478
Countermeasures against noise are described below. The following countermeasures are effective against
noise in theory, however, it is necessary not only to take measures as follows but to evaluate before actual
use.
2.9.1 Shortest wiring length
The wiring on a printed circuit board can be as an antenna which feeds noise into the microcomputer.
The shorter the total wiring length (by mm unit), the less the possibility of noise insertion into a microcomputer.
(1) Wiring for the RESET pin
Make the length of wiring which is connected to the RESET pin as short as possible. Especially,
connect a capacitor across the RESET pin and the VSS pin with the shortest possible wiring (within
20mm).
Reason
The reset works to initialize a microcomputer.
The width of a pulse input into the RESET pin is determined by the timing necessary conditions. If
noise having a shorter pulse width than the standard is input to the RESET pin, the reset is released
before the internal state of the microcomputer is completely initialized. This may cause a program
runaway.
Noise
Reset
circuit
RESET
VSS
N.G.
Reset
circuit
VSS
VSS
VSS
7470/7471/
7477/7478
group
O.K.
7470/7471/
7477/7478
group
Fig. 2.9.1 Wiring for the RESET pin
2-48
RESET
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.9 Countermeasures against noise
7470
(2) Wiring for clock input/output pins
7471
7477
7478
● Make the length of wiring which is connected to clock I/O pins as short as possible.
● Make the length of wiring (within 20mm) across the grounding lead of a capacitor which is connected
to an oscillator and the VSS pin of a microcomputer as short as possible.
● Separate the VSS pattern only for oscillation from other V SS patterns.
Reason
A microcomputer’s operation synchronizes with a clock generated by the oscillator (circuit). If noise
enters clock I/O pins, clock waveforms may be deformed. This may cause a malfunction or program
runaway.
Also, if a potential difference is caused by the noise between the VSS level of a microcomputer and
the VSS level of an oscillator, the correct clock will not be input in the microcomputer.
An example of V SS patterns on the
underside of a printed circuit board
Noise
Oscillator wiring
pattern example
XIN
XOUT
VSS
N.G.
XIN
XOUT
VSS
XIN
XOUT
VSS
O.K.
Separate the V SS line for oscillation from other V SS lines
Fig. 2.9.2 Wiring for clock I/O pins
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2-49
APPLICATION
2.9 Countermeasures against noise
(3) Wiring for the V PP pin of the One Time PROM version and the
EPROM version
● Make the length of wiring which is connected to the
V PP pin as short as possible.
● Connect an approximately 5 kΩ resistor to the V PP
pin in serial.
● The P33 pin is also used as the VPP pin.
7470
7471
7477
7478
7470/7471/7477/7478 group
Reason
The V PP pin of the One Time PROM and the EPROM
version is the power source input pin for the built-in
PROM. When programming in the built-in PROM, the
impedance of the V PP pin is low to allow the electric
current for wiring flow into the PROM. Because of
this, noise can enter easily. If noise enters the V PP
pin, abnormal instruction codes or data are read from
the built-in PROM, which may cause a program runaway.
Approximately
5kΩ
P33/VPP
Fig. 2.9.3 Wiring for the VPP pin of the One
Time PROM and the EPROM
version
2-50
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.9 Countermeasures against noise
2.9.2 Connection of a bypass capacitor across the Vss line and
the Vcc line
Connect an approximately 0.1 µF bypass capacitor across
the V SS line and the V CC line as follows:
● Connect a bypass capacitor across the VSS pin and
the V CC pin at equal length.
● Connect a bypass capacitor across the VSS pin and
the VCC pin with the shortest possible wiring.
● Use lines with a larger diameter than other signal lines
for VSS line and VCC line.
7470
7471
7477
VCC
Chip
Chip
VCC
VCC
2.9.3 Wiring to analog input pins
● Connect an approximately 100 Ω to 1 kΩ resistor to an
analog signal line which is connected to an analog
input pin in series. Besides, connect the resistor to the
microcomputer as close as possible.
● Connect an approximately 1000 pF capacitor across
the V SS pin and the analog input pin. Besides, connect
the capacitor to the VSS pin as close as possible. Also,
connect the capacitor across the analog input pin and
the VSS pin at equal length.
Reason
Signals which is input in an analog input pin (such as an
A-D converter input pin) are usually output signals from
sensor. The sensor which detects a change of event is
installed far from the printed circuit board with a
microcomputer, the wiring to an analog input pin is longer
necessarily.
This long wiring functions as an antenna which feeds
noise into the microcomputer, which causes noise to an
analog input pin.
If a capacitor between an analog input pin and the VSS
pin is grounded at a position far away from the VSS pin,
noise on the GND line may enter a microcomputer through
the capacitor.
7478
VSS
VSS
VSS
Fig. 2.9.4 Bypass capacitor across the V SS
line and the V CC line
Noise
(Note)
Microcomputer
Analog
input pin
Thermistor
N.G.
O.K.
VSS
Note : The resistor is for dividing resistance
with a thermister.
Fig. 2.9.5 Analog signal line and a resistor
and a capacitor
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2-51
APPLICATION
2.9 Countermeasures against noise
2.9.4 Consideration for oscillator
7470
7471
7477
7478
Take care to prevent an oscillator that generates clocks
for a microcomputer operation from being affected by other
signals.
(1) Keeping an oscillator away from large current signal
lines
Install a microcomputer (and especially an oscillator)
as far as possible from signal lines where a current
larger than the tolerance of current value flows.
<Reason>
In the system using a microcomputer, there are signal
lines for controlling motors, LEDs, and thermal heads
or others. When a large current flows through those
signal lines, strong noise occurs because of mutual
inductance.
Microcomputer
Mutual inductance
M
XIN
XOUT
VSS
Large
current
GND
Fig. 2.9.6 Wiring for a large current signal
line
(2) Keeping an oscillator away from signal lines where
potential levels change frequently
Install an oscillator and a connecting pattern of an
osillator away from signal lines where potential levels
change frequently.
Also, do not cross such signal lines over the clock
lines or the signal lines which are sensitive to noise.
Do not cross
CNTR
XIN
XOUT
VSS
<Reason>
Signal lines where potential levels change frequently
(such as the CNTR pin line) may affect other lines at
signal rising or falling edge. If such lines cross over
a clock line, clock waveforms may be deformed, which
causes a microcomputer failure or a program runaway.
Fig. 2.9.7 Wiring to a signal line where
potential levels change
frequently
2-52
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.9 Countermeasures against noise
2.9.5 Setup for I/O ports
7470
7471
7477
7478
Setup I/O ports using hardware and software as follows:
<Hardware>
● Connect a resistor of 100 Ω or more to an I/O port
in series.
<Software>
● As for an input port, read data several times by a
program for checking whether input levels are equal
or not.
● As for an output port, since the output data may
reverse because of noise, rewrite data to its port
latch at fixed periods.
● Rewrite data to direction registers and pull-up control
registers (only the product having it) at fixed periods.
When a direction register is set for input port again
at fixed periods, a several-nanosecond short pulse
may be output from this port. If this is undesirable,
connect a capacitor to this port to remove the
noise pulse.
O.K.
Noise
Data bus
Noise
Direction register
N.G.
Port latch
I/O port
pins
Fig. 2.9.8 Setup for I/O ports
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2-53
APPLICATION
2.9 Countermeasures against noise
2.9.6 Providing of watchdog timer function by software
7470
7471
7477
7478
If a microcomputer runs away because of noise or others, it can be detected by a software watchdog timer
and the microcomputer can be reset to normal operation. This is equal to or more effective than program
runaway detection by a hardware watchdog timer. The following shows an example of a watchdog timer
provided by software.
In the following example, to reset a microcomputer to normal operation, the main routine detects errors
of the interrupt processing routine and the interrupt processing routine detects errors of the main routine.
This example assumes that interrupt processing is repeated multiple times in a single main routine
processing.
<The main routine>
● Assigns a single byte of RAM to a software watchdog timer (SWDT) and writes the initial value
N in the SWDT once at each execution of the main routine. The initial value N should satisfy the
following condition:
N + 1 Q (Counts of interrupt processing executed in each main routine)
As the main routine execution cycle may change because of an interrupt processing or others, the
initial value N should have a margin.
● Watches the operation of the interrupt processing routine by comparing the SWDT contents with
counts of interrupt processing count after the initial value N has been set.
● Detects that the interrupt processing routine has failed and determines to branch to the program
initialization routine for recovery processing in the following cases:
If the SWDT contents do not change after interrupt processing.
<The interrupt processing routine>
● Decrements the SWDT contents by 1 at each interrupt processing.
● Determins that the main routine operates normally when the SWDT contents are reset to the initial
value N at almost fixed periods (at the fixed interrupt processing count).
● Detects that the main routine has failed and determines to branch to the program initialization
routine for recovery processing in the following case:
When the contents of the SWDT reach 0 or less by continuative decrement without initializing to
the initial value N.
2-54
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.9 Countermeasures against noise
7470
≠N
Main routine
Interrupt processing routine
(SWDT) ← N
(SWDT) ← (SWDT)—1
CLI
Interrupt processing
Main processing
(SWDT)
≤0?
(SWDT)
=N?
≤0
7477
7478
>0
RTI
Return
=N
Interrupt processing
routine errors
7471
Main routine
errors
Fig. 2.9.9 Watchdog timer by software
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2-55
APPLICATION
2.10 Notes on programming
2.10 Notes on programming
7470
7471
7477
7478
2.10.1 Processor status register
(1) Initialization of processor status register
After a reset, the contents of the processor
status register (PS) are undefined except for
the I flag which is “1.” Therefore, flags which
affect program execution must be initialized
after a reset.
In particular, it is essential to initialize the T
and D flags because they have an important
effect on calculations.
(2) How to reference the processor status
register
To reference the contents of the processor
status register (PS), execute the PHP instruction
once then read the contents of (S + 1). If
necessary, execute the PLP instruction to return
the PS to its original status. A NOP instruction
should be executed after every PLP instruction.
Reset
Flags initializing
Main program
Fig. 2.10.1 Initialization of flags in PS
(S)
(S) + 1
Saved PS
Fig. 2.10.2 Stack memory contents after PHP
instruction execution
PLP instruction
NOP instruction
Fig. 2.10.3 Note to execute by PLP instruction
2-56
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.10 Notes on programming
2.10.2 Decimal calculations
7470
(1) Execution of decimal calculations
The ADC and SBC are the only instructions
which will yield proper decimal results in decimal
mode. To calculate in decimal notation, set
the decimal mode flag (D) to “1” with the SED
instruction. After executing the ADC or SBC
instruction, execute another instruction before
executing the SEC, CLC, or CLD instruction.
7471
7477
7478
Set D Flag to “1”
ADC or SBC instruction
(2) Note on flags in decimal mode
When decimal mode is selected, the values of
three of the flags in the status register (the N,
V, and Z flags) are invalid after a ADC or SBC
instruction is executed.
The Carry flag (C) is set to “1” if a carry is
generated as a result of the calculation, or is
cleared to “0” if a borrow is generated. To
determine whether a calculation has generated
a carry, the C flag must be initialized to “0”
before each calculation. To check for a borrow, the C flag must be initialized before each
calculation.
NOP instruction
SEC, CLC, or CLD instruction
Fig. 2.10.4 Note for decimal operation
2 For other notes, refer to the notes described in
each section.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2-57
APPLICATION
2.11 Differences between 7470/7471 group and 7477/7478 group
2.11 Differences between 7470/7471 group
and 7477/7478 group
7470
7471
7477
7478
Table 2.11.1 shows differences between the 7470/7471 group and the 7477/7478 group. Exercise due
care at substitution.
Table 2.11.1 Differences between 7470/7471 group and 7477/7478 group
12
Clock synchronous
Y
General I/O port / Analog input
P0, P1, P2, P4, P5
7477/7478 group
192/384 bytes
(128/192/384 bytes for extended operating temperature version)
8K/16K byte
(4K/8K/16K byte for extended operating temperature version)
Y
-20 to 85°C
(-40°C to +85°C for extended operating temperature version)
13
Clock synchronous / UART
N
General input port / Analog input
P0, P1, P4, P5
Y
N
7470/7471 group
RAM size
128/192/384 bytes
ROM size
4K/8K/16K byte
32-pin SOP
Operating temperature
range
Interrupt source types
Serial I/O
Byte specification mode
Port P2
Software pull-up control
A-D conversion V REF
OFF function
2-58
N
-20 to 85°C
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.12 Example of application circuit
2.12 Example of application circuit
7470
7471
7477
7478
×
×
×
Blower
motor
Low
High
ON/OFF
Photo triac
PORT
Key input
Photo triac
PORT
PORT
Thermistor
AD
Dust sensor
AD
INT
Vcc
Zero cross detection
Auto
BCR
BCR
Brush
motor
Power source for control
(DC 5 V)
Power source
(AC 100 V)
Figures 2.12.1 and 2.12.2 show examples of application circuit using the 7470 group, the 7478 group respectively.
High
Auto
ON/OFF
Low
LED
Mode display
Power display
PORT
M37470M2
Fig. 2.12.1 Application circuit example (cleaner)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2-59
2-60
Evaporative sensor
Sensor of inside car temperature
Sensor of outside car temperature
Insolation sensor
Air mix door
opening
Temperature
setting
Watchdog
timer
Total power
source IC
Key input
Voltage
stabilization
circuit
M5296JFP
Fig. 2.12.2 Application circuit example (Semi-auto air conditioner)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
PORT
PORT
AD
PORT
RESET
Vcc
UART
PWM
Diagnosis
Display driver
Driver
By direction
motor driver
M59300L
By direction
motor driver
M59300L
By direction
motor driver
M59300L
Ventilation control
M
Temperature display
Blower motor
control
M Suction control
M
M
Air mix
dumper control
APPLICATION
2.12 Example of application circuit
M37478M4T
7470
7471
7477
×
×
×
7478
CHAPTER 3
APPENDIX
3.1 Control registers
3.2 Mask ROM ordering
method
3.3 ROM programming
ordering method
3.4 Mark specification form
3.5 Package outline
3.6 SFR memory map
3.7 Pin configuration
APPENDIX
3.1 Control registers
3.1 Control registers
Port Pi direction register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Port Pi direction register (PiD) (i = 0,1,2,4)
[Address 00C1 16, 00C316, 00C5 16, 00C9 16]
B
Name
0 Port Pi direction
register
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Function
0 : Port Pi 0 input mode
1 : Port Pi 0 output mode
0 : Port Pi 1 input mode
1 : Port Pi 1 output mode
0 : Port Pi 2 input mode
1 : Port Pi 2 output mode
0 : Port Pi 3 input mode
1 : Port Pi 3 output mode
0 : Port Pi 4 input mode
1 : Port Pi 4 output mode
0 : Port Pi 5 input mode
1 : Port Pi 5 output mode
0 : Port Pi 6 input mode
1 : Port Pi 6 output mode
0 : Port Pi 7 input mode
1 : Port Pi 7 output mode
At reset
R W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Notes 1: The 7477/7478 group is not provided with the port P2
direction register (input only).
2: The Port P4 is provided as below:
•7470/7477 group has 2 bits of P4 0 and P4 1
•7471/7478 group has 4 bits of P4 0 to P4 3.
Fig. 3.1.1 Structure of Port Pi direction register (i=0, 1, 2, 4)
Port P0 pull-up control register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Port P0 pull-up control register [Address 00D0 16]
B
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Name
Port P0 0 pull-up
control bit
Port P0 1 pull-up
control bit
Port P0 2 pull-up
control bit
Port P0 3 pull-up
control bit
Port P0 4 pull-up
control bit
Port P0 5 pull-up
control bit
Port P0 6 pull-up
control bit
Port P0 7 pull-up
control bit
Function
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
Fig. 3.1.2 Structure of Port P0 pull-up control register
3-2
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
At reset
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R W
APPENDIX
3.1 Control registers
Ports P1 to P5 pull-up control register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Ports P1 to P5 pull-up control register [Address 00D1 16]
b
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Name
Function
At reset
Ports P1 0 to P1 3
pull-up control bit
Ports P1 4 to P1 7
pull-up control bit
Ports P2 0 to P23 pull-up
control bit
(Note 2)
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
Ports P2 4 to P27 pull-up 0 : No pull-up
control bit
(Notes 2, 3) 1 : Pull-up
Ports P4 0 to P43 pull-up 0 : No pull-up
control bit
(Note 4) 1 : Pull-up
Nothing is allocated for this bit. This is write
disabled bit and is undefined at reading.
Ports P5 0 to P53 pull-up 0 : No pull-up
control bit
(Note 3) 1 : Pull-up
0
Nothing is allocated for this bit. This is write
disabled bit and is undefined at reading.
?
R W
0
0
0
0
?
? ✕
0
? ✕
Notes 1 : In the 7470/7477 group, the P1 to P4 Pull-up control register
is provided.
2 : In the 7477/7478 group, nothing is allocated to these bits.
They are undefined at reading.
3 : In the 7470/7477 group, nothing is allocated to these bits.
They are undefined at reading.
4 : The 7470/7477 group is provided with only P40 and P4 1.
Fig. 3.1.3 Structure of Ports P1 to P5 pull-up control register
Edge polarity selection register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Edge polarity selection register (EG) [Address 00D416]
Name
0 INT0 edge selection
bit
B
1 INT1 edge selection
bit
2 CNTR 0 edge
selection bit
3 CNTR 1 edge
selection bit
4 CNTR 0/CNTR1
interrupt selection bit
Function
0 : Falling edge
1 : Rising edge
0 : Falling edge
1 : Rising edge
0 : Falling edge
1 : Rising edge
0 : Falling edge
1 : Rising edge
0 : CNTR 0
1 : CNTR 1
5 INT 1 source selection 0 : P3 1/INT1
bit (at STP or WIT
1 : P00 to P0 7 “L” level input
instruction execution) (for key-on wake-up)
6, 7 Nothing is allocated for these bits. These are
write disabled bits and are undefined at reading.
At reset
R W
0
0
0
0
0
0
?
? ✕
Fig. 3.1.4 Structure of Edge polarity selection register
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-3
APPENDIX
3.1 Control registers
Input latch register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Input latch register (ILR) [Address 00D616]
B
Name
0 P30/INT0 latch bit
Function
At reset
When b0 of EG (Note) is “1”:
level on INT 0 pin
1 P31/INT1 latch bit
R W
When b0 of EG (Note) is “0”:
reverse level on INT 0 pin
?
✕
?
✕
?
✕
?
✕
?
? ✕
When b1 of EG (Note) is “0”:
reverse level on INT 1 pin
When b1 of EG (Note) is “1”:
level on INT 1 pin
2 P32/CNTR0 latch bit When b2 of EG (Note) is “0”:
reverse level on CNTR 0 pin
When b2 of EG (Note) is “1”:
level on CNTR 0 pin
3 P33/CNTR1 latch bit When b3 of EG (Note) is “0”:
reverse level on CNTR 1 pin
When b3 of EG (Note) is “1”:
level on CNTR 1 pin
4 Nothing is allocated for these bits. These
to are write disabled bits and are undefined at
7 reading.
Note: EG is the Edge polarity selection register.
Fig. 3.1.5 Structure of Input latch register
A-D control register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0
A-D control register (ADCON) [Address 00D916]
B
0
Name
A-D input selection
bits
1
2
3
4
A-D conversion end
bit
(Note 2)
VREF connection
selection bit
Function
At reset
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0 : P2 0/IN0
1 : P2 1/IN1
0 : P2 2/IN2
1 : P2 3/IN3
0 : P2 4/IN4
1 : P2 5/IN5
0 : P2 6/IN6
1 : P2 7/IN7
0
0
(Note 1)
0 : Under conversion
1 : End conversion
0 : The VREF pin is
separated from the
comparison voltage
✽The 7477/7478 group is not
generator.
provided with this bit.
1 : The VREF pin is
This bit is undefined at
connected to
reset.
comparison voltage
generator.
Nothing is allocated for these bits.
5, 6 These are write disabled bits and are
undefined at reading.
7
R W
b2 b1 b0
Fix this bit to “0.”
0
1
0
?
? ✕
0
0 0
Notes 1: Since the 7470/7477 group is not provided with pins
P24–P27, do not set.
2: •A-D conversion is started by setting bit 3 to “0.”
•Writing “0” into bit 3 is valid. Even if “1” is written into
bit 3, this bit is not set to “1.” Accordingly, when writing a
value into the A-D control register without affecting bit 3,
set bit 3 to “1.”
Fig. 3.1.6 Structure of A-D control register
3-4
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.1 Control registers
A-D conversion register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
A-D conversion register (AD) [Address 00DA 16]
B
Function
At reset
0 This is a read-only register to store A-D
to conversion results.
7
R W
✕
?
Fig. 3.1.7 Structure of A-D conversion register
Serial I/O mode register (7470/7471 group)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Serial I/O mode register (SM) [Address 00DC16]
B
Name
0, 1 Internal clock
selection bits
Function
At reset
0 : f(X IN)/8 or f(XCIN)/8
1 : f(X IN)/16 or f(X CIN)/16
0 : f(X IN)/32 or f(X CIN)/32
1 : f(X IN)/512 or f(XCIN)/512
(Note)
0
0
0
1
1
2
Synchronous clock 0 : External clock
selection bit
1 : Internal clock
3
Serial I/O port
selection bit
4
5
6
7
SRDY signal output
selection bit
SRDY signal
selection bit
Serial I/O byte specify
mode selection bit
R W
b1 b0
0 : Ordinary I/O port
(P1 5, P1 6)
1 : Serial I/O port (S OUT, CLK pin)
0 : Ordinary I/O port(P1 7)
1 : SRDY signal output pin
0 : SRDY signal
1 : SA RDY signal
0 : Ordinary mode
1 : Byte specify mode
P15/SOUT, SRDY output 0 : CMOS output
structure selection bit
1 : N-channel open-drain
output
0
0
0
0
0
0
Note: Since the 7470 group is not provided with the sub-clock
generating circuit, do not select f(XCIN).
Fig. 3.1.8 Structure of Serial I/O mode register
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-5
APPENDIX
3.1 Control registers
Serial I/O register (7470/7471 group)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Serial I/O register (SIO) [Address 00DD16]
B
Function
At reset
0 At transmit: A value of “00 16” to “FF16” can be
to
set as transmit data.
7
At the transmit, data is transmitted one
bit at a time starting with the least
significant bit.
At receive: At the receive, data is received one bit
at a time starting with the most
significant bit.
?
R W
Fig. 3.1.9 Structure of Serial I/O register
Serial I/O counter and Byte counter (7470/7471 group)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Serial I/O counter and Byte counter [Address 00DE 16]
B
Function
0 Byte counter
to When using the byte specification mode, set
3 a value of “00 16” to “0F 16.” Supposing that the
value to be written into the byte counter is “n,”
a Serial transmit/receive is performed with the
clock of the “n + 1”-th byte.
4 Serial I/O counter
to When the internal clock is selected as a
6
synchronous clock, this counter generates 8
shift clocks.
When transmit data is written into the Serial
I/O register, “07 16” is set in the Serial I/O
counter.
7 Nothing is allocated for this bit. This is write
disabled bit and is undefined at reading.
Fig. 3.1.10 Structure of Serial I/O counter and Byte counter
3-6
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
At reset
R W
?
?
✕
?
? ✕
APPENDIX
3.1 Control registers
Transmit/receive buffer register (7477/7478 group)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Transmit/receive buffer register (TB/RB) [Address 00E016]
B
Function
0 At transmit: A value of “00 16” to “FF 16” can be
set as transmit data.
to
The transmit data is transferred
7
automatically by writing the transmit
data into the Transmit shift register.
At receive: When all receive data has been input
into the Receive shift register, the
receive data is automatically transferred to the receive buffer register.
At reset
R W
?
Fig. 3.1.11 Structure of Transmit/receive buffer register
Serial I/O status register (7477/7478 group)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
1
Serial I/O status register (SIOSTS) [Address 00E1 16]
B
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Name
Transmit buffer
empty flag (TBE)
Receive buffer full
flag (RBF)
Transmit shift
completion flag (TSC)
Overrun error flag
(OE)
Parity error flag
(PE)
Framing error flag
(FE)
Summing error
flag (SE)
Function
0 : Buffer full
1 : Buffer empty
0 : Buffer empty
1 : Buffer full
0 : Transmit shift in progress
1 : Transmit shift completed
0 : No error
1 : Overrun error
0 : No error
1 : Parity error
0 : No error
1 : Framing error
0 : (OE) U (PE) U (FE) = 0
1 : (OE) U (PE) U (FE) = 1
Nothing is allocated for this bit. This is a write
disabled bit. When this bit is read out, the value
is “1.”
At reset
R W
0
✕
0
✕
0
✕
0
✕
0
✕
0
✕
0
✕
1
1 ✕
Fig. 3.1.12 Structure of Serial I/O status register
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-7
APPENDIX
3.1 Control registers
Serial I/O control register (7477/7478 group)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Serial I/O control register (SIOCON) [Address 00E2 16]
B
0
1
Name
BRG count source
selection bit (CSS)
Function
0 : f(X IN)/4 or f(X CIN)/4
1 : f(X IN)/16 or f(X CIN)/16
Serial I/O
synchronous clock
selection bit (SCS)
•In clock synchronous mode
0 : BRG output divided by 4
1 : External clock input
•In UART mode
0 : BRG output divided by 16
1 : External clock input
divided by 16
2 SRDY output enable
bit (SRDY)
✽In the UART mode,
this bit is invalid.
3
4
5
6
Transmit interrupt
source selection
bit (TIC)
R W
0
0
0 : P1 7/SRDY pin operates
as ordinary I/O pin
1 : P1 7/SRDY pin operates
as S RDY output pin
0
0 : When transmit buffer
has emptied
1 : When transmit shift
operation is completed
0
Transmit enable bit (TE) 0 : Transmit disabled
1 : Transmit enabled
Receive enable bit (RE) 0 : Receive disabled
1 : Receive enabled
Serial I/O mode
0 : Clock asynchronous
selection bit (SIOM)
serial I/O (UART)
1 : Clock synchronous
7 Serial I/O enable
bit (SIOE)
At reset
0
0
0
0 : Serial I/O disabled
(pins operates as ordinary
I/O pins P1 4–P17)
0
1 : Serial I/O enabled
(pins operates as serial
I/O pins R XD - S RDY)
(Note)
Note: Port P1 4–P17 are operates as the serial I/O pin only when
the serial I/O enable bit is “1” (enable state).
At this time, Port P1 7 is also used as an ordinary I/O port.
In the UART mode, port P1 6 is used as an ordinary I/O port
when the internal clock is selected.
Fig. 3.1.13 Structure of Serial I/O control register
UART control register (7477/7478 group)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
1 1 1 1
UART control register (UARTCON) [Address 00E3 16]
B
Name
Function
0: 8 bits
0 Character length
selection bit (CHAS) 1: 7 bits
0: Parity checking disabled
1 Parity enable bit
1: Parity checking enabled
(PARE)
0: Even parity
2 Parity selection bit
(PARS)
1: Odd parity
3 Stop bit length
0: 1 stop bit
selection bit (STPS) 1: 2 stop bits
4 Nothing is allocated for these bits. These are write
to disabled bits. When these bits are read out, the
7 values are “1.”
Fig. 3.1.14 Structure of UART control register
3-8
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
At reset
R W
0
0
0
0
1
1 ✕
APPENDIX
3.1 Control registers
Timers 1 to 4
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Timer 1, Timer 2, Timer 3, Timer 4 (T1, T2, T3, T4)
[Address 00F0 16, 00F116, 00F2 16, 00F316]
B
Function
0 •Set “00 16 to FF 16.”
to •The value is decremented by 1 each time a
7 count source is input.
•Each Timer values are set to the respective
counter.
•The count values are read out by reading the
respective timer.
At reset
R W
(Note)
Note : Timers 1 and 2 are undefined.
Timer 3 is “FF 16.”
Timer 4 is “07 16.”
Fig. 3.1.15 Structure of Timers 1 to 4
Timer FF register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Timer FF register (TF) [Address 00F716]
B
0
1
2
to
7
Name
Timer 1
division flip-flop
Timer 4
division flip-flop
Function
0 : Initial value is “0”
1 : Initial value is “1”
0 : Initial value is “0”
1 : Initial value is “1”
Nothing is allocated for these bits. These are
write disabled bits and are undefined at
reading.
At reset
R W
0
0
?
? ✕
Fig. 3.1.16 Structure of Timer FF register
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-9
APPENDIX
3.1 Control registers
Timer 12 mode register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Timer 12 mode register (T12M) [Address 00F816]
B
Name
Function
Timer 1 count stop
bit
1 Timer 1 count
source selection bit
2 Timer 1 internal clock
source selection bit
0 : Count start
1 : Count stop
0 : Internal clock
(Note 1)
1 : P32/CNTR 0 external clock
0 : f(XIN)/16 or f(XCIN)/16
1 : f(XCIN)
(Note 2)
0
P12/T0 port output
selection bit
3
4 Timer 2 count stop
bit
Timer 2 count
source selection bit
5
At reset
0 : P1 2 port output
1 : T0(Timer 1 overflow
divided by 2)
0 : Count start
1 : Count stop
0 : Internal clock (Note 1)
1 : Timer 1 overflow signal
R W
0
0
0
0
0
0
b7 b6
6, 7 Timer 2 internal clock
source selection bits 0 0 : f(XIN)/16 or f(X CIN)/16
0 1 : f(XIN)/64 or f(X CIN)/64
1 0 : f(XIN)/128 or f(X CIN)/128
1 1 : f(XIN)/256 or f(X CIN)/256
(Note 3)
0
Notes 1: In the 7470/7477 group, the internal clock is f(X IN)/16.
2: Since the 7470/7477 group is not provided the sub-clock
generating circuit, f(XCIN ) cannot be used. Fix this bit to “0.”
3: Since the 7470/7477 group is not provided the sub-clock
generating circuit, f(XCIN) cannot be used.
Fig. 3.1.17 Structure of Timer 12 mode register
Timer 34 mode register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Timer 34 mode register (T34M) [Address 00F9 16]
B
Name
0
Timer 3 count stop
bit
1, 2 Timer 3 count
source selection bits
Function
At reset
0 : Count start
1 : Count stop
R W
0
b2 b1
0 0 : f(XIN)/16 or f(X CIN)/16
0 1 : f(XCIN )
1 0 : Timer 1 overflow or
Timer 2 overflow
0
1 1 : P33/CNTR 1 external
clock
3
Timer 4 count stop
bit
4, 5 Timer 4 count
source selection bits
(Note 2)
0 : Count start
1 : Count stop
0
b4 b3
0 0 : Timer 3 overflow
0 1 : f(XIN)/16 or f(X CIN)/16
1 0 : Timer 1 overflow or
0
Timer 2 overflow
1 1 : P33/CNTR 1 external
clock
(Notes 1, 2)
6
7
Timer 4 pulse width
measurement mode
selection bit
0 : Timer mode
1 : External pulse width
measurement mode
0
P13/T1 port output
selection bit
0 : P13 port
1 : T1(Timer 4 overflow divided
0
by 2 or PWM output)
Notes 1: When Timer 1 overflow is selected as a Timer 2
count source, the Timer 4 count source is the Timer 1
overflow regardless of the value of bit 6 of the
Timer mode register 2.
2: Since the 7470/7477 group is not provided the sub-clock
generating circuit, f(X CIN) cannot be used.
Fig. 3.1.18 Structure of Timer 34 mode register
3-10
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.1 Control registers
Timer mode register 2
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Timer mode register 2 (TM2) [Address 00FA16]
B
Name
Function
At reset
Timer 1 overflow FF
0 : Set disable
set enable bit
1 : Set enable
0 : Set disable
1 Timer 4 overflow FF
set enable bit
1 : Set enable
Nothing
is
allocated
for
these
bits. These are
2
to write disabled bits and are undefined at reading.
5
0
6
7
Timer 3, timer 4 count
overflow signal selection bit
Timer 3, timer 4
function selection bit
0 : Timer 1 overflow
1 : Timer 2 overflow
0 : Ordinary mode
1 : PWM mode
R W
0
0
?
? ✕
0
0
Fig. 3.1.19 Structure of Timer mode register 2
CPU mode register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 0
CPU mode register (CPUM) [Address 00FB16]
B
Name
Fix
these
bits to “0.”
0, 1
Function
At reset R W
0
0: In page 0 area
1: In page 1 area
(Note 1)
2
Stack page selection
bit
3
Nothing is allocated for this bit. This is write
enabled bit and is undefined at reading.
?
4
P50, P5 1/XCIN,XCOUT
selection bit
0: P50, P5 1
1: XCIN , XCOUT (Note 2)
0
5
XCOUT drive capacity
selection bit
0: Low
1: High
0
0
? ✕
(Note 2)
6 Main clock (X IN–XOUT) 0: Oscillates
stop bit
1: Stops
0
(Note 2)
7
Internal system clock
selection bit
0: XIN–XOUT selected
(Ordinary mode)
1: XCIN –XCOUT selected
(Low speed mode)
(Note 2)
0
Notes 1: In the products having a RAM capacity of 192 bytes or
less, set this bit to “0.”
2: Since the 7470/7477 group is not provided with the
sub-clock generating circuit, f(XCIN) cannot be used.
Fix these bits to “0.”
Fig. 3.1.20 Structure of CPU mode register
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-11
APPENDIX
3.1 Control registers
Interrupt request register 1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Interrupt request register 1 (IR1) [Address 00FC16]
B
Name
Function
At reset
R W
0 : No interrupt request
Timer 1 interrupt
1 : Interrupt requested
request bit
Timer 2 interrupt
0 : No interrupt request
request bit
1 : Interrupt requested
0 : No interrupt request
Timer 3 interrupt
1 : Interrupt requested
request bit
Timer 4 interrupt
0 : No interrupt request
request bit
1 : Interrupt requested
Nothing is allocated for this bit. This is write
disabled bit and is undefined at reading.
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
?
? ✕
5
Serial I/O receive interrupt
request bit
(7477/7478 group)(Note)
0 : No interrupt request
1 : Interrupt requested
0
✽
6
Serial I/O interrupt request
bit (7470/7471group)
Serial I/O transmit
interrupt request bit
(7477/7478 group)
0 : No interrupt request
1 : Interrupt requested
0
✽
A-D conversion completion
interrupt request bit
0 : No interrupt request
1 : Interrupt requested
0
✽
0
1
2
3
4
7
Note: In the 7470/7471group, nothing is allocated for bit 5. This is write
disabled bit and is undefined at reading.
✽ : “0” is set by software, but not “1.”
Fig. 3.1.21 Structure of Interrupt request register 1
Interrupt request register 2
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Interrupt request register 2 (IR2) [Address 00FD 16]
B
Name
Function
0
INT0 interrupt request 0 : No interrupt request
1 : Interrupt requested
bit
1 INT1 interrupt request 0 : No interrupt request
bit
1 : Interrupt requested
0 : No interrupt request
2 CNTR 0 or CNTR 1
interrupt request bit
1 : Interrupt requested
3 Nothing is allocated for these bits. There are write
to disabled bits and are undefined at reading.
7
✽ : “0” is set by software, but not “1.”
Fig. 3.1.22 Structure of Interrupt request register 2
3-12
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
At reset
R W
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
?
? ✕
APPENDIX
3.1 Control registers
Interrupt control register 1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Interrupt control register 1 (IE1) [Address 00FE 16]
B
Name
Function
At reset
0 : Interrupt disabled
Timer 1 interrupt
1 : Interrupt enabled
enable bit
Timer 2 interrupt
0 : Interrupt disabled
enable bit
1 : Interrupt enabled
0 : Interrupt disabled
Timer 3 interrupt
1 : Interrupt enabled
enable bit
Timer 4 interrupt
0 : Interrupt disabled
enable bit
1 : Interrupt enabled
Nothing is allocated for this bit. This is write
disabled bit and is undefined at reading.
0
5
Serial I/O receive interrupt
enable bit (7477/7478
group) (Note)
0 : Interrupt disabled
1 : Interrupt enabled
0
6
Serial I/O interrupt enable
bit (7470/7471 group)
Serial I/O transmit interrupt
enable bit (7477/7478 group)
A-D conversion completion
interrupt enable bit
0 : Interrupt disabled
1 : Interrupt enabled
0
0 : Interrupt disabled
1 : Interrupt enabled
0
0
1
2
3
4
7
R W
0
0
0
?
? ✕
Note: In the 7470/7471 group, Nothing is allocated for bit 5.
This is write disabled bit and undefined at reading.
Fig. 3.1.23 Structure of Interrupt control register 1
Interrupt control register 2
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Interrupt control register 2 (IE2) [Address 00FF 16]
B
Name
Function
0
0 : Interrupt disabled
INT0 interrupt enable
1 : Interrupt enabled
bit
1 INT1 interrupt enable
0 : Interrupt disabled
bit
1 : Interrupt enabled
0 : Interrupt disabled
2 CNTR 0 or CNTR 1
interrupt enable bit
1 : Interrupt enabled
3 Nothing is allocated for these bits. There are write
to disabled bits and are undefined at reading.
7
At reset
R W
0
0
0
?
? ✕
Fig. 3.1.24 Structure of Interrupt control register 2
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-13
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH02-91B<9YA0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
Receipt
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37470M2-XXXSP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Date:
Section head Supervisor
signature
signature
❈ Customer
TEL
(
Company
name
Date
issued
)
Date:
Issuance
signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked ❈.
Submitted by
Supervisor
❈ 1. Confirmation
Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted.
Three sets of EPROMs are required for each pattern (Check @ in the appropriate box).
If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce masks based in
this data. We shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the mask ROM data on the products we produce differ from
this data. Thus, the customer must be especially careful in verifying the data contained in the EPROMs submitted.
(hexadecimal notation)
Checksum code for entire EPROM
EPROM type (indicate the type used)
27128
27256
27512
EPROM address
000016 Area for ASCII
EPROM address
000016 Area for ASCII
EPROM address
000016 Area for ASCII
000F16
001016
codes of the name
of the product
‘M37470M2–’
2FFF16
300016
000F16
001016
6FFF16
700016
ROM (4K)
3FFF16
codes of the name
of the product
‘M37470M2–’
000F16
001016
codes of the name
of the product
‘M37470M2–’
EFFF 16
F00016
ROM (4K)
7FFF16
ROM (4K)
FFFF16
(1) Set “FF16” in the shaded area.
(2) Write the ASCII codes that indicates the name of the
product ‘M37470M2–’ to addresses 000016 to 000F16 .
ASCII codes ‘M37470M2–’ are listed on the right. The
addresses and data are in hexadecimal notation.
Address
000016
000116
000216
000316
000416
000516
000616
000716
‘M’ = 4D16
‘3’ = 33 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘4’ = 34 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘0’ = 30 16
‘M’ = 4D16
‘2’ = 32 16
(1/2)
3-14
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Address
000816
000916
000A16
000B16
000C16
000D16
000E16
000F16
‘ – ’ = 2D16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH02-91B<9YA0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37470M2-XXXSP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Recommend to writing the following pseudo-command to the start address of the assembler source program.
EPROM type
The pseudo-command
27256
27128
❈=
.BYTE
$C000
‘M37470M2–’
❈ = $8000
.BYTE ‘M37470M2–’
27512
❈ = $0000
.BYTE ‘M37470M2–’
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the mask confirmation, the ROM processing
is disabled. Write the data correctly.
❈ 2. Mark specification
Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the type package being ordered fill out the appropriate
mark specification form (32P4B for M37470M2-XXXSP) and attach to the mask ROM confirmation form.
❈ 3. Comments
(2/2)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-15
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH02-92B<9YA0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
Receipt
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37470M4-XXXSP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Date:
Section head Supervisor
signature
signature
❈ Customer
TEL
(
Company
name
Date
issued
)
Date:
Issuance
signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked ❈.
Submitted by
Supervisor
❈ 1. Confirmation
Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted.
Three sets of EPROMs are required for each pattern (Check @ in the appropriate box).
If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce masks based in
this data. We shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the mask ROM data on the products we produce differ from
this data. Thus, the customer must be especially careful in verifying the data contained in the EPROMs submitted.
Checksum code for entire EPROM
(hexadecimal notation)
EPROM type (indicate the type used)
27128
27256
EPROM address
000016 Area for ASCII
EPROM address
000016 Area for ASCII
000F16
001016
codes of the name
of the product
‘M37470M4–’
1FFF16
200016
000F16
001016
5FFF16
600016
ROM (8K)
3FFF16
codes of the name
of the product
‘M37470M4–’
27512
EPROM address
000016 Area for ASCII
000F16
001016
codes of the name
of the product
‘M37470M4–’
DFFF16
E00016
ROM (8K)
7FFF16
ROM (8K)
FFFF16
(1) Set “FF16” in the shaded area.
(2) Write the ASCII codes that indicates the name of the
product ‘M37470M4–’ to addresses 000016 to 000F16 .
ASCII codes ‘M37470M4–’ are listed on the right. The
addresses and data are in hexadecimal notation.
Address
000016
000116
000216
000316
000416
000516
000616
000716
‘M’ = 4D16
‘3’ = 33 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘4’ = 34 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘0’ = 30 16
‘M’ = 4D16
‘4’ = 34 16
(1/2)
3-16
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Address
000816
000916
000A16
000B16
000C16
000D16
000E16
000F16
‘ – ’ = 2D 16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH02-92B<9YA0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37470M4-XXXSP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Recommend to writing the following pseudo-command to the start address of the assembler source program.
EPROM type
The pseudo-command
27128
❈=
.BYTE
$C000
‘M37470M4–’
27256
❈ = $8000
.BYTE ‘M37470M4–’
27512
❈ = $0000
.BYTE ‘M37470M4–’
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the mask confirmation, the ROM processing
is disabled. Write the data correctly.
❈ 2. Mark specification
Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the type package being ordered fill out the appropriate
mark specification form (32P4B for M37470M4-XXXSP) and attach to the mask ROM confirmation form.
❈ 3. Comments
(2/2)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-17
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH02-93B<9YA0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
Receipt
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37470M8-XXXSP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Date:
Section head Supervisor
signature
signature
❈ Customer
TEL
(
Company
name
Date
issued
)
Date:
Issuance
signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked ❈.
Submitted by
Supervisor
❈ 1. Confirmation
Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted.
Three sets of EPROMs are required for each pattern (Check @ in the appropriate box).
If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce masks based in
this data. We shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the mask ROM data on the products we produce differ from
this data. Thus, the customer must be especially careful in verifying the data contained in the EPROMs submitted.
Checksum code for entire EPROM
(hexadecimal notation)
EPROM type (indicate the type used)
27256
EPROM address
000016 Area for ASCII
000F16
001016
codes of the name
of the product
‘M37470M8–’
3FFF16
400016
27512
EPROM address
000016 Area for ASCII
000F16
001016
BFFF 16
C00016
ROM (16K)
7FFF16
codes of the name
of the product
‘M37470M8–’
ROM (16K)
FFFF16
(1) Set “FF16” in the shaded area.
(2) Write the ASCII codes that indicates the name of the
product ‘M37470M8–’ to addresses 000016 to 000F16 .
ASCII codes ‘M37470M8–’ are listed on the right. The
addresses and data are in hexadecimal notation.
Address
000016
000116
000216
000316
000416
000516
000616
000716
‘M’ = 4D16
‘3’ = 33 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘4’ = 34 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘0’ = 30 16
‘M’ = 4D16
‘8’ = 38 16
(1/2)
3-18
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Address
000816
000916
000A16
000B16
000C16
000D16
000E16
000F16
‘ – ’ = 2D 16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH02-93B<9YA0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37470M8-XXXSP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Recommend to writing the following pseudo-command to the start address of the assembler source program.
EPROM type
The pseudo-command
27256
❈ = $8000
.BYTE ‘M37470M8–’
27512
❈ = $0000
.BYTE ‘M37470M8–’
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the mask confirmation, the ROM processing
is disabled. Write the data correctly.
❈ 2. Mark specification
Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the type package being ordered fill out the appropriate
mark specification form (32P4B for M37470M8-XXXSP) and attach to the mask ROM confirmation form.
❈ 3. Comments
(2/2)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-19
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH02-94B<9YB0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
Receipt
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37471M2-XXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Date:
Section head Supervisor
signature
signature
❈ Customer
TEL
(
Company
name
Date
issued
)
Date:
Issuance
signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked ❈.
Submitted by
Supervisor
❈ 1. Confirmation
Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted.
Three sets of EPROMs are required for each pattern (Check @ in the appropriate box).
If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce masks based in
this data. We shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the mask ROM data on the products we produce differ from
this data. Thus, the customer must be especially careful in verifying the data contained in the EPROMs submitted.
Microcomputer name :
M37471M2-XXXSP
M37471M2-XXXFP
(hexadecimal notation)
Checksum code for entire EPROM
EPROM type (indicate the type used)
27128
27256
EPROM address
000016 Area for ASCII
EPROM address
000016 Area for ASCII
000F16
001016
codes of the name
of the product
‘M37471M2–’
2FFF16
300016
000F16
001016
6FFF16
700016
ROM (4K)
3FFF16
codes of the name
of the product
‘M37471M2–’
27512
EPROM address
000016 Area for ASCII
000F16
001016
codes of the name
of the product
‘M37471M2–’
EFFF 16
F00016
ROM (4K)
7FFF16
ROM (4K)
FFFF16
(1) Set “FF16” in the shaded area.
(2) Write the ASCII codes that indicates the name of the
product ‘M37471M2–’ to addresses 000016 to 000F16 .
ASCII codes ‘M37471M2–’ are listed on the right. The
addresses and data are in hexadecimal notation.
Address
000016
000116
000216
000316
000416
000516
000616
000716
‘M’ = 4D16
‘3’ = 33 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘4’ = 34 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘1’ = 31 16
‘M’ = 4D16
‘2’ = 32 16
(1/2)
3-20
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Address
000816
000916
000A16
000B16
000C16
000D16
000E16
000F16
‘ – ’ = 2D 16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH02-94B<9YB0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37471M2-XXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Recommend to writing the following pseudo-command to the start address of the assembler source program.
EPROM type
The pseudo-command
27128
❈=
.BYTE
$C000
‘M37471M2–’
27256
❈ = $8000
.BYTE ‘M37471M2–’
27512
❈ = $0000
.BYTE ‘M37471M2–’
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the mask confirmation, the ROM processing
is disabled. Write the data correctly.
❈ 2. Mark specification
Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the type package being ordered fill out the appropriate
mark specification form (42P4B for M37471M2-XXXSP, 56P6N for M37471M2-XXXFP) and attach to the mask ROM
confirmation form.
❈ 3. Comments
(2/2)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-21
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH02-95B<9YB0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
Receipt
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37471M4-XXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Date:
Section head Supervisor
signature
signature
❈ Customer
TEL
(
Company
name
Date
issued
)
Date:
Issuance
signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked ❈.
Submitted by
Supervisor
❈ 1. Confirmation
Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted.
Three sets of EPROMs are required for each pattern (Check @ in the appropriate box).
If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce masks based in
this data. We shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the mask ROM data on the products we produce differ from
this data. Thus, the customer must be especially careful in verifying the data contained in the EPROMs submitted.
Microcomputer name :
M37471M4-XXXSP
M37471M4-XXXFP
Checksum code for entire EPROM
(hexadecimal notation)
EPROM type (indicate the type used)
27128
27256
27512
EPROM address
000016 Area for ASCII
EPROM address
000016 Area for ASCII
EPROM address
000016 Area for ASCII
000F16
001016
codes of the name
of the product
‘M37471M4–’
1FFF16
200016
000F16
001016
5FFF16
600016
ROM (8K)
3FFF16
codes of the name
of the product
‘M37471M4–’
000F16
001016
codes of the name
of the product
‘M37471M4–’
DFFF16
E00016
ROM (8K)
7FFF16
ROM (8K)
FFFF 16
(1) Set “FF16” in the shaded area.
(2) Write the ASCII codes that indicates the name of the
product ‘M37471M4–’ to addresses 000016 to 000F16.
ASCII codes ‘M37471M4–’ are listed on the right. The
addresses and data are in hexadecimal notation.
Address
000016
000116
000216
000316
000416
000516
000616
000716
(1/2)
3-22
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
‘M’ = 4D16
‘3’ = 3316
‘7’ = 3716
‘4’ = 3416
‘7’ = 3716
‘1’ = 3116
‘M’ = 4D16
‘4’ = 3416
Address
000816
000916
000A16
000B16
000C16
000D16
000E16
000F16
‘ – ’ = 2D16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH02-95B<9YB0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37471M4-XXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Recommend to writing the following pseudo-command to the start address of the assembler source program.
EPROM type
The pseudo-command
27128
❈=
.BYTE
$C000
‘M37471M4–’
27256
❈ = $8000
.BYTE ‘M37471M4–’
27512
❈ = $0000
.BYTE ‘M37471M4–’
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the mask confirmation, the ROM processing
is disabled. Write the data correctly.
❈ 2. Mark specification
Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the type package being ordered fill out the appropriate
mark specification form (42P4B for M37471M4-XXXSP, 56P6N for M37471M4-XXXFP) and attach to the mask ROM
confirmation form.
❈ 3. Comments
(2/2)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-23
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH02-96B<9YB0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
Receipt
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37471M8-XXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Date:
Section head Supervisor
signature
signature
❈ Customer
TEL
(
Company
name
Date
issued
)
Date:
Issuance
signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked ❈.
Submitted by
Supervisor
❈ 1. Confirmation
Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted.
Three sets of EPROMs are required for each pattern (Check @ in the appropriate box).
If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce masks based in
this data. We shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the mask ROM data on the products we produce differ from
this data. Thus, the customer must be especially careful in verifying the data contained in the EPROMs submitted.
M37471M8-XXXSP
Microcomputer name :
M37471M8-XXXFP
(hexadecimal notation)
Checksum code for entire EPROM
EPROM type (indicate the type used)
27256
EPROM address
000016 Area for ASCII
000F16
001016
codes of the name
of the product
‘M37471M8–’
3FFF16
400016
27512
EPROM address
000016 Area for ASCII
000F16
001016
BFFF 16
C00016
ROM (16K)
7FFF16
codes of the name
of the product
‘M37471M8–’
ROM (16K)
FFFF16
(1) Set “FF16” in the shaded area.
(2) Write the ASCII codes that indicates the name of the
product ‘M37471M8–’ to addresses 000016 to 000F16 .
ASCII codes ‘M37471M8–’ are listed on the right. The
addresses and data are in hexadecimal notation.
Address
000016
000116
000216
000316
000416
000516
000616
000716
‘M’ = 4D16
‘3’ = 33 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘4’ = 34 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘1’ = 31 16
‘M’ = 4D16
‘8’ = 38 16
(1/2)
3-24
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Address
000816
000916
000A16
000B16
000C16
000D16
000E16
000F16
‘ – ’ = 2D 16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH02-96B<9YB0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37471M8-XXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Recommend to writing the following pseudo-command to the start address of the assembler source program.
EPROM type
The pseudo-command
27256
❈ = $8000
.BYTE ‘M37471M8–’
27512
❈ = $0000
.BYTE ‘M37471M8–’
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the mask confirmation, the ROM processing
is disabled. Write the data correctly.
❈ 2. Mark specification
Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the type package being ordered fill out the appropriate
mark specification form (42P4B for M37471M8-XXXSP, 56P6N for M37471M8-XXXFP) and attach to the mask ROM
confirmation form.
❈ 3. Comments
(2/2)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-25
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH08-22B<3ZA0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
Receipt
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37477M2TXXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Date:
Section head Supervisor
signature
signature
❈ Customer
TEL
(
Company
name
Date
issued
)
Date:
Issuance
signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked ❈.
Submitted by
Supervisor
❈ 1. Confirmation
Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted.
Three EPROMs are required for each pattern.
If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce masks based on this data. We
shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the mask ROM data on the products we produce differs from this data.
Thus, extreme care must be taken to verify the data in the submitted EPROMs.
M37477M2TXXXSP
Microcomputer name :
M37477M2TXXXFP
(hexadecimal notation)
Checksum code for entire EPROM
EPROM type (indicate the type used)
27128
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37477M2T’
27256
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37477M2T’
27512
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37477M2T’
000F16
001016
000F16
001016
000F16
001016
2FFF16
300016
6FFF16
700016
EFFF 16
F00016
data
ROM 4096 bytes
3FFF16
data
ROM 4096 bytes
7FFF16
data
ROM 4096 bytes
FFFF16
(1) Set the data in the unused area (the shaded area of
the diagram) to “FF16”.
(2) The ASCII codes of the product name “M37477M2T”
must be entered in addresses 000016 to 000816 . And
set the data “FF16” in addresses 000916 to 000F16 .
The ASCII codes and addresses are listed to the right
in hexadecimal notation.
Address
000016
000116
000216
000316
000416
000516
000616
000716
‘M’ = 4D16
‘3’ = 33 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘4’ = 34 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘M’ = 4D16
‘2’ = 32 16
(1/2)
3-26
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Address
000816
000916
000A16
000B16
000C16
000D16
000E16
000F16
‘ T ’ = 5416
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH08-22B<3ZA0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37477M2TXXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
We recommend the use of the following pseudo-command to set the start address of the assembler source program.
EPROM type
The pseudo-command
27128
❈ = $C000
.BYTE ‘M37477M2T’
27256
❈ = $8000
.BYTE ‘M37477M2T’
27512
❈ = $0000
.BYTE ‘M37477M2T’
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the mask confirmation form, the ROM
will not be processed.
❈ 2. Mark specification
Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the package being ordered. Fill out the appropriate mark
specification form (32P4B for M37477M2TXXXSP, 32P2W for M37477M2TXXXFP) and attach it to the mask ROM
confirmation form.
❈ 3. Comments
(2/2)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-27
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH06-67B<2XA1>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
Receipt
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37477M4-XXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Date:
Section head Supervisor
signature
signature
❈ Customer
TEL
(
Company
name
Date
issued
)
Date:
Issuance
signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked ❈.
Submitted by
Supervisor
❈ 1. Confirmation
Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted.
Three EPROMs are required for each pattern.
If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce masks based on this data. We
shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the mask ROM data on the products we produce differs from this data.
Thus, extreme care must be taken to verify the data in the submitted EPROMs.
Microcomputer name :
M37477M4-XXXSP
M37477M4-XXXFP
Checksum code for entire EPROM
(hexadecimal notation)
EPROM type (indicate the type used)
27128
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37477M4–’
27256
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37477M4–’
27512
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37477M4–’
000F16
001016
000F16
001016
000F16
001016
1FFF16
200016
5FFF16
600016
DFFF16
E00016
data
ROM 8192 bytes
data
ROM 8192 bytes
3FFF16
7FFF16
data
ROM 8192 bytes
FFFF16
(1) Set the data in the unused area (the shaded area of
the diagram) to “FF16”.
(2) The ASCII codes of the product name “M37477M4–”
must be entered in addresses 000016 to 000816 . And
set the data “FF16” in addresses 000916 to 000F16 .
The ASCII codes and addresses are listed to the right
in hexadecimal notation.
Address
000016
000116
000216
000316
000416
000516
000616
000716
‘M’ = 4D16
‘3’ = 33 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘4’ = 34 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘M’ = 4D16
‘4’ = 34 16
(1/2)
3-28
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Address
000816
000916
000A16
000B16
000C16
000D16
000E16
000F16
‘ – ’ = 2D 16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH06-67B<2XA1>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37477M4-XXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
We recommend the use of the following pseudo-command to set the start address of the assembler source program.
EPROM type
The pseudo-command
27128
❈=
.BYTE
$C000
‘M37477M4–’
27256
❈ = $8000
.BYTE ‘M37477M4–’
27512
❈ = $0000
.BYTE ‘M37477M4–’
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the mask confirmation form, the ROM
will not be processed.
❈ 2. Mark specification
Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the package being ordered. Fill out the appropriate mark
specification form (32P4B for M37477M4-XXXSP, 32P2W for M37477M4-XXXFP) and attach it to the mask ROM
confirmation form.
❈ 3. Comments
(2/2)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-29
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH06-73B<2XA1>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
Receipt
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37477M4TXXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Date:
Section head Supervisor
signature
signature
❈ Customer
TEL
(
Company
name
Date
issued
)
Date:
Issuance
signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked ❈.
Submitted by
Supervisor
❈ 1. Confirmation
Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted.
Three EPROMs are required for each pattern.
If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce masks based on this data. We
shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the mask ROM data on the products we produce differs from this data.
Thus, extreme care must be taken to verify the data in the submitted EPROMs.
M37477M4TXXXSP
Microcomputer name :
M37477M4TXXXFP
(hexadecimal notation)
Checksum code for entire EPROM
EPROM type (indicate the type used)
27128
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37477M4T’
27256
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37477M4T’
27512
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37477M4T’
000F16
001016
000F16
001016
000F16
001016
1FFF16
200016
5FFF16
600016
DFFF16
E00016
data
ROM 8192 bytes
3FFF16
data
ROM 8192 bytes
7FFF16
data
ROM 8192 bytes
FFFF 16
(1) Set the data in the unused area (the shaded area of
the diagram) to “FF16 ”.
(2) The ASCII codes of the product name “M37477M4T”
must be entered in addresses 000016 to 000816 . And
set the data “FF16 ” in addresses 000916 to 000F16.
The ASCII codes and addresses are listed to the right
in hexadecimal notation.
Address
000016
000116
000216
000316
000416
000516
000616
000716
(1/2)
3-30
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
‘M’ = 4D16
‘3’ = 3316
‘7’ = 3716
‘4’ = 3416
‘7’ = 3716
‘7’ = 3716
‘M’ = 4D16
‘4’ = 3416
Address
000816
000916
000A16
000B16
000C16
000D16
000E16
000F16
‘ T ’ = 5416
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH06-73B<2XA1>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37477M4TXXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
We recommend the use of the following pseudo-command to set the start address of the assembler source program.
EPROM type
The pseudo-command
27128
❈=
.BYTE
$C000
‘M37477M4T’
27256
❈ = $8000
.BYTE ‘M37477M4T’
27512
❈ = $0000
.BYTE ‘M37477M4T’
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the mask confirmation form, the ROM
will not be processed.
❈ 2. Mark specification
Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the package being ordered. Fill out the appropriate mark
specification form (32P4B for M37477M4TXXXSP, 32P2W for M37477M4TXXXFP) and attach it to the mask ROM
confirmation form.
❈ 3. Comments
(2/2)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-31
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH06-68B<2XA1>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
Receipt
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37477M8-XXXSP/FP
Date:
Section head Supervisor
signature
signature
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
❈ Customer
TEL
(
Company
name
Date
issued
)
Date:
Issuance
signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked ❈.
Submitted by
Supervisor
❈ 1. Confirmation
Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted.
Three EPROMs are required for each pattern.
If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce masks based on this data. We
shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the mask ROM data on the products we produce differs from this data.
Thus, extreme care must be taken to verify the data in the submitted EPROMs.
M37477M8-XXXSP
Microcomputer name :
M37477M8-XXXFP
(hexadecimal notation)
Checksum code for entire EPROM
EPROM type (indicate the type used)
27256
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37477M8–’
27512
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37477M8–’
000F16
001016
000F16
001016
3FFF16
400016
BFFF16
C00016
data
ROM 16384 bytes
7FFF16
data
ROM 16384 bytes
FFFF 16
(1) Set the data in the unused area (the shaded area of
the diagram) to “FF16 ”.
(2) The ASCII codes of the product name “M37477M8–”
must be entered in addresses 000016 to 000816 . And
set the data “FF16 ” in addresses 000916 to 000F16.
The ASCII codes and addresses are listed to the right
in hexadecimal notation.
Address
000016
000116
000216
000316
000416
000516
000616
000716
(1/2)
3-32
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
‘M’ = 4D16
‘3’ = 3316
‘7’ = 3716
‘4’ = 3416
‘7’ = 3716
‘7’ = 3716
‘M’ = 4D16
‘8’ = 3816
Address
000816
000916
000A16
000B16
000C16
000D16
000E16
000F16
‘ – ’ = 2D16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH06-68B<2XA1>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37477M8-XXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
We recommend the use of the following pseudo-command to set the start address of the assembler source program.
EPROM type
The pseudo-command
27256
❈ = $8000
.BYTE ‘M37477M8–’
27512
❈ = $0000
.BYTE ‘M37477M8–’
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the mask confirmation form, the ROM
will not be processed.
❈ 2. Mark specification
Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the package being ordered. Fill out the appropriate mark
specification form (32P4B for M37477M8-XXXSP, 32P2W for M37477M8-XXXFP) and attach it to the mask ROM
confirmation form.
❈ 3. Comments
(2/2)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-33
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH06-74B<2XA1>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
Receipt
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37477M8TXXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Date:
Section head Supervisor
signature
signature
❈ Customer
TEL
(
Company
name
Date
issued
)
Date:
Issuance
signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked ❈.
Submitted by
Supervisor
❈ 1. Confirmation
Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted.
Three EPROMs are required for each pattern.
If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce masks based on this data. We
shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the mask ROM data on the products we produce differs from this data.
Thus, extreme care must be taken to verify the data in the submitted EPROMs.
Microcomputer name :
M37477M8TXXXSP
M37477M8TXXXFP
Checksum code for entire EPROM
(hexadecimal notation)
EPROM type (indicate the type used)
27256
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37477M8T’
27512
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37477M8T’
000F16
001016
000F16
001016
3FFF16
400016
BFFF 16
C00016
data
ROM 16384 bytes
7FFF16
data
ROM 16384 bytes
FFFF16
(1) Set the data in the unused area (the shaded area of
the diagram) to “FF16”.
(2) The ASCII codes of the product name “M37477M8T”
must be entered in addresses 000016 to 000816 . And
set the data “FF16” in addresses 000916 to 000F16 .
The ASCII codes and addresses are listed to the right
in hexadecimal notation.
Address
000016
000116
000216
000316
000416
000516
000616
000716
‘M’ = 4D16
‘3’ = 33 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘4’ = 34 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘M’ = 4D16
‘8’ = 38 16
(1/2)
3-34
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Address
000816
000916
000A16
000B16
000C16
000D16
000E16
000F16
‘ T ’ = 5416
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH06-74B<2XA1>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37477M8TXXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
We recommend the use of the following pseudo-command to set the start address of the assembler source program.
EPROM type
The pseudo-command
27256
❈ = $8000
.BYTE ‘M37477M8T’
27512
❈ = $0000
.BYTE ‘M37477M8T’
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the mask confirmation form, the ROM
will not be processed.
❈ 2. Mark specification
Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the package being ordered. Fill out the appropriate mark
specification form (32P4B for M37477M8TXXXSP, 32P2W for M37477M8TXXXFP) and attach it to the mask ROM
confirmation form.
❈ 3. Comments
(2/2)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-35
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH08-23B<2XA0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
Receipt
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37478M2TXXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Date:
Section head Supervisor
signature
signature
❈ Customer
TEL
(
Company
name
Date
issued
)
Date:
Issuance
signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked ❈.
Submitted by
Supervisor
❈ 1. Confirmation
Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted.
Three EPROMs are required for each pattern.
If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce masks based on this data. We
shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the mask ROM data on the products we produce differs from this data.
Thus, extreme care must be taken to verify the data in the submitted EPROMs.
M37478M2TXXXSP
Microcomputer name :
M37478M2TXXXFP
(hexadecimal notation)
Checksum code for entire EPROM
EPROM type (indicate the type used)
27128
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37478M2T’
27256
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37478M2T’
27512
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37478M2T’
000F16
001016
000F16
001016
000F16
001016
2FFF16
300016
6FFF16
700016
EFFF 16
F00016
data
ROM 4096 bytes
3FFF16
data
ROM 4096 bytes
7FFF16
data
ROM 4096 bytes
FFFF16
(1) Set the data in the unused area (the shaded area of
the diagram) to “FF16”.
(2) The ASCII codes of the product name “M37478M2T”
must be entered in addresses 000016 to 000816 . And
set the data “FF16” in addresses 000916 to 000F16 .
The ASCII codes and addresses are listed to the right
in hexadecimal notation.
Address
000016
000116
000216
000316
000416
000516
000616
000716
‘M’ = 4D16
‘3’ = 33 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘4’ = 34 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘8’ = 38 16
‘M’ = 4D16
‘2’ = 32 16
(1/2)
3-36
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Address
000816
000916
000A16
000B16
000C16
000D16
000E16
000F16
‘ T ’ = 5416
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH08-23B<2XA0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37478M2TXXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
We recommend the use of the following pseudo-command to set the start address of the assembler source program.
EPROM type
The pseudo-command
27128
❈=
.BYTE
$C000
‘M37478M2T’
27256
❈ = $8000
.BYTE
‘M37478M2T’
27512
❈ = $0000
.BYTE
‘M37478M2T’
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the mask confirmation form, the ROM
will not be processed.
❈ 2. Mark specification
Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the package being ordered. Fill out the appropriate mark
specification form (42P4B for M37478M2TXXXSP, 56P6N for M37478M2TXXXFP) and attach it to the mask ROM
confirmation form.
❈ 3. Comments
(2/2)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-37
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH06-70B<2XA0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
Receipt
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37478M4-XXXSP/FP
Date:
Section head Supervisor
signature
signature
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
❈ Customer
TEL
(
Company
name
Date
issued
)
Date:
Issuance
signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked ❈.
Submitted by
Supervisor
❈ 1. Confirmation
Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted.
Three EPROMs are required for each pattern.
If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce masks based on this data. We
shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the mask ROM data on the products we produce differs from this data.
Thus, extreme care must be taken to verify the data in the submitted EPROMs.
M37478M4-XXXSP
Microcomputer name :
M37478M4-XXXFP
(hexadecimal notation)
Checksum code for entire EPROM
EPROM type (indicate the type used)
27128
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37478M4–’
27256
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37478M4–’
27512
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37478M4–’
000F16
001016
000F16
001016
000F16
001016
1FFF16
200016
5FFF16
600016
DFFF16
E00016
data
ROM 8192 bytes
3FFF16
data
ROM 8192 bytes
7FFF16
data
ROM 8192 bytes
FFFF16
(1) Set the data in the unused area (the shaded area of
the diagram) to “FF16”.
(2) The ASCII codes of the product name “M37478M4–”
must be entered in addresses 000016 to 000816 . And
set the data “FF16” in addresses 000916 to 000F16 .
The ASCII codes and addresses are listed to the right
in hexadecimal notation.
Address
000016
000116
000216
000316
000416
000516
000616
000716
‘M’ = 4D16
‘3’ = 33 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘4’ = 34 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘8’ = 38 16
‘M’ = 4D16
‘4’ = 34 16
(1/2)
3-38
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Address
000816
000916
000A16
000B16
000C16
000D16
000E16
000F16
‘ – ’ = 2D 16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH06-70B<2XA0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37478M4-XXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
We recommend the use of the following pseudo-command to set the start address of the assembler source program.
EPROM type
The pseudo-command
27128
❈=
.BYTE
$C000
‘M37478M4–’
27256
❈ = $8000
.BYTE ‘M37478M4–’
27512
❈ = $0000
.BYTE ‘M37478M4–’
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the mask confirmation form, the ROM
will not be processed.
❈ 2. Mark specification
Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the package being ordered. Fill out the appropriate mark
specification form (42P4B for M37478M4-XXXSP, 56P6N for M37478M4-XXXFP) and attach it to the mask ROM
confirmation form.
❈ 3. Comments
(2/2)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-39
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH06-76B<2XA0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
Receipt
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37478M4TXXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Date:
Section head Supervisor
signature
signature
❈ Customer
TEL
(
Company
name
Date
issued
)
Date:
Issuance
signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked ❈.
Submitted by
Supervisor
❈ 1. Confirmation
Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted.
Three EPROMs are required for each pattern.
If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce masks based on this data. We
shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the mask ROM data on the products we produce differs from this data.
Thus, extreme care must be taken to verify the data in the submitted EPROMs.
M37478M4TXXXSP
Microcomputer name :
M37478M4TXXXFP
(hexadecimal notation)
Checksum code for entire EPROM
EPROM type (indicate the type used)
27128
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37478M4T’
27256
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37478M4T’
27512
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37478M4T’
000F16
001016
000F16
001016
000F16
001016
1FFF16
200016
5FFF16
600016
DFFF16
E00016
data
ROM 8192 bytes
3FFF16
data
ROM 8192 bytes
7FFF16
data
ROM 8192 bytes
FFFF16
(1) Set the data in the unused area (the shaded area of
the diagram) to “FF16”.
(2) The ASCII codes of the product name “M37478M4T”
must be entered in addresses 000016 to 000816 . And
set the data “FF16” in addresses 000916 to 000F16 .
The ASCII codes and addresses are listed to the right
in hexadecimal notation.
Address
000016
000116
000216
000316
000416
000516
000616
000716
‘M’ = 4D16
‘3’ = 33 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘4’ = 34 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘8’ = 38 16
‘M’ = 4D16
‘4’ = 34 16
(1/2)
3-40
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Address
000816
000916
000A16
000B16
000C16
000D16
000E16
000F16
‘ T ’ = 5416
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH06-76B<2XA0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37478M4TXXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
We recommend the use of the following pseudo-command to set the start address of the assembler source program.
EPROM type
The pseudo-command
27128
❈ = $C000
.BYTE
‘M37478M4T’
27256
❈ = $8000
.BYTE
‘M37478M4T’
27512
❈ = $0000
.BYTE
‘M37478M4T’
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the mask confirmation form, the ROM
will not be processed.
❈ 2. Mark specification
Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the package being ordered. Fill out the appropriate mark
specification form (42P4B for M37478M4TXXXSP, 56P6N for M37478M4TXXXFP) and attach it to the mask ROM
confirmation form.
❈ 3. Comments
(2/2)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-41
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH06-71B<2XA0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
Receipt
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37478M8-XXXSP/FP
Date:
Section head Supervisor
signature
signature
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
❈ Customer
TEL
(
Company
name
Date
issued
)
Date:
Issuance
signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked ❈.
Submitted by
Supervisor
❈ 1. Confirmation
Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted.
Three EPROMs are required for each pattern.
If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce masks based on this data. We
shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the mask ROM data on the products we produce differs from this data.
Thus, extreme care must be taken to verify the data in the submitted EPROMs.
Microcomputer name :
M37478M8-XXXSP
M37478M8-XXXFP
Checksum code for entire EPROM
(hexadecimal notation)
EPROM type (indicate the type used)
27256
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37478M8–’
27512
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37478M8–’
000F16
001016
000F16
001016
3FFF16
400016
BFFF16
C00016
data
ROM 16384 bytes
7FFF16
data
ROM 16384 bytes
FFFF16
(1) Set the data in the unused area (the shaded area of
the diagram) to “FF16”.
(2) The ASCII codes of the product name “M37478M8–”
must be entered in addresses 000016 to 000816 . And
set the data “FF16” in addresses 000916 to 000F16 .
The ASCII codes and addresses are listed to the right
in hexadecimal notation.
Address
000016
000116
000216
000316
000416
000516
000616
000716
‘M’ = 4D16
‘3’ = 33 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘4’ = 34 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘8’ = 38 16
‘M’ = 4D16
‘8’ = 38 16
(1/2)
3-42
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Address
000816
000916
000A16
000B16
000C16
000D16
000E16
000F16
‘ – ’ = 2D 16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH06-71B<2XA0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37478M8-XXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
We recommend the use of the following pseudo-command to set the start address of the assembler source program.
EPROM type
The pseudo-command
27256
❈ = $8000
.BYTE ‘M37478M8–’
27512
❈ = $0000
.BYTE ‘M37478M8–’
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the mask confirmation form, the ROM
will not be processed.
❈ 2. Mark specification
Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the package being ordered. Fill out the appropriate mark
specification form (42P4B for M37478M8-XXXSP, 56P6N for M37478M8-XXXFP) and attach it to the mask ROM
confirmation form.
❈ 3. Comments
(2/2)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-43
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH06-77B<2XA0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
Receipt
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37478M8TXXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Date:
Section head Supervisor
signature
signature
❈ Customer
TEL
(
Company
name
Date
issued
)
Date:
Issuance
signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked ❈.
Submitted by
Supervisor
❈ 1. Confirmation
Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted.
Three EPROMs are required for each pattern.
If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce masks based on this data. We
shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the mask ROM data on the products we produce differs from this data.
Thus, extreme care must be taken to verify the data in the submitted EPROMs.
Microcomputer name :
M37478M8TXXXSP
M37478M8TXXXFP
Checksum code for entire EPROM
(hexadecimal notation)
EPROM type (indicate the type used)
27256
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37478M8T’
27512
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37478M8T’
000F16
001016
000F16
001016
3FFF16
400016
BFFF16
C00016
data
ROM 16384 bytes
7FFF16
data
ROM 16384 bytes
FFFF16
(1) Set the data in the unused area (the shaded area of
the diagram) to “FF16”.
(2) The ASCII codes of the product name “M37478M8T”
must be entered in addresses 000016 to 000816 . And
set the data “FF16” in addresses 000916 to 000F16 .
The ASCII codes and addresses are listed to the right
in hexadecimal notation.
Address
000016
000116
000216
000316
000416
000516
000616
000716
‘M’ = 4D16
‘3’ = 33 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘4’ = 34 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘8’ = 38 16
‘M’ = 4D16
‘8’ = 38 16
(1/2)
3-44
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Address
000816
000916
000A16
000B16
000C16
000D16
000E16
000F16
‘ T ’ = 5416
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
APPENDIX
3.2 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH06-77B<2XA0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37478M8TXXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
We recommend the use of the following pseudo-command to set the start address of the assembler source program.
EPROM type
The pseudo-command
27256
❈ = $8000
.BYTE ‘M37478M8T’
27512
❈ = $0000
.BYTE ‘M37478M8T’
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the mask confirmation form, the ROM
will not be processed.
❈ 2. Mark specification
Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the package being ordered. Fill out the appropriate mark
specification form (42P4B for M37478M8TXXXSP, 56P6N for M37478M8TXXXFP) and attach it to the mask ROM
confirmation form.
❈ 3. Comments
(2/2)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-45
APPENDIX
3.3 ROM programming ordering method
3.3 ROM programming ordering method
GZZ-SH03-60B<06A0>
ROM number
740 FAMILY ROM PROGRAMMING CONFIRMATION FORM
Receipt
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37470E4-XXXSP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Date:
Section head Supervisor
signature
signature
❈ Customer
TEL
(
Company
name
Date
issued
)
Date:
Issuance
signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked ❈.
Submitted by
Supervisor
❈ 1. Confirmation
Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted.
Three sets of EPROMs are required for each pattern (Check @ in the appropriate box).
If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce ROM programming based on
this data. We shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the ROM data on the products we produce differ from this
data. Thus, the customer must be especially careful in verifying the data contained in the EPROMs submitted.
(hexadecimal notation)
Checksum code for entire EPROM
EPROM type (indicate the type used)
27128
27256
EPROM address
000016 Area for ASCII
EPROM address
000016 Area for ASCII
000F16
001016
codes of the name
of the product
‘M37470E4–’
1FFF16
200016
000F16
001016
5FFF16
600016
ROM (8K)
3FFF16
codes of the name
of the product
‘M37470E4–’
27512
EPROM address
000016 Area for ASCII
000F16
001016
codes of the name
of the product
‘M37470E4–’
DFFF16
E00016
ROM (8K)
7FFF16
ROM (8K)
FFFF16
(1) Set “FF16” in the shaded area.
(2) Write the ASCII codes that indicates the name of the
product ‘M37470E4–’ to addresses 000016 to 000F16 .
ASCII codes ‘M37470E4–’ are listed on the right. The
addresses and data are in hexadecimal notation.
Address
000016
000116
000216
000316
000416
000516
000616
000716
‘M’ = 4D16
‘3’ = 33 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘4’ = 34 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘0’ = 30 16
‘E’ = 4516
‘4’ = 34 16
(1/2)
3-46
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Address
000816
000916
000A16
000B16
000C16
000D16
000E16
000F16
‘ – ’ = 2D 16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
APPENDIX
3.3 ROM programming ordering method
GZZ-SH03-60B<06A0>
ROM number
740 FAMILY ROM PROGRAMMING CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37470E4-XXXSP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Recommend to writing the following pseudo-command to the start address of the assembler source program.
EPROM type
The pseudo-command
27128
❈=
.BYTE
$C000
‘M37470E4–’
27256
❈=
.BYTE
$8000
‘M37470E4–’
27512
❈=
.BYTE
$0000
‘M37470E4–’
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the ROM programming confirmation, the
ROM processing is disabled. Write the data correctly.
❈ 2. Mark specification
Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the type of package being ordered. Please submit the
shrink DIP package Mark Specification Form (only for built-in One Time PROM microcomputer).
❈ 3. Comments
(2/2)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-47
APPENDIX
3.3 ROM programming ordering method
GZZ-SH02-97B<9YA0>
ROM number
740 FAMILY ROM PROGRAMMING CONFIRMATION FORM
Receipt
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37470E8-XXXSP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Date:
Section head Supervisor
signature
signature
❈ Customer
TEL
(
Company
name
Date
issued
)
Date:
Issuance
signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked ❈.
Submitted by
Supervisor
❈ 1. Confirmation
Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted.
Three sets of EPROMs are required for each pattern (Check @ in the appropriate box).
If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce ROM programming based on
this data. We shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the ROM data on the products we produce differ from this
data. Thus, the customer must be especially careful in verifying the data contained in the EPROMs submitted.
Checksum code for entire EPROM
(hexadecimal notation)
EPROM type (indicate the type used)
27256
EPROM address
000016 Area for ASCII
000F16
001016
codes of the name
of the product
‘M37470E8–’
3FFF16
400016
27512
EPROM address
000016 Area for ASCII
000F16
001016
BFFF 16
C00016
ROM (16K)
7FFF16
codes of the name
of the product
‘M37470E8–’
ROM (16K)
FFFF16
(1) Set “FF16” in the shaded area.
(2) Write the ASCII codes that indicates the name of the
product ‘M37470E8–’ to addresses 000016 to 000F16 .
ASCII codes ‘M37470E8–’ are listed on the right. The
addresses and data are in hexadecimal notation.
Address
000016
000116
000216
000316
000416
000516
000616
000716
‘M’ = 4D16
‘3’ = 33 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘4’ = 34 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘0’ = 30 16
‘E’ = 4516
‘8’ = 38 16
(1/2)
3-48
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Address
000816
000916
000A16
000B16
000C16
000D16
000E16
000F16
‘ – ’ = 2D 16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
APPENDIX
3.3 ROM programming ordering method
GZZ-SH02-97B<9YA0>
ROM number
740 FAMILY ROM PROGRAMMING CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37470E8-XXXSP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Recommend to writing the following pseudo-command to the start address of the assembler source program.
EPROM type
The pseudo-command
27256
❈=
.BYTE
$8000
‘M37470E8–’
27512
❈=
.BYTE
$0000
‘M37470E8–’
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the ROM programming confirmation, the
ROM processing is disabled. Write the data correctly.
❈ 2. Mark specification
Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the type of package being ordered. Please submit the
shrink DIP package Mark Specification Form (only for built-in One Time PROM microcomputer).
❈ 3. Comments
(2/2)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-49
APPENDIX
3.3 ROM programming ordering method
GZZ-SH03-59B<06B0>
ROM number
740 FAMILY ROM PROGRAMMING CONFIRMATION FORM
Receipt
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37471E4-XXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Date:
Section head Supervisor
signature
signature
❈ Customer
TEL
(
Company
name
Date
issued
)
Date:
Issuance
signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked ❈.
Submitted by
Supervisor
❈ 1. Confirmation
Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted.
Three sets of EPROMs are required for each pattern (Check @ in the appropriate box).
If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce ROM programming based on
this data. We shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the ROM data on the products we produce differ from this
data. Thus, the customer must be especially careful in verifying the data contained in the EPROMs submitted.
Microcomputer name :
M37471E4-XXXSP
M37471E4-XXXFP
Checksum code for entire EPROM
(hexadecimal notation)
EPROM type (indicate the type used)
27128
27256
EPROM address
000016 Area for ASCII
EPROM address
000016 Area for ASCII
000F16
001016
codes of the name
of the product
‘M37471E4–’
1FFF16
200016
000F16
001016
5FFF16
600016
ROM (8K)
3FFF16
codes of the name
of the product
‘M37471E4–’
27512
EPROM address
000016 Area for ASCII
000F16
001016
codes of the name
of the product
‘M37471E4–’
DFFF16
E00016
ROM (8K)
7FFF16
ROM (8K)
FFFF16
(1) Set “FF16” in the shaded area.
(2) Write the ASCII codes that indicates the name of the
product ‘M37471E4–’ to addresses 000016 to 000F16 .
ASCII codes ‘M37471E4–’ are listed on the right. The
addresses and data are in hexadecimal notation.
Address
000016
000116
000216
000316
000416
000516
000616
000716
‘M’ = 4D16
‘3’ = 33 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘4’ = 34 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘1’ = 31 16
‘E’ = 4516
‘4’ = 34 16
(1/2)
3-50
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Address
000816
000916
000A16
000B16
000C16
000D16
000E16
000F16
‘ – ’ = 2D 16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
APPENDIX
3.3 ROM programming ordering method
GZZ-SH03-59B<06B0>
ROM number
740 FAMILY ROM PROGRAMMING CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37471E4-XXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Recommend to writing the following pseudo-command to the start address of the assembler source program.
EPROM type
The pseudo-command
27128
❈=
.BYTE
$C000
‘M37471E4–’
27256
❈=
.BYTE
$8000
‘M37471E4–’
27512
❈=
.BYTE
$0000
‘M37471E4–’
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the ROM programming confirmation, the
ROM processing is disabled. Write the data correctly.
❈ 2. Mark specification
Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the type of package being ordered. Please submit the
shrink DIP package Mark Specification Form (only for built-in One Time PROM microcomputer) for M37471E4-XXXSP or
the 56P6N Mark Specification Form the M37471E4-XXXFP.
❈ 3. Comments
(2/2)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-51
APPENDIX
3.3 ROM programming ordering method
GZZ-SH02-98B<9YB0>
ROM number
740 FAMILY ROM PROGRAMMING CONFIRMATION FORM
Receipt
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37471E8-XXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Date:
Section head Supervisor
signature
signature
❈ Customer
TEL
(
Company
name
Date
issued
)
Date:
Issuance
signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked ❈.
Submitted by
Supervisor
❈ 1. Confirmation
Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted.
Three sets of EPROMs are required for each pattern (Check @ in the appropriate box).
If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce ROM programming based on
this data. We shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the ROM data on the products we produce differ from this
data. Thus, the customer must be especially careful in verifying the data contained in the EPROMs submitted.
M37471E8-XXXSP
Microcomputer name :
M37471E8-XXXFP
(hexadecimal notation)
Checksum code for entire EPROM
EPROM type (indicate the type used)
27256
EPROM address
000016 Area for ASCII
000F16
001016
codes of the name
of the product
‘M37471E8–’
3FFF16
400016
27512
EPROM address
000016 Area for ASCII
000F16
001016
BFFF 16
C00016
ROM (16K)
7FFF16
codes of the name
of the product
‘M37471E8–’
ROM (16K)
FFFF16
(1) Set “FF16” in the shaded area.
(2) Write the ASCII codes that indicates the name of the
product ‘M37471E8–’ to addresses 000016 to 000F16 .
ASCII codes ‘M37471E8–’ are listed on the right. The
addresses and data are in hexadecimal notation.
Address
000016
000116
000216
000316
000416
000516
000616
000716
‘M’ = 4D16
‘3’ = 33 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘4’ = 34 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘1’ = 31 16
‘E’ = 4516
‘8’ = 38 16
(1/2)
3-52
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Address
000816
000916
000A16
000B16
000C16
000D16
000E16
000F16
‘ – ’ = 2D 16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
APPENDIX
3.3 ROM programming ordering method
GZZ-SH02-98B<9YB0>
ROM number
740 FAMILY ROM PROGRAMMING CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37471E8-XXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Recommend to writing the following pseudo-command to the start address of the assembler source program.
EPROM type
The pseudo-command
27256
❈ = $8000
.BYTE ‘M37471M8–’
27512
❈ = $0000
.BYTE ‘M37471M8–’
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the ROM programming confirmation, the
ROM processing is disabled. Write the data correctly.
❈ 2. Mark specification
Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the type of package being ordered. Please submit the
shrink DIP package Mark Specification Form (only for built-in One Time PROM microcomputer) for the M37471E8-XXXSP
or the 56P6N Mark Specification Form for the M37471E8-XXXFP.
❈ 3. Comments
(2/2)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-53
APPENDIX
3.3 ROM programming ordering method
GZZ-SH06-79B<2XA1>
ROM number
740 FAMILY ROM PROGRAMMING CONFIRMATION FORM
Receipt
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37477E8-XXXSP/FP
Date:
Section head Supervisor
signature
signature
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
❈ Customer
TEL
(
Company
name
Date
issued
)
Date:
Issuance
signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked ❈.
Submitted by
Supervisor
❈ 1. Confirmation
Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted.
Three EPROMs are required for each pattern.
If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce ROM programming based on
this data. We shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the ROM data on the products we produce differs from this
data. Thus, extreme care must be taken to verify the data in the submitted EPROMs.
M37477E8-XXXSP
Microcomputer name :
M37477E8-XXXFP
(hexadecimal notation)
Checksum code for entire EPROM
EPROM type (indicate the type used)
27256
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37477E8–’
27512
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37477E8–’
000F16
001016
000F16
001016
3FFF16
400016
BFFF 16
C00016
data
ROM 16384 bytes
7FFF16
data
ROM 16384 bytes
FFFF16
(1) Set the data in the unused area (the shaded area of
the diagram) to “FF16”.
(2) The ASCII codes of the product name “M37477E8–”
must be entered in addresses 000016 to 000816 . And
set the data “FF16” in addresses 000916 to 000F16 .
The ASCII codes and addresses are listed to the right
in hexadecimal notation.
Address
000016
000116
000216
000316
000416
000516
000616
000716
‘M’ = 4D16
‘3’ = 33 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘4’ = 34 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘E’ = 4516
‘8’ = 38 16
(1/2)
3-54
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Address
000816
000916
000A16
000B16
000C16
000D16
000E16
000F16
‘ – ’ = 2D 16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
APPENDIX
3.3 ROM programming ordering method
GZZ-SH06-79B<2XA1>
ROM number
740 FAMILY ROM PROGRAMMING CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37477E8-XXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
We recommend the use of the following pseudo-command to the start address of the assembler source program.
EPROM type
The pseudo-command
27256
❈=
.BYTE
$8000
‘M37477E8–’
27512
❈=
.BYTE
$0000
‘M37477E8–’
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the ROM programming confirmation, the
ROM will not be processed.
❈ 2. Mark specification
Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the type of package being ordered. Please submit the
shrink DIP package Mark Specification Form (only for built-in One Time PROM microcomputer) for the M37477E8-XXXSP
or the 32P2W Mark Specification Form for the M37477E8-XXXFP.
❈ 3. Comments
(2/2)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-55
APPENDIX
3.3 ROM programming ordering method
GZZ-SH06-83B<2XA1>
ROM number
740 FAMILY ROM PROGRAMMING CONFIRMATION FORM
Receipt
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37477E8TXXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Date:
Section head Supervisor
signature
signature
❈ Customer
TEL
(
Company
name
Date
issued
)
Date:
Issuance
signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked ❈.
Submitted by
Supervisor
❈ 1. Confirmation
Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted.
Three EPROMs are required for each pattern.
If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce ROM programming based on
this data. We shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the ROM data on the products we produce differs from this
data. Thus, extreme care must be taken to verify the data in the submitted EPROMs.
M37477E8TXXXSP
Microcomputer name :
M37477E8TXXXFP
(hexadecimal notation)
Checksum code for entire EPROM
EPROM type (indicate the type used)
27256
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37477E8T’
27512
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37477E8T’
000F16
001016
000F16
001016
3FFF16
400016
BFFF 16
C00016
data
ROM 16384 bytes
7FFF16
data
ROM 16384 bytes
FFFF16
(1) Set the data in the unused area (the shaded area of
the diagram) to “FF16”.
(2) The ASCII codes of the product name “M37477E8T”
must be entered in addresses 000016 to 000816 . And
set the data “FF16” in addresses 000916 to 000F16 .
The ASCII codes and addresses are listed to the right
in hexadecimal notation.
Address
000016
000116
000216
000316
000416
000516
000616
000716
‘M’ = 4D16
‘3’ = 33 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘4’ = 34 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘E’ = 4516
‘8’ = 38 16
(1/2)
3-56
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Address
000816
000916
000A16
000B16
000C16
000D16
000E16
000F16
‘ T ’ = 5416
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
APPENDIX
3.3 ROM programming ordering method
GZZ-SH06-83B<2XA1>
ROM number
740 FAMILY ROM PROGRAMMING CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37477E8TXXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
We recommend the use of the following pseudo-command to the start address of the assembler source program.
EPROM type
The pseudo-command
27256
❈=
.BYTE
$8000
‘M37477E8T’
27512
❈=
.BYTE
$0000
‘M37477E8T’
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the ROM programming confirmation, the
ROM will not be processed.
❈ 2. Mark specification
Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the type of package being ordered. Please submit the
shrink DIP package Mark Specification Form (only for built-in One Time PROM microcomputer) for the M37477E8TXXXSP
or the 32P2W Mark Specification Form for the M37477E8TXXXFP.
❈ 3. Comments
(2/2)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-57
APPENDIX
3.3 ROM programming ordering method
GZZ-SH06-81B<2XA0>
ROM number
740 FAMILY ROM PROGRAMMING CONFIRMATION FORM
Receipt
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37478E8-XXXSP/FP
Date:
Section head Supervisor
signature
signature
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
❈ Customer
TEL
(
Company
name
Date
issued
)
Date:
Issuance
signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked ❈.
Submitted by
Supervisor
❈ 1. Confirmation
Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted.
Three EPROMs are required for each pattern.
If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce ROM programming based on
this data. We shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the mask ROM data on the products we produce differs from
this data. Thus, extreme care must be taken to verify the data in the submitted EPROMs.
Microcomputer name :
M37478E8-XXXSP
M37478E8-XXXFP
Checksum code for entire EPROM
(hexadecimal notation)
EPROM type (indicate the type used)
27256
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37478E8–’
27512
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37478E8–’
000F16
001016
000F16
001016
3FFF16
400016
BFFF16
C00016
data
ROM 16384 bytes
7FFF16
data
ROM 16384 bytes
FFFF16
(1) Set the data in the unused area (the shaded area of
the diagram) to “FF16”.
(2) The ASCII codes of the product name “M37478E8–”
must be entered in addresses 000016 to 000816 . And
set the data “FF16” in addresses 000916 to 000F16 .
The ASCII codes and addresses are listed to the right
in hexadecimal notation.
Address
000016
000116
000216
000316
000416
000516
000616
000716
‘M’ = 4D16
‘3’ = 33 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘4’ = 34 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘8’ = 38 16
‘E’ = 4516
‘8’ = 38 16
(1/2)
3-58
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Address
000816
000916
000A16
000B16
000C16
000D16
000E16
000F16
‘ – ’ = 2D 16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
APPENDIX
3.3 ROM programming ordering method
GZZ-SH06-81B<2XA0>
ROM number
740 FAMILY ROM PROGRAMMING CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37478E8-XXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
We recommend the use of the following pseudo-command to the start address of the assembler source program.
EPROM type
The pseudo-command
27256
❈=
.BYTE
$8000
‘M37478E8–’
27512
❈=
.BYTE
$0000
‘M37478E8–’
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the ROM programming confirmation form,
the ROM will not be processed.
❈ 2. Mark specification
Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the type of package being ordered. Please submit the
shrink DIP package Mark Specification Form (only for built-in One Time PROM microcomputer) for the M37478E8-XXXSP
or the 56P6N Mark Specification Form for the M37478E8-XXXFP.
❈ 3. Comments
(2/2)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-59
APPENDIX
3.3 ROM programming ordering method
GZZ-SH06-85B<2XA0>
ROM number
740 FAMILY ROM PROGRAMMING CONFIRMATION FORM
Receipt
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37478E8TXXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Date:
Section head Supervisor
signature
signature
❈ Customer
TEL
(
Company
name
Date
issued
)
Date:
Issuance
signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked ❈.
Submitted by
Supervisor
❈ 1. Confirmation
Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted.
Three EPROMs are required for each pattern.
If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce ROM programming based on
this data. We shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the mask ROM data on the products we produce differs from
this data. Thus, extreme care must be taken to verify the data in the submitted EPROMs.
Microcomputer name :
M37478E8TXXXSP
M37478E8TXXXFP
Checksum code for entire EPROM
(hexadecimal notation)
EPROM type (indicate the type used)
27256
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37478E8T’
27512
EPROM address
000016
Product name
ASCII code :
‘M37478E8T’
000F16
001016
000F16
001016
3FFF16
400016
BFFF16
C00016
data
ROM 16384 bytes
7FFF16
data
ROM 16384 bytes
FFFF16
(1) Set the data in the unused area (the shaded area of
the diagram) to “FF16”.
(2) The ASCII codes of the product name “M37478E8T”
must be entered in addresses 000016 to 000816 . And
set the data “FF16” in addresses 000916 to 000F16 .
The ASCII codes and addresses are listed to the right
in hexadecimal notation.
Address
000016
000116
000216
000316
000416
000516
000616
000716
‘M’ = 4D16
‘3’ = 33 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘4’ = 34 16
‘7’ = 37 16
‘8’ = 38 16
‘E’ = 4516
‘8’ = 38 16
(1/2)
3-60
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Address
000816
000916
000A16
000B16
000C16
000D16
000E16
000F16
‘ T ’ = 5416
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
APPENDIX
3.3 ROM programming ordering method
GZZ-SH06-85B<2XA0>
ROM number
740 FAMILY ROM PROGRAMMING CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M37478E8TXXXSP/FP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
We recommend the use of the following pseudo-command to the start address of the assembler source program.
EPROM type
The pseudo-command
27256
❈ = $8000
.BYTE ‘M37478E8T’
27512
❈ = $0000
.BYTE ‘M37478E8T’
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the ROM programming confirmation form,
the ROM will not be processed.
❈ 2. Mark specification
Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the type of package being ordered. Please submit the
shrink DIP package Mark Specification Form (only for built-in One Time PROM microcomputer) for the M37478E8TXXXSP
or the 56P6N Mark Specification Form for the M37478E8TXXXFP.
❈ 3. Comments
(2/2)
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-61
APPENDIX
3.4 Mark specification form
3.4 Mark specification form
32P4B (32-PIN SHRINK DIP) MARK SPECIFICATION FORM
Mitsubishi IC catalog name
Please choose one of the marking types below (A, B, C), and enter the Mitsubishi IC catalog name and the special mark (if needed).
A. Standard Mitsubishi Mark
#2
!7
Mitsubishi lot number
(6-digit or 7-digit)
Mitsubishi IC catalog name
q
!6
B. Customer’s Parts Number + Mitsubishi catalog name
#2
!7
Customer’s Parts Number
Note : The fonts and size of characters
are standard Mitsubishi type.
Mitsubishi IC catalog name
Mitsubishi lot number
(6-digit or 7-digit)
q
Note1 :
2:
3:
4:
!6
The mark field should be written right aligned.
The fonts and size of characters are standard Mitsubishi type.
Customer’s Parts Number can be up to 16 characters : Only 0 ~ 9, A ~ Z, +, –, /, (, ), &, , (periods), and (commas) are usable.
If the Mitsubishi logo
is not required, check the box on the right.
Mitsubishi logo is not required
.
,
C. Special Mark Required
#2
!7
q
!6
Note1 : If the Special Mark is to be Printed, indicate the desired layout of the mark in the upper figure. The layout will be duplicated as
close as possible. Mitsubishi lot number (6-digit or 7-digit) and Mask ROM number (3-digit) are always marked.
2 : If the customer’s trade mark logo must be used in the Special Mark, check the
Special logo required
box on the right. Please submit a clean original of the logo. For the new special
character fonts a clean font original (ideally logo drawing) must be submitted.
3 : The standard Mitsubishi font is used for all characters except for a logo.
3-62
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.4 Mark specification form
32P2W-A (32-PIN SOP) MARK SPECIFICATION FORM
Mitsubishi IC catalog name
Please choose one of the marking types below (A, B, C), and enter the Mitsubishi catalog name and the special mark (if needed).
A. Standard Mitsubishi Mark
#2
!7
Mitsubishi IC catalog name
Mitsubishi IC catalog name
Mitsubishi lot number
(6-digit or 7-digit)
q
!6
B. Customer’s Parts Number + Mitsubishi catalog name
#2
!7
Mitsubishi lot number
(6-digit or 7-digit)
q
Customer’s Parts Number
Note : The fonts and size of characters are standard Mitsubishi
type.
Mitsubishi IC catalog name
Note1 : The mark field should be written right aligned.
2 : The fonts and size of characters are standard Mitsubishi
type.
3 : Customer’s Parts Number can be up to 13 characters :
Only 0 ~ 9, A ~ Z, +, –, /, (, ), &, , (periods), (commas) are usable.
4 : If the Mitsubishi logo
is not required, check the box
below.
Mitsubishi logo is not required
.
!6
,
C. Special Mark Required
#2
!7
q
!6
Note1 : If the Special Mark is to be Printed, indicate the desired
layout of the mark in the left figure. The layout will be
duplicated as close as possible.
Mitsubishi lot number (6-digit or 7-digit) and Mask ROM
number (3-digit) are always marked.
2 : If the customer’s trade mark logo must be used in the
Special Mark, check the box below.
Please submit a clean original of the logo.
For the new special character fonts a clean font original
(ideally logo drawing) must be submitted.
Special logo required
3 : The standard Mitsubishi font is used for all characters
except for a logo.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-63
APPENDIX
3.4 Mark specification form
42P4B (42-PIN SHRINK DIP) MARK SPECIFICATION FORM
Mitsubishi IC catalog name
Please choose one of the marking types below (A, B, C), and enter the Mitsubishi IC catalog name and the special mark (if needed).
A. Standard Mitsubishi Mark
$2
@2
Mitsubishi lot number
(6-digit or 7-digit)
Mitsubishi IC catalog name
q
@1
B. Customer’s Parts Number + Mitsubishi catalog name
$2
@2
Customer’s Parts Number
Note : The fonts and size of characters
are standard Mitsubishi type.
Mitsubishi IC catalog name
Mitsubishi lot number
(6-digit or 7-digit)
q
Note1 :
2:
3:
4:
@1
The mark field should be written right aligned.
The fonts and size of characters are standard Mitsubishi type.
Customer’s Parts Number can be up to 15 characters : Only 0 ~ 9, A ~ Z, +, –, /, (, ), &, , (periods), and (commas) are usable.
If the Mitsubishi logo
is not required, check the box on the right.
Mitsubishi logo is not required
.
,
C. Special Mark Required
$2
@2
q
@1
Note1 : If the Special Mark is to be Printed, indicate the desired layout of the mark in the upper figure. The layout will be duplicated as
close as possible. Mitsubishi lot number (6-digit or 7-digit) and Mask ROM number (3-digit) are always marked.
2 : If the customer’s trade mark logo must be used in the Special Mark, check the
Special logo required
box on the right. Please submit a clean original of the logo. For the new special
character fonts a clean font original (ideally logo drawing) must be submitted.
3 : The standard Mitsubishi font is used for all characters except for a logo.
3-64
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.4 Mark specification form
56P6N-A (56-PIN QFP) MARK SPECIFICATION FORM
Mitsubishi IC catalog name
Please choose one of the marking types below (A, B, C), and enter the Mitsubishi IC catalog name and the special mark (if needed).
A. Standard Mitsubishi Mark
$5
@9
$4
@8
Mitsubishi lot number
(6-digit or 7-digit)
%6
q
Mitsubishi IC catalog name
!6
!7
B. Customer’s Parts Number + Mitsubishi IC catalog name
$5
$4
@9
@8
Customer’s Parts Number
Note : The fonts and size of characters are standard Mitsubishi
type.
Mitsubishi IC catalog name and Mitsubishi lot number
Note1 : The mark field should be written right aligned.
2 : The fonts and size of characters are standard Mitsubishi
type.
3 : Customer’s Parts Number can be up to 11 characters :
Only 0 ~ 9, A ~ Z, +, –, /, (, ), &, , (period), and
(comma) are usable.
4 : If the Mitsubishi logo
is not required, check the box
below.
Mitsubishi logo is not required
.
%6
q
!6
!7
,
5 : Arrangement of Mitsubishi IC catalog name and
Mitsubishi lot number is dependent on number of
Mitsubishi IC catalog name and that Mitsubishi logo is
required or not.
C. Special Mark Required
$5
$4
%6
q
@9
!6
@8
Note1 : If the Special Mark is to be Printed, indicate the desired
layout of the mark in the left figure. The layout will be
duplicated as close as possible.
Mitsubishi lot number (6-digit or 7-digit) and Mask ROM
number (3-digit) are always marked.
2 : If the customer’s trade mark logo must be used in the
Special Mark, check the box below.
Please submit a clean original of the logo.
For the new special character fonts a clean font original
(ideally logo drawing) must be submitted.
!7
Special logo required
3 : The standard Mitsubishi font is used for all characters
except for a logo.
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-65
APPENDIX
3.4 Mark specification form
SHRINK DIP MARK SPECIFICATION FORM
for One Time PROM version microcomputers
Enter the catalog number of the microcomputer for which this mark specification is intended. (If you do not know the ROM code number,
enter XXX in its place.)
The catalog number of the microcomputer
M
A. Standard Mitsubishi Mark
Customer specified part number will be printed together with the ROM code number on the top line.
Enter the desired part number left aligned in the box below. (up to 10 characters)
Note2 :
RXXX
Mitsubishi catalog name
(blank model number before writing)
Mitsubishi lot number
(6-digit or 7-digit)
Note1 : The following characters can be used in the part number :
Uppercase alphabet, numbers, ampersand, hyphen, period, comma, +, /, (, ),
( will be printed at 1.5 x character width)
2 : XXX is the ROM code number.
B. Special Mark Required
If you desire anything other than the standard Mitsubishi mark, it will be treated as a special mark.
Special marks will take longer to produce and should be avoided if possible.
If a special mark is to be printed, indicate the desired layout of the mark in the figure below. The layout will be duplicated as closely as
possible.
Note1 : If the customer’s trademark logo must be used in the Special Mark, please submit a clean original logo.
Note that special marks require extra cost and time to produce.
3-66
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.5 Package outline
3.5 Package outline
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-67
APPENDIX
3.5 Package outline
3-68
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.6 SFR memory map
3.6 SFR memory map
Figure 3.6.1 shows the special function register (SFR) memory map.
00C0 16
00C1 16
00C2 16
00C3 16
00C4 16
00C5 16
00C6 16
00C7 16
00C8 16
00C9 16
00CA16
00CB16
00CC16
00CD16
00CE16
00CF16
00D0 16
00D1 16
00D2 16
00D3 16
00D4 16
00D5 16
00D6 16
00D7 16
00D8 16
00D9 16
00DA16
00DB16
00DC16
00DD16
00DE16
00DF16
Port P0
Port P0 direction register
Port P1
Port P1 direction register
Port P2
Port P2 direction register (Note 1)
Port P3
Port P4
Port P4 direction register
Port P5 (Note 2)
Port P0 pull-up control register
Port P1-P5 pull-up control register (Note 3)
Edge polarity selection register
Input latch register
A-D control register
A-D conversion register
Serial I/O mode register
Serial I/O register
Serial I/O counter
(Note 4)
Byte counter
00E016
00E116
00E216
00E316
00E416
00E516
00E616
00E716
00E816
00E916
00EA16
00EB16
00EC16
00ED16
00EE16
00EF16
00F016
00F116
00F216
00F316
00F416
00F516
00F616
00F716
00F816
00F916
00FA16
00FB16
00FC16
00FD16
00FE16
00FF16
Transmit/receive buffer register
Serial I/O status register
Serial I/O control register
UART control register
Baud rate generator
(Note 5)
Timer 1
Timer 2
Timer 3
Timer 4
Timer FF register
Timer 12 mode register
Timer 34 mode register
Timer mode register 2
CPU mode register
Interrupt request register 1
Interrupt request register 2
Interrupt control register 1
Interrupt control register 2
Notes 1: In the 7477/7478 group, this register is not located.
2: In the 7470/7477 group, this register is not located.
3: This address is allocated P1-P4 pull-up control register for the 7470/7477 group.
4: In the 7477/7478 group, this register is not located.
5: In the 7470/7471 group, this register is not located.
Fig. 3.6.1 SFR memory map
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-69
APPENDIX
3.7 Pin configuration
3.7 Pin configuration
Figures 3.7.1 to 3.7.4 show the pin configuration of 7470/7471/7477/7478 group.
1
32
2
31
3
30
4
29
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
M37470M8-XXXSP
M37470E8-XXXSP
P17/SRDY
P16/CLK
P15/SOUT
P14/SIN
P13/T1
P12/T0
P11
P10
P23/IN3
P22/IN2
P21/IN1
P20/IN0
VREF
XIN
XOUT
VSS
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
13
20
14
19
15
18
16
17
Outline
P07
P06
P05
P04
P03
P02
P01
P00
P41
P40
P33/CNTR 1
P32/CNTR 0
P31/INT1
P30/INT0
RESET
VCC
32P4B (Note)
Note: The M37470M2-XXXSP and M37470M4/E4-XXXSP are included in the 32P4B package. All of
these products are pin-compatible.
Fig. 3.7.1 Pin configuration of 7470 group
3-70
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.7 Pin configuration
1
42
2
41
3
40
4
39
5
38
6
37
7
36
M37471M8-XXXSP
M37471E8-XXXSP
M37471E8SS
P53
P17/SRDY
P16/CLK
P15/SOUT
P14/SIN
P13/T1
P12/T0
P11
P10
P27/IN7
P26/IN6
P25/IN5
P24/IN4
P23/IN3
P22/IN2
P21/IN1
P20/IN0
VREF
XIN
XOUT
VSS
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
P52
P07
P06
P05
P04
P03
P02
P01
P00
P43
P42
P41
P40
P33/CNTR1
P32/CNTR0
P31/INT1
P30/INT0
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
15
28
16
27
17
26
18
25
RESET
19
24
20
23
21
22
P51/XCOUT
P50/XCIN
VCC
42P4B (Note 1)
42S1B-A (M37471E8SS)
30
29
31
32
34
33
35
36
38
37
39
40
42
41
43
44
NC
P04
P03
P02
P01
P00
P43
P42
P41
P40
NC
P33/CNTR 1
P32/CNTR0
P31/INT1
P30/INT0
NC
Outline
NC
P05
P06
P07
P52
NC
VSS
P53
45
28
RESET
46
27
47
26
48
25
52
21
P17/SRDY
P16/CLK
P15/SOUT
NC
53
20
54
19
55
18
56
17
NC
P51/XCOUT
P50/XCIN
NC
VCC
VSS
AVSS
NC
XOUT
XIN
NC
49
24
16
15
14
22
13
12
11
9
10
8
7
6
4
3
2
23
NC
P14/SIN
P13/T1
P12/T0
P11
P10
P27/IN7
P26/IN6
P25/IN5
P24/IN4
P23/IN3
P22/IN2
P21/IN1
P20/IN0
VREF
NC
1
51
5
M37471M8-XXXFP
M37471E8-XXXFP
50
Outline
56P6N-A (Note 2)
NC: No connection
Notes 1 :The M37471M2-XXXSP and M37471M4/E4-XXXSP are included in the 42P4B package. All of these
products are pin-compatible.
2 :The M37471M2-XXXFP and M37471M4/E4-XXXFP are included in the 56P6N-A package. All of
these products are pin-compatible.
3 :The only differences between the 42P4B package product and the 56P6N-A package product are
package shape, absolute maximum ratings and the fact that the 56P6N-A package product has an AVSS pin.
Fig. 3.7.2 Pin configuration of 7471 group
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-71
APPENDIX
3.7 Pin configuration
13
20
14
19
P07
P06
P05
P04
P03
P02
P01
P00
P41
P40
P33/CNTR 1
P32/CNTR 0
P31/INT1
P30/INT0
15
18
RESET
16
17
VCC
1
32
2
31
3
30
4
29
M37477M8-XXXSP
M37477E8-XXXSP
M37477M8TXXXSP
M37477E8TXXXSP
P17/SRDY
P16/SCLK
P15/TXD
P14/RXD
P13/T1
P12/T0
P11
P10
P23/IN3
P22/IN2
P21/IN1
P20/IN0
VREF
XIN
XOUT
VSS
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Outline
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
32P4B (Note 1)
13
20
14
19
P07
P06
P05
P04
P03
P02
P01
P00
P41
P40
P33/CNTR 1
P32/CNTR 0
P31/INT1
P30/INT0
15
18
RESET
16
17
VCC
1
32
2
31
3
30
4
29
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Outline
M37477M8-XXXFP
M37477E8-XXXFP
M37477M8TXXXFP
M37477E8TXXXFP
P17/SRDY
P16/SCLK
P15/TXD
P14/RXD
P13/T1
P12/T0
P11
P10
P23/IN3
P22/IN2
P21/IN1
P20/IN0
VREF
XIN
XOUT
VSS
28
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
32P2W-A (Note 2)
Notes 1 : The M37477M2TXXXSP, M37477M4-XXXSP and M37477M4TXXXSP are included in the 32P4B package.
These products are pin-compatible.
2 : The M37477M2TXXXFP, M37477M4-XXXFP and M37477M4TXXXFP are included in the 32P2W-A package.
These products are pin-compatible.
3 : The only differences between the 32P4B package product and the 32P2W-A package product are
package shape and absolute maximum ratings.
Fig. 3.7.3 Pin configuration of 7477 group
3-72
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.7 Pin configuration
1
42
2
41
3
40
4
39
5
38
6
37
7
36
M37478M8-XXXSP
M37478E8-XXXSP
M37478M8TXXXSP
M37478E8TXXXSP
M37478E8SS
P53
P17/SRDY
P16/SCLK
P15/TXD
P14/RXD
P13/T1
P12/T0
P11
P10
P27/IN7
P26/IN6
P25/IN5
P24/IN4
P23/IN3
P22/IN2
P21/IN1
P20/IN0
VREF
XIN
XOUT
VSS
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
P52
P07
P06
P05
P04
P03
P02
P01
P00
P43
P42
P41
P40
P33/CNTR1
P32/CNTR0
P31/INT1
P30/INT0
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
15
28
16
27
17
26
18
25
RESET
19
24
20
23
21
22
P51/XCOUT
P50/XCIN
VCC
42P4B (Note 1)
42S1B-A (M37478E8SS)
29
31
30
33
32
35
34
37
36
39
38
41
40
42
43
44
NC
P04
P03
P02
P01
P00
P43
P42
P41
P40
NC
P33/CNTR 1
P32/CNTR0
P31/INT1
P30/INT0
NC
Outline
NC
P05
P06
P07
P52
NC
VSS
P53
45
28
RESET
46
27
47
26
P17/SRDY
P16/SCLK
P15/TXD
NC
53
20
54
19
55
18
56
17
NC
P51/XCOUT
P50/XCIN
NC
VCC
VSS
AVSS
NC
XOUT
XIN
NC
25
48
22
16
14
21
15
12
23
13
10
11
8
9
4
3
2
24
NC
P14/RXD
P13/T1
P12/T0
P11
P10
P27/IN7
P26/IN6
P25/IN5
P24/IN4
P23/IN3
P22/IN2
P21/IN1
P20/IN0
VREF
NC
1
52
7
51
6
50
5
M37478M8-XXXFP
M37478E8-XXXFP
M37478M8TXXXFP
M37478E8TXXXFP
49
Outline
56P6N-A (Note 2)
NC: No connection
Notes1 : The M37478M2TXXXSP, M37478M4-XXXSP and M37478M4TXXXSP are included in the 42P4B package.
These products are pin-compatible
2 : The M37478M2TXXXFP, M37478M4-XXXFP and M37478M4TXXXFP are included in the 56P6N-A package.
These products are pin-compatible
3 : The only differences between the 42P4B package product and the 56P6N-A package product are package
shape, absolute maximum ratings and the fact that the 56P6N-A package product has anAVSS pin.
Fig. 3.7.4 Pin configuration of 7478 group
7470/7471/7477/7478 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-73
MITSUBISHI SEMICONDUCTORS
USER’S MANUAL
7470/7471/7477/7478 Group
November First Edition 1996
Editioned by
Committee of editing of Mitsubishi Semiconductor USER’S MANUAL
Published by
Mitsubishi Electric Corp., Semiconductor Marketing Division
This book, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form without permission
of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
©1996 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
User’s Manual
7470/7471/7477/7478 Group
Printed in Japan (ROD)
© 1996 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION.
New publication, effective November, 1996.
Specifications subject to change without notice.